Operator`s manual | Channel Vision 6106 Camera Accessories User Manual

BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
GL
Operator's Manual
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 1
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
RAdBlue®
is a registered trademark of the
Association of German Automobile
Manufacturers (VDA).
RBabySmart™ is a registered trademark of
the Siemens Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of the
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related brands are registered
trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the
following symbols:
G Warning
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
! Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that could cause damage to your
vehicle.
i Practical tips or other information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates instructions
that you must follow.
A number of these symbols
X
appearing in succession indicates
instructions with several steps.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
This symbol marks a warning or
YY
procedure which is continued on
the next page.
Display Text in the multifunction display/
COMAND display.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 2
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 1
Version: 3.0.3.5
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, please familiarize
yourself with your vehicle and read this
manual, especially the safety and warning
notices. This will help you to obtain the
maximum pleasure from your vehicle and to
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry
specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical
features
You cannot therefore base any claims on the
data, illustrations or descriptions contained
in this manual.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
ROperator's
Manual
Instructions1
RService Booklet
RSupplements relating to vehicle equipment
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
RBrief
1
Canada only.
1645843883 É1645843883LËÍ
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 2
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 3
Version: 3.0.3.5
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 19
Safety ................................................... 35
Opening and closing ........................... 71
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 113
Climate control ................................. 129
Driving and parking .......................... 145
On-board computer and displays .... 213
Loading, stowing and features ........ 263
Maintenance and care ...................... 293
Roadside assistance ......................... 307
Tires and wheels ............................... 333
Technical data ................................... 361
3
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
4
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 4
Version: 3.0.3.5
Index
1, 2, 3 ...
115 V socket ...................................... 282
12 V socket ........................................ 281
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Function/notes ................................ 67
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 202
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 235
Function/notes ................................ 65
Warning lamp ................................. 256
Accident (notes) ................................ 309
Active light function (display
message) ............................................ 240
Active service system
see Service interval display
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 194
AdBlue®
Adding ........................................... 163
Display message ............................ 243
Additional functions (on-board
computer) .......................................... 226
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 194
Air bags
Display message ............................ 232
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 39
Important safety information ........... 38
Knee bag .......................................... 40
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp (only Canada) ........... 48
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp (only USA) ................ 42
Safety guidelines ............................. 37
Side impact air bag .......................... 41
Window curtain air bag .................... 42
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Air dehumidification
Activating/deactivating with
cooling ........................................... 137
Air distribution
Setting ........................................... 140
Air filter (display message) .............. 243
Airflow
Setting ........................................... 140
Air nozzles
see Air vents .................................. 143
Air pressure
see Tire pressure
Air-recirculation mode
Activating/deactivating ................. 141
Air vents ............................................. 143
Important safety information ......... 142
Rear ............................................... 143
Setting the center air vents ........... 143
Setting the side air vents ............... 143
Alarm system
see ATA
Ambient lighting (on-board
computer) .......................................... 223
Anti-lock Braking System
see ABS
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA
Anti-theft system
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 69
Approach/departure angle .............. 177
Ashtray ............................................... 279
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 69
Function ........................................... 69
Switching off the alarm .................... 69
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 219
AUTO lights
see Light sensor
Automatic car wash .......................... 300
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 152
Display message ............................ 250
Driving tips .................................... 155
Emergency running mode .............. 157
Kickdown ....................................... 155
Malfunction .................................... 157
Pulling away ................................... 149
Starting .......................................... 148
Trailer towing ................................. 155
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 5
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Replacing ....................................... 123
Standing lamps (front) ................... 122
Turn signals (front) ......................... 122
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 66
Battery
Charging ........................................ 323
Checking (SmartKey) ....................... 76
Display message ............................ 242
Important safety guidelines
(SmartKey) ....................................... 75
Jump-starting ................................. 325
Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 76
Safety notes .................................. 322
Belt
see Seat belts
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 226
Display message ............................ 246
Function/notes ............................. 200
Trailer towing ................................. 202
BlueTEC
AdBlue® ......................................... 367
Adding AdBlue® ............................. 163
Brake fluid
Notes ............................................. 369
Brake fluid level ................................ 298
Brake lamp (display message) ......... 238
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 65
BAS .................................................. 66
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 369
Display message ............................ 236
Maintenance .................................. 169
Parking brake ........................ 166, 170
Warning lamp ................................. 254
Braking
Important safety instructions ......... 168
Breakdown
see Accident (notes)
see Flat tire
Bulbs
Backup lamp .................................. 123
High-beam headlamps ................... 122
License plate lamp ......................... 124
Low-beam headlamps .................... 121
Overview ........................................ 120
Parking lamps ................................ 122
Rear fog lamp ................................ 123
C
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center) ......... 22
California
Important notice for retail
customers and lessees .................... 20
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Care
Carpets .......................................... 305
Car wash ........................................ 300
Display ........................................... 303
Gear or selector lever .................... 304
Headlamps ..................................... 302
Notes ............................................. 299
Paint .............................................. 301
Plastic trim .................................... 304
Power washer ................................ 301
Rear view camera .......................... 303
Roof lining ...................................... 305
Seat belt ........................................ 305
Seat covers .................................... 304
Sensors ......................................... 303
Steering wheel ............................... 304
Tail pipes ....................................... 303
Trim strips ..................................... 304
Washing by hand ........................... 301
Wheels ........................................... 301
Windows ........................................ 302
Wiper blades .................................. 302
Wooden trim .................................. 304
Cargo compartment cover ............... 269
Cargo compartment enlargement . . . 266
Cargo compartment floor ................. 310
Cargo net
Attaching ....................................... 270
Important safety information ......... 270
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 268
CD player/CD changer (on-board
computer) .......................................... 219
Center console ..................................... 31
5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
6
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 6
Version: 3.0.3.5
Index
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 224
SmartKey ......................................... 72
Changing bulbs
Headlamps ..................................... 120
Changing gears .................................. 154
Changing the programming
SmartKey ......................................... 75
Checklist
After driving off-road ...................... 175
Before driving off-road ................... 175
Child-proof locks
Rear doors ....................................... 64
Special seat belt retractor ............... 61
Children
In the vehicle ................................... 59
Restraint systems ............................ 59
Child seat
Automatic recognition ..................... 48
Automatic recognition/air bag
deactivation, self-test ...................... 50
ISOFIX (LATCH-type child seat
anchors) ........................................... 62
Special seat belt retractor ............... 61
Top Tether ....................................... 62
Troubleshooting ............................... 51
Cigarette lighter ................................ 280
Climate control
Activating/deactivating ................. 136
Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode ......................... 141
Controlling automatically ............... 138
Cooling with air dehumidification . . 137
Defrosting the windshield .............. 140
Demisting the windows .................. 141
Dual-zone automatic climate
control ........................................... 131
Important safety information ......... 130
Indicator lamp ................................ 138
Multi-zone automatic climate
control ........................................... 132
Problems with "cooling with air
dehumidification" ........................... 138
Problems with the rear window
heating .......................................... 141
Rear control panel ................. 133, 136
Refrigerant ..................................... 369
Setting the air distribution ............. 140
Setting the airflow ......................... 140
Setting the air vents ...................... 143
Setting the temperature ................ 139
Setting the temperature (rear
compartment) ................................ 139
Switching the MONO function on/
off .................................................. 140
Switching the rear window
heating on/off ............................... 141
Switching the residual heat
function on/off .............................. 142
Clock (on-board computer) ............... 222
Cockpit ................................................. 27
Combination switch .......................... 117
Compass ............................................ 291
Calling up ....................................... 291
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 227
Convenience closing feature .............. 87
Convenience opening feature ............ 86
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 297
Display message ............................ 240
Notes ............................................. 369
Temperature gauge ........................ 218
Cooling
see Climate control
Cornering light (display message) ... 237
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting ............................................... 119
Crossbar
Installing ........................................ 274
Setting the span width ................... 276
Cross bar ............................................ 273
Cruise control .................................... 179
Cruise control lever ....................... 179
Display message ............................ 246
Cup holder ......................................... 277
Center console .............................. 277
Rear compartment ......................... 278
third row of seats ........................... 278
Current fuel consumption (onboard computer) ............................... 227
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ............................................... 22
Customer Relations Department ....... 23
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 7
Version: 3.0.3.5
Index
D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Date (on-board computer) ................ 222
Daytime driving lights
Display message ............................ 240
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 223
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 223
Interior lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 224
Diesel particle filter .......................... 168
Differential locks ............................... 207
Differential locks (display
message) ............................................ 245
Digital speedometer
Displaying ...................................... 218
Setting the unit (on-board
computer) ...................................... 222
DIRECT SELECT lever
see Automatic transmission
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 303
Display messages
Brakes ........................................... 235
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 229
Clearing (on-board computer) ........ 229
Engine ............................................ 240
Lamps ............................................ 240
Safety systems .............................. 230
Service interval display .................. 298
Tires ............................................... 248
Vehicle ........................................... 250
Distance recorder ............................. 218
Distance warning function
(vehicles with DISTRONIC) ................. 69
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 226
Distance warning lamp ..................... 260
DISTRONIC ......................................... 181
Display message ............................ 247
Displays in the multifunction
display ........................................... 186
Driving tips .................................... 187
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 185
Warning lamp ................................. 260
Door
Automatic locking ............................ 79
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 224
Display message ............................ 251
Emergency locking ........................... 80
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80
Opening (from inside) ...................... 79
Door control panel
Overview .......................................... 34
Doors
Important safety notes .................... 78
Drinking and driving ......................... 167
Drinks holder
see Cup holder
Driving abroad ................................... 178
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departure angle ............ 177
Driving on flooded roads .................. 170
Driving safety system
EBD (Electronic Brake force
Distribution) ..................................... 68
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) .......................................... 66
Important safety information ........... 65
Driving safety systems
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 67
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 65
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 66
Distance warning system
(vehicles with DISTRONIC) ............... 69
Overview .......................................... 65
Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 200
Cruise control ................................ 179
DISTRONIC .................................... 181
Level control .................................. 189
PARKTRONIC ................................. 195
Rear view camera .......................... 198
Driving tips ........................................ 155
DISTRONIC .................................... 187
Downhill gradients ......................... 168
Driving on flooded roads ................ 170
Driving on sand .............................. 176
7
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 8
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
8
Index
Driving over obstacles ...................
Off-road driving ..............................
Off-road fording .............................
Tire ruts .........................................
Towing a trailer ..............................
Wet road surface ...........................
Winter ............................................
DSR (Downhill Speed
Regulation) .........................................
Display message ............................
Setting (on-board computer) ..........
DVD audio (on-board computer) ......
176
174
171
176
209
169
173
203
246
226
219
E
EASY-ENTRY feature ......................... 107
3rd row of seats ............................. 101
Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 225
EASY-EXIT feature ............................. 107
3rd row of seats ............................. 101
Crash-responsive ........................... 107
EASY-PACK cargo compartment
management system ........................ 271
EASY-PACK load-securing kit ........... 271
EBD (Electronic Brake force
Distribution)
Display message ............................ 236
Function/notes ................................ 68
Electrical fuses
see Fuses
Electronic Brake-force
Distribution)
see EBD
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP®
Electronic Traction Support
see 4ETS
Emergency call
see mbrace
Emergency release
Fuel filler flap ................................. 161
Vehicle ............................................. 80
Emergency running mode
Automatic transmission ................. 157
Emergency spare wheel
Storage location ............................ 311
Emergency tensioning device
Function ........................................... 57
Safety guidelines ............................. 37
Emissions purification
Service and warranty information .... 19
Engine
Irregular running ............................ 151
Starting problems .......................... 151
Starting the engine with the key .... 148
Starting with KEYLESS GO ............. 149
Switching off .................................. 165
Warning lamp (engine
diagnostics) ................................... 259
Engine electronics
Malfunction .................................... 151
Engine emergency stop .................... 331
Engine number .................................. 364
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 296
Checking the oil level ..................... 295
Display message ............................ 242
Lubricant additives ........................ 369
Notes about oil grades ................... 368
Viscosity ........................................ 369
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
Activating/deactivating ................... 67
Display message ............................ 230
Important safety information ........... 66
Trailer stabilization ........................... 68
Warning lamp ................................. 257
Exhaust check ................................... 168
Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 303
Exterior lighting
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 108
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109
Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 109
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 108
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 226
Out of position ............................... 109
Setting ........................................... 108
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 9
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 110
Storing the parking position .......... 109
Exterior view ........................................ 26
F
Filling capacity
see Technical data
First-aid kit .........................................
Flat tire
Changing a wheel/mounting the
spare wheel ...................................
MOExtended run-flat system .........
Preparing the vehicle .....................
Raising the vehicle .........................
TIREFIT kit ......................................
Floormat .............................................
Front fog lamp (display
message) ............................................
Fuel
Additives ........................................
Notes .............................................
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline .
Refueling ........................................
Specifications ................................
Troubleshooting .............................
Fuel consumption
Current (on-board computer) .........
Notes .............................................
Fuel filler cap (display message) .....
Fuel filler flap
Emergency release ........................
Opening/closing ............................
Fuel filter (display message) ............
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ......................................
Fuses
Dashboard fuse box .......................
Engine emergency stop .................
Fuse allocation chart .....................
Fuse box in the cargo
compartment .................................
Fuse box in the engine
compartment .................................
Notes .............................................
309
316
321
311
318
312
291
239
367
366
366
159
366
162
227
167
243
161
160
243
227
330
331
330
331
330
329
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory .....................
Notes .............................................
Opening/closing the garage door ..
Programming the remote control ...
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
guidelines) .........................................
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts .........
Genuine wood trim and trim strips
(cleaning instructions) ......................
Glove box ...........................................
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) .........................................
291
288
291
289
304
362
304
265
355
H
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 117
Adding washer fluid ....................... 297
Notes ............................................. 370
Headlamp delayed switch-off
see Delayed switch-off, exterior lighting
Headlamp mode (daytime driving)
see Daytime running lamps
Headlamps
Cleaning ......................................... 302
Misting up ...................................... 118
Setting ........................................... 124
Head restraint
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97
Head restraints
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 99
Luxury .............................................. 97
see NECK-PRO head restraints
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher ............................. 117
Hill start assist .................................. 150
Hood
Closing ........................................... 295
Opening ......................................... 294
Hydroplaning ..................................... 170
9
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 10
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
10
Index
I
Immobilizer .......................................... 69
Indicator and warning lamps
ABS ................................................ 256
Brakes ........................................... 254
DISTRONIC .................................... 260
Engine diagnostics ......................... 259
ESP® .............................................. 257
Fuel tank ........................................ 259
Reserve fuel ................................... 259
Seat belt ........................................ 255
SRS ................................................ 258
Tire pressure monitor .................... 260
Insect protection on the radiator .... 295
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 28
Selecting the language (on-board
computer) ...................................... 222
Submenu (on-board computer) ...... 221
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 29
Instrument cluster lighting ................ 28
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 119
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 224
Emergency lighting ........................ 119
Manual control ............................... 119
Reading lamp ................................. 118
Setting ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 223
ISOFIX (LATCH-type child seat
securing system) ................................. 62
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 310
Using ............................................. 318
Jump-starting ..................................... 325
K
Key
Convenience closing feature ............ 87
Convenience opening feature .......... 86
Display message ............................ 252
Starting the engine ........................ 148
KEYLESS-GO
Button ............................................ 147
Convenience closing feature ............ 87
Locking ............................................ 73
Starting the engine ........................ 149
Unlocking ......................................... 73
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 147
SmartKey ....................................... 147
Kickdown ........................................... 155
Knee bag .............................................. 40
L
Lane-change assistant
see Blind Spot Assist
Language (on-board computer) ........
Level control ......................................
Level control (display message) ......
License plate lamp (display
message) ............................................
Light
Setting ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ......................................
Lights
Activating/deactivating the
interior lighting delayed switch-off
(on-board computer) ......................
Active light function .......................
Automatic headlamp mode ............
Daytime running lamps ..................
Driving abroad ...............................
Fog lamps ......................................
Hazard warning lamps ...................
High-beam headlamps ...................
Light switch ...................................
Low-beam headlamps ....................
Rear fog lamp ................................
Switching the daytime driving
lights on/off (on-board computer) .
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (onboard computer) ............................
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) ..........
Light sensor (display message) .......
222
189
244
239
223
224
118
115
115
114
116
117
117
114
115
116
223
223
223
240
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 11
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Loading guidelines ............................ 264
Locking
Automatic ........................................ 79
Emergency locking ........................... 80
From inside the vehicle (central
locking button) ................................. 79
Low-beam headlamp (display
message) ............................................ 237
LOW RANGE
Display message ............................ 245
Off-road gear ......................... 157, 205
LOW RANGE off-road gear ........ 157, 205
Luggage net ....................................... 266
Lumbar support
4-way lumbar support .................... 104
Luxury head restraints ....................... 97
M
Main-beam headlamps (display
message) ............................................ 238
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Malfunctions relevant to safety
Reporting ......................................... 23
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 287
Display message ............................ 231
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 287
Emergency call .............................. 284
Important safety notes .................. 283
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 288
MB info call button ........................ 286
Roadside Assistance button .......... 285
Self-test ......................................... 283
System .......................................... 283
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 287
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 75
Memory card (on-board computer) . 219
Memory function ............................... 110
Menu (on-board computer)
Additional functions ....................... 226
Audio ............................................. 219
DISTRONIC .................................... 186
DVD ............................................... 220
Message memory .......................... 229
Navigation ..................................... 220
Off-road ......................................... 220
Overview of menus ........................ 217
Resetting to factory settings .......... 221
Settings ......................................... 221
Standard display ............................ 218
Telephone ...................................... 227
Trip computer ................................ 227
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
Sun visor ........................................ 278
see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror
MOExtended run-flat system ........... 321
MP3
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 219
see separate operating instructions
Multicontour seat .............................. 103
Multifunction display ........................ 215
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 215
Overview .......................................... 30
N
Navigation
On-board computer ....................... 220
see separate operating instructions
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation ......................................... 52
Resetting triggered .......................... 52
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Resetting triggered .......................... 52
Notes on breaking-in a new
vehicle ................................................ 146
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Faults ...............................................
Operation .........................................
System self-test ...............................
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle .....................
System overview ..............................
47
42
46
59
36
11
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 12
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
12
Index
OCS
Faults ............................................... 47
Operation ......................................... 42
System self-test ............................... 46
Octane number (fuel) ........................ 366
Odometer ........................................... 218
Off-road
4MATIC .......................................... 202
Differential locks ............................ 207
DSR ............................................... 203
LOW RANGE off-road gear ..... 158, 205
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 67
Off-road ABS .................................... 66
Off-road drive program .................. 204
Off-road drive program ..................... 204
Off-road driving ................................. 174
Important safety instructions ......... 173
Off-road fording ................................. 171
Off-road terrain
Off-road ESP .................................... 68
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
Additional functions menu ............. 226
Audio menu ................................... 219
Convenience submenu .................. 225
Displaying a service message ........ 299
Displaying the coolant
temperature ................................... 218
Displaying the outside
temperature ................................... 218
Display messages .......................... 229
DISTRONIC menu .......................... 186
Factory settings ............................. 221
Important safety notes .................. 214
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 221
Lighting submenu .......................... 223
Message memory menu ................. 229
Navigation menu ............................ 220
Off-road menu ............................... 220
Operating video DVD ..................... 220
Operation ....................................... 215
Overview of menus ........................ 217
Selecting the language .................. 222
Settings menu ............................... 221
Standard display menu .................. 218
Telephone menu ............................ 227
Time/Date submenu ..................... 222
Trip computer menu ...................... 227
Vehicle submenu ........................... 224
Opening and closing the side trim
panels ................................................. 123
Operating system
see On-board computer
Outside temperature
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 218
Display ........................................... 214
Overhead control panel
Overview .......................................... 33
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 64
P
Paint code number ............................ 363
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 301
Panel
Removing (third row of seats) ........ 101
Panic alarm .......................................... 64
Parking ............................................... 165
Parking aid
PARKTRONIC ................................. 195
Rear view camera .......................... 198
Parking brake .................................... 166
Parking lamp (display message) ...... 239
Parking position
Exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side ............................... 109
PARKTRONIC ...................................... 195
Activating/deactivating ................. 197
Malfunction .................................... 198
Problem ......................................... 198
Range of the sensors ..................... 195
Trailer towing ................................. 197
Warning display ............................. 196
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp (only Canada) ............................. 48
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp (only USA) ................................... 42
Pedals ................................................. 167
Permanent four-wheel drive
see 4MATIC
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 304
Power supply (trailer) ....................... 212
Power washers .................................. 301
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 13
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Power windows
see Side windows
Pre-emptive occupant safety
system
see PRE-SAFE® system
PRE-SAFE® system
Display message ............................ 231
Operation ......................................... 51
Product information ............................ 19
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 149
R
Radar sensor system (on-board
computer) .......................................... 224
Radiator cover ................................... 295
Radio
Changing a station (on-board
computer) ...................................... 219
see separate operating instructions
Radio-controlled equipment
Assembly ....................................... 292
Range (on-board computer) ............. 227
Rear bench seat
Folding forwards/back .................. 267
Rear compartment
Activating/deactivating climate
control ........................................... 137
Setting the air vents .............. 143, 144
Setting the temperature ................ 139
Rear-compartment seat
see Rear seat
Rear fog lamp (display message) ..... 239
Rear seat
Adjusting ....................................... 100
Rear view camera
Function/notes ............................. 198
Rear view camera (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 303
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 108
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 109
Rear window heating
Malfunction .................................... 141
Switching on/off ........................... 141
Rear window wiper ........................... 126
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 127
Refueling ............................................ 159
Remote control
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 289
Reporting
Malfunctions relevant to safety ........ 23
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 243
Warning lamp ................................. 259
Reset button ........................................ 28
Residual heat
Switching on/off ........................... 142
Restraint systems
see SRS
Reversing lamp (display message) . . 239
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 20
Roller sunblind
Rear panorama roof ....................... 279
Roof carrier ........................................ 273
Roof lining and carpets (Cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 305
Route
see Route guidance (on-board
computer)
Route guidance (on-board
computer) .......................................... 220
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 59
Child restraint systems .................... 59
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 42
Overview of occupant safety
systems ........................................... 36
Safety systems
see Driving safety systems
Seat
Folding down/up (third row of
seats) ............................................. 100
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 56
Adjusting the height ......................... 56
Belt force limiters ............................ 57
Cleaning ......................................... 305
Correct usage .................................. 54
13
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
14
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 14
Version: 3.0.3.5
Index
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 57
Fastening ......................................... 55
Important safety guidelines ............. 53
Releasing ......................................... 57
Safety guidelines ............................. 37
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 225
Warning lamp ................................. 255
Warning lamp (function) ................... 57
Seat heating
Indicator lamp (Malfunction) .......... 105
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96
Adjusting (second and third rows) . 100
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support .......................................... 104
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97
Cleaning the cover ......................... 304
Correct driver's seat position ........... 94
Important safety instructions ........... 95
Multicontour seat .......................... 103
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 110
Switching seat heating on/off ....... 104
Switching the seat ventilation on/
off .................................................. 105
Seat ventilation
Indicator lamp (Malfunction) .......... 105
Securing hooks .................................. 268
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 303
Service indicator
see Service interval display
Service interval display .................... 298
Displaying a service message (onboard computer) ............................ 299
Service products
AdBlue® special additives .............. 367
Brake fluid ..................................... 369
Coolant (engine) ............................ 369
Engine oil ....................................... 368
Filling capacity ............................... 365
Fuel ................................................ 366
Important safety notes .................. 364
Notes ............................................. 364
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 369
Washer fluid ................................... 370
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 221
On-board computer ....................... 221
Shift ranges ....................................... 155
Side impact air bag ............................. 41
Side marker lamp (display
message) ............................................ 239
Side windows
Convenience closing feature ............ 87
Convenience opening feature .......... 86
Hinged side windows ....................... 86
Important safety information ........... 84
Opening/closing .............................. 85
Resetting ......................................... 87
Troubleshooting ............................... 88
Sliding sunroof
Important safety information ........... 88
Troubleshooting ............................... 90
see Tilt/sliding sunroof
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 76
Changing the programming ............. 75
Checking the battery ....................... 76
Important safety notes .................... 72
Malfunction ...................................... 77
Snow chains ...................................... 172
Socket ................................................ 281
Dashboard ..................................... 281
Front-passenger footwell ............... 281
Luggage compartment ................... 281
Rear compartment ......................... 281
SOS
see mbrace
Spare wheel
Notes/data .................................... 359
Storage location ............................ 311
see Emergency spare wheel
Speedometer
Additional speedometer (onboard computer) ............................ 218
Segments ...................................... 215
Setting the unit (on-board
computer) ...................................... 221
SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Display message ............................ 231
Introduction ..................................... 36
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 15
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Warning lamp ................................. 258
Warning lamp (function) ................... 36
Standard display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 218
Starting the engine
Important safety instructions ......... 148
Station
see Radio
Status line (on-board computer)
Multifunction display ..................... 216
Selecting the display ...................... 222
Steering (display message) .............. 251
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106
Adjusting (manually) ...................... 106
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 215
Cleaning ......................................... 304
Important safety instructions ......... 105
Memory function (storing
settings) ......................................... 106
Steering wheel heating .................. 106
Storing settings (memory
function) ........................................ 110
Steering wheel heating
Indicator lamp (Malfunction) .......... 107
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 155
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 265
Glove box ....................................... 265
Stowage space
Center console .............................. 265
Center console (rear) ..................... 266
Cup holders ................................... 277
Important safety information ......... 264
Submenu (on-board computer)
Convenience .................................. 225
Instrument cluster ......................... 221
Lighting .......................................... 223
Time/Date ..................................... 222
Vehicle ........................................... 224
Summer opening
see Convenience opening feature
Sun visor ............................................ 278
Supplemental Restraint System
see SRS
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) .......................................... 223
SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 21
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 69
T
Tachometer ........................................ 214
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 251
Important safety guidelines ............. 80
Limiting the opening angle ............... 84
Taillight
see Tail lamps
Tank contents
Gauge .............................................. 28
Technical data ................................... 362
GL 350 BlueTEC ............................. 370
GL 450 ........................................... 371
GL 550 ........................................... 371
Tires/wheels ................................. 357
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 287
Display message ............................ 231
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 287
Emergency call .............................. 284
Important safety notes .................. 283
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 288
MB info call button ........................ 286
Roadside Assistance button .......... 285
Self-test ......................................... 283
System .......................................... 283
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 287
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 228
Display message ............................ 252
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 227
Number from the phone book ........ 228
Redialing ........................................ 228
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 228
Telephone compartment .................. 265
Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK loadsecuring kit) ....................................... 272
Temperature
Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 218
Displaying the outside
temperature ................................... 218
15
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
16
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 16
Version: 3.0.3.5
Index
Outside temperature ...................... 214
Setting ........................................... 139
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer ...................................... 69
Tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening/closing .............................. 89
Resetting ......................................... 90
Time (on-board computer) ................ 222
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 312
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 341
Checking manually ........................ 339
Display message ............................ 248
Maximum ....................................... 344
Notes ............................................. 337
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 315
Pressure loss warning .................... 339
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 315
Recommended ............................... 336
Tire pressure monitor
Warning lamp ................................. 260
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function/notes ............................. 341
Restarting ...................................... 343
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 356
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 354
Bar (definition) ............................... 354
Characteristics .............................. 354
Checking ........................................ 335
Cleaning ......................................... 336
Definition of terms ......................... 354
Direction of rotation ...................... 348
Distribution of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 357
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 353
DOT (Department of
Transportation) (definition) ............ 354
Flat tire .......................................... 311
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 355
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
(definition) ..................................... 355
Guidelines to be observed ............. 335
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(definition) ..................................... 355
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) .........................
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ......
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...........
Labeling (overview) ........................
Load bearing index (definition) ......
Load index .....................................
Load index (definition) ...................
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) .....................................
Maximum load on a tire
(definition) .....................................
Maximum permissible tire
pressure (definition) .......................
Maximum tire load .........................
Maximum tire loading (definition) . .
Optional equipment weight
(definition) .....................................
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) .....................................
Replacing .......................................
Service life .....................................
Sidewall (definition) .......................
Speed index (definition) .................
Storing ...........................................
Structure and characteristics
(definition) .....................................
Temperature ..................................
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) .....................................
Tire bead (definition) ......................
Tire pressure (definition) ................
Tire pressures (recommended) ......
Tire quality classes ........................
Tire size (data) ...............................
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed index ....................
Tire tread .......................................
Tire tread (definition) .....................
Total load limit (definition) .............
Traction .........................................
Traction (definition) .......................
Tread wear .....................................
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight) (definition) .................
Uniform tire quality classification
standards (definition) .....................
355
354
355
350
356
353
355
355
356
355
348
355
356
356
350
335
356
355
336
354
349
356
356
356
354
348
357
351
335
356
357
349
356
349
356
354
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 17
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Index
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 355
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 356
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 355
Tires and wheels (important safety
information) ....................................... 334
Top Tether ............................................ 62
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 327
Towing a trailer
Driving tips .................................... 209
Towing away
Installing the towing eye ................ 327
Removing the towing eye ............... 328
Trailer
Coupling up ................................... 209
Decoupling ..................................... 211
Display message ............................ 237
Power supply ................................. 212
Towing ........................................... 210
Trailer loads and drawbar
noseweights ...................................... 211
Trailer towing .................................... 155
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 202
ESP® ................................................ 68
PARKTRONIC ................................. 197
Transfer case ..................................... 157
Shift ranges ................................... 158
Transmission position display ......... 153
Transmission positions .................... 154
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill ..................................... 178
Driving downhill ............................. 178
Maximum gradient-climbing
capability ....................................... 178
Trip computer (on-board
computer) .......................................... 227
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 218
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 227
Trunk
Automatic opening ..................... 82, 83
Turn signal (display message) ......... 237
Turn signals ....................................... 117
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight) (definition) ................... 356
Type plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 80
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 79
V
Vanity mirror
Sun visor ........................................ 278
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 23
Emergency release .......................... 80
Equipment ....................................... 19
Exterior view .................................... 26
Individual settings (on-board
computer) ...................................... 221
Loading .......................................... 344
Lowering ........................................ 320
Maintenance .................................... 20
Parking up ..................................... 166
Raising ........................................... 318
Reporting problems ......................... 22
Towing away .................................. 327
Tow-starting ................................... 327
Transporting .................................. 329
Vehicle data
see Technical data
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 363
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 310
Video (DVD) ........................................ 220
Video DVD (on-board computer) ...... 220
VIN ...................................................... 363
W
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview .......................................... 29
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp (only Canada) ........... 48
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp (only USA) ................ 42
Warranty ............................................ 362
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 320
Wheel chock ...................................... 317
17
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
18
Index
Wheels
Changing/replacing ....................... 350
Changing a wheel .......................... 316
Checking ........................................ 335
Cleaning ......................................... 301
Guidelines to be observed ............. 335
Mounting a wheel .......................... 319
Removing a wheel .......................... 319
Tightening torque ........................... 320
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 357
Window curtain air bag ....................... 42
Windows
see Side windows
Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 302
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 140
Infrared reflective .......................... 292
Windshield washer fluid (display
message) ............................................ 252
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 297
Notes ............................................. 370
Windshield wipers
Important safety notes .................. 125
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Troubleshooting ............................. 127
Winter operation ............................... 173
Radiator cover ............................... 295
Winter tires ........................................ 171
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 302
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 18
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 19
Version: 3.0.3.5
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own best
interest:
We recommend using Genuine MercedesBenz Parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for your
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. We are unable to
make an assessment for other products and
therefore cannot be held responsible for
them, even if in individual cases an official
approval or authorization by governmental or
other agencies should exist. Use of such parts
and accessories could adversely affect the
safety, performance or reliability of your
vehicle. Please do not use them. MercedesBenz therefore recommends that you use
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
parts and accessories that have been
approved for the type of vehicle. Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts and preapproved
conversion parts and accessories are
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. In addition, you will receive
comprehensive information on permissible
technical modifications and expert
installations.
Operator's Manual
Notes on the Operator's Manual
This Operator's Manual contains a great deal
of helpful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the
instructions and warnings contained in this
Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage
caused by failure to follow instructions is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Vehicle equipment
This manual describes all the standard and
optional equipment of your vehicle available
at the time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all functions described. This
also refers to safety-related systems and
functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations. All the systems
found in your vehicle are listed in the original
purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should
you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operating Instructions and the
Maintenance Booklet are important
documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Service and literature
The Service and Warranty Information
booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your vehicle. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair any factory-fitted parts
based on the terms and conditions of the
following warranties:
RNew
Vehicle Limited Warranty
System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
REmission
19
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 20
Version: 3.0.3.5
Introduction
20
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty2
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Information for customers in
California
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a
reasonable number of repair attempts
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a
reasonable number of repair attempts is
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or
more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect
or malfunction has been subject to repair
two or more times, and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in
writing of the need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly
notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the
need for its repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
2
Valid only for vehicles with a gasoline engine.
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet describes all necessary maintenance
work that should be performed at regular
intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet with you when you bring
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The service advisor will record each
service in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
toll-free Roadside Assistance number will be
answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (in the USA) or the
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in
Canada) You will find both in your vehicle
literature portfolio.
In accordance with standard program
guidelines, Roadside Assistance is prepared
to provide vehicle service up until a
reasonable distance from the next paved
roadway. We will make every effort to assist
in a breakdown situation. However, the
accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 21
Version: 3.0.3.5
Introduction
Service technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis.
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician and
tow service provider.
Change of address or ownership
In the event of a change of address, be sure
to send in the "Change of Address Notice"
found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist
us in contacting you in a timely manner
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck" found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (in
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
RService facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
gasoline for vehicles with
catalytic converters may not be available.
RUnleaded
The use of leaded fuels can damage the
catalytic converter.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
Sport Utility Vehicle
G Warning!
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
drive passenger cars are not intended. This
vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
from conventional passenger cars in driving
conditions which may occur on streets,
highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
Operator’s Manual. Take time to become
familiar with the driving characteristics of this
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Do not
attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
Z
21
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
22
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 22
Version: 3.0.3.5
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Safety notes
To ensure proper use of the vehicle, you must
familiarize yourself with the following
information and rules:
G Warning
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
vehicle's electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function when the
engine is running. You should therefore never
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Such blows can be caused, for example, by
running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
that damage to your vehicle has occurred:
Rturn
on your hazard warning flashers.
down carefully.
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Rslow
Rsafety
notes in this Operator's Manual
data in this Operator's Manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Rtechnical
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
make you and others aware of various risks.
Do not remove any of these warning labels
unless explicitly instructed to do so by
information on the label itself.
Removing warning labels may cause you and
others to be unaware of certain risks which
may result in an accident and/or personal
injury.
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
with the Mercedes-Benz Center again or, if
necessary, contact us at one of the following
addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 23
Version: 3.0.3.5
Introduction
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting malfunctions relevant to
safety
For the USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required
of all manufacturers according to Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153http://
www.safercar.gov); go to: ; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain additional information
about vehicle safety from:
http://www.safercar.gov.
3
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions are not covered either by
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of
Daimler AG.
Data stored in the vehicle
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including California Code Supplement
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data.
If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace3 data
is transmitted in the event of an accident.
This information serves, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
continually improve vehicle safety.
Daimler AG can access this data and submit
it:
Rfor
safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or its
sales and service organizations
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please observe the mbrace3 order agreement
regarding further details on data that this
system records and transmits.
The system is called TELEAID in Canada.
Z
23
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
24
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 24
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 25
Version: 3.0.3.5
25
Exterior view .......................................
Cockpit .................................................
Instrument cluster ..............................
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Center console ....................................
Overhead control panel ......................
Door control panel ..............................
26
27
28
30
31
33
34
At a glance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
26
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 26
Version: 3.0.3.5
Exterior view
At a glance
Exterior view
Function
Page
Tailgate
Vehicle tool kit
80
310
;
Rear window heating
141
=
Lights
120
?
Fuel filler flap
A
Function
Page
D
Windshield wipers
125
E
Opening the hood
Engine oil
Coolant
294
295
297
159
F
Towing away
327
Exterior mirrors
108
G
B
Roof carrier
Sliding sunroof
273
88
Tires and wheels
Flat tire
334
311
C
Defrosting the windshield
Cleaning the windows
140
302
:
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 27
Version: 3.0.3.5
Cockpit
27
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
Page
:
Combination switch
117
;
Cruise control lever
179
=
Instrument cluster
28
?
Horn
A
Steering wheel paddle
shifters
B
DIRECT SELECT lever
C
PARKTRONIC warning
display
D
Overhead control panel
E
Operates the automatic
climate control system
Function
Page
F
Ignition lock
Start/Stop button
147
147
G
Adjusts the steering wheel
manually
105
H
On-board diagnostic socket
155
I
Opens the hood
294
152
J
Parking brake
165
K
Releases the parking brake
165
195
L
Light switch
114
33
M
Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically
Steering wheel heating
105
106
130
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
28
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 28
Version: 3.0.3.5
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Overview
Function
Page
Function
Page
:
Speedometer
A
Tachometer
214
;
Sets the instrument cluster
lighting: dimmer
B
Fuel gauge
C
Multifunction display
215
=
Reset button
D
Clock
222
?
Sets the instrument cluster
lighting: brighter
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 29
Version: 3.0.3.5
Instrument cluster
29
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function
Function
Page
:
Brakes (USA only)
254
G
High-beam headlamps
117
;
ESP®
257
H
Reserve fuel
259
=
Distance warning lamp4
260
I
Seat belt
255
?
Turn signal
117
J
Brakes (Canada only)
254
A
Turn signal
117
K
B
Diesel engine: preglow
148
Tire pressure monitor (USA
only)
260
C
SRS
258
L
ABS
256
D
Low-beam headlamps
115
M
The lamp lights up briefly,
but has no function.
E
Engine diagnostics (Canada
only)
259
Engine diagnostics (USA
only)
259
F
4
Page
On vehicles without DISTRONIC, the lamp lights up briefly but has no function.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
30
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 30
Version: 3.0.3.5
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
:
Multifunction display
;
COMAND APS; see the
separate operating
instructions
=
~6
Makes/accepts or rejects/
ends a call
WX
Selects submenus in the
Settings menu
Changes values
Adjusts the volume
?
Switches on the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
Page
215
227
221
Function
?
VU
Selects a menu: scrolls
back and forth
A
Switches off the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
&*
Scrolls back and forth
within a menu
Page
217
217
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 31
Version: 3.0.3.5
Center console
31
Center console
Function
:
Page
COMAND APS; see the
separate operating
instructions
Function
At a glance
Vehicles without the Off-Road Pro engineering package
Page
D
ATA indicator lamp
69
E
ESP®
66
;
Seat heating
104
F
Selects ADS settings
194
=
Seat ventilation
105
G
DSR
203
?
PARKTRONIC
195
H
Hazard warning lamps
117
A
Level control
189
I
Offroad program
204
B
42 indicator
lamp (USA only)
42 indicator
lamp (Canada only)
J
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
279
280
K
Cup holder
277
L
Stowage compartment
264
C
Stowage compartment
42
48
264
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
32
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 32
Version: 3.0.3.5
Center console
At a glance
Vehicles with the Off-Road Pro engineering package
Function
:
Page
COMAND APS; see the
separate operating
instructions
Function
Page
F
ESP®
G
PARKTRONIC
195
117
;
Seat heating
104
H
Hazard warning lamps
=
Seat ventilation
105
I
?
Engages the differential
locks
207
42 indicator
lamp (USA only)
42 indicator
lamp (Canada only)
A
LOW RANGE off-road gear
157
B
DSR
203
C
Level control
D
ATA indicator lamp
E
Selects ADS settings
66
42
48
J
Ashtray
Cigarette lighter
279
280
189
K
Cup holder
277
69
L
Stowage compartment
264
194
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 33
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overhead control panel
33
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function
:
;
=
?
Page
p To switch the lefthand reading lamp on/off
118
u To switch the rear
interior lighting on/off
119
Function
A
B
| To switch the
automatic interior lighting
control on/off
119
c To switch the front
interior lighting on/off
119
Page
p To switch the righthand reading lamp on/off
118
2 To open/close the
tilt/sliding sunroof
89
C
Rear-view mirror
108
D
Buttons for the garage door
opener
289
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
34
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 34
Version: 3.0.3.5
Door control panel
At a glance
Door control panel
Function
Page
:
Opens the door
79
;
%& Locks/unlocks
the vehicle
79
7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors
108
Zª\ Selects the
exterior mirror, electrically
folds the exterior mirrors
in/out
108
=
?
A
B
C
D
W Opens/closes the
side windows
85
n Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment
64
± Opens/closes the
hinged power side windows
86
q Opens/closes the
tailgate
82
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 35
Version: 3.0.3.5
35
Vehicle equipment ..............................
Occupant safety ..................................
Children in the vehicle ........................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Driving safety systems .......................
Anti-theft systems ..............................
36
36
59
64
65
69
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
36
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 36
Version: 3.0.3.5
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Occupant safety
Overview of occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are:
RSeat
belts
restraint systems
R"LATCH" type child seat mountings
Additional protection is provided by:
RChild
RSRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
head restraints
RPRE-SAFE®
RAir bag system components with:
- PASSENGER air bag OFF indicator lamp
- USA only: front-passenger seat with
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
- Canada only: front-passenger seat with
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
The protective functions of the systems work
in conjunction with each other. The systems
are, however, autonomous.
RNECK-PRO
G Warning!
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint system components
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices/
belt buckle tensioners, for example, could
deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy.
Therefore, never modify the restraint
systems. Do not tamper with electronic
components or their software.
i More information on the subject of
children in the vehicle and child restraint
systems can be found under the "Children
in the vehicle" chapter (Y page 59).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Introduction
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
into contact with the vehicle's interior in the
event of an accident. It can also reduce the
effect of the forces to which occupants are
subjected during an accident.
SRS consists of:
SRS warning lamp
bags
Rair bag control unit (with crash sensors)
RETDs/belt buckle tensioners
Rbelt force limiters
R+
Rair
SRS warning lamps
SRS functions are checked regularly when
you switch on the ignition and when the
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
can be detected in good time.
The + SRS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness when the + indicator lamp goes
out while the engine is running.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 37
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
G Warning
The SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction if the + SRS warning lamp:
Rdoes
not illuminate
Rgoes out approximately 4 seconds after the
engine is started
after the engine is started or
illuminates during the journey
For your safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have the system checked as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when it is needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury.
The SRS might also deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work
on the SRS must therefore only be performed
by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities.
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Rilluminates
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and air bags
G Warning
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check your national disposal
guidelines. California residents, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that has deployed must be replaced. PRESAFE® has electrically operated reversible
belt tensioners in addition to the
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
to any components or wiring of the SRS.
RDo not change or remove any component
or part of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. to the:
- padded steering wheel boss
- knee bag covers
- front-passenger air bag cover
- outer side of front seat bolsters
- outer side of rear bench seat backrest
seat bolsters
- roof lining trim
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may be thrown around in
the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
Z
37
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
38
Occupant safety
RNever
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 38
Version: 3.0.3.5
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
strongly recommends that you inform the
subsequent owner that the vehicle is
equipped with SRS. Also refer them to the
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
G Warning
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
Rfrontal
impacts (driver's and frontpassenger front air bags and knee bag on
the driver's side)
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and
window curtain air bags)
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
When the air bags are deployed, a small
amount of powder is released. The powder
generally does not constitute a health hazard
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential
breathing difficulties, you should leave the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
G Warning
To reduce the risk of injuries during front air
bag inflation, the driver and front-passenger
must always be seated correctly and have
their seat belts fastened accordingly.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision, you must always be in the normal
seat position with your back against the
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
RMove the driver's seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver's chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
You should be able to accomplish this by
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 39
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
the rim can increase the risk and potential
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates.
RAdjust the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible from the dashboard when the
seat is occupied.
ROccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side
impact air bags be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
child restraint, infant restraint or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in an authorized Mercedes-Benz
child restraint that is compatible with the
BabySmart™ child restraint system. The
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
installed in the vehicle will deactivate the
front-passenger front air bag when it is
installed properly. Otherwise, the child
could be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. This could lead to serious
or fatal injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator's Manual.
G Warning
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.
A side impact air bag related injury may occur
if occupants, especially children, are not
properly seated or restrained when next to a
side impact air bag which needs to deploy
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1)
(2)
Always sit as upright as possible
and use the seat belts properly.
Make sure that children 12 years
old and under use an appropriately
sized child restraint, infant
restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Always wear seat belts properly.
Safety
RKeep
39
The air bags are only deployed if the airbag
control unit detects the need for deployment.
Only in the event of such a situation will they
provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise, it is not possible
for the air bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driver
and passengers will then be protected to the
extent possible by a properly fastened seat
belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags offer supplemental protection but
are not a substitute for seat belts. All vehicle
occupants must fasten their seat belts
regardless of whether your vehicle is
equipped with airbags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
Front air bags
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 38).
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
40
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 40
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
Safety
The front air bags increase protection for the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
chest.
stage inflation of the front-passenger front air
bag. In the second stage, the front air bags
are inflated with the maximum amount of
propellant gas available.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system's preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belts.
! Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):
Driver's front air bag : deploys in front of
the steering wheel; front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box. They are deployed:
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rif the seat belt is fastened
Rindependently of other air bags in the
vehicle
If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are
generally not deployed unless the system
detects high vehicle deceleration in a
longitudinal direction.
Your vehicle has adaptive, dual-stage front air
bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. When the first deployment
threshold is reached, the front air bag is filled
with enough gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): frontpassenger front air bag deployment is also
influenced by the passenger's weight
category as identified by the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42).
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): the lighter the
passenger side occupant, the higher the
vehicle deceleration rate required for second
Rif
do not place objects heavier than 20 lb
(9 kg) on the front-passenger seat, as this
could be interpreted as the seat being
occupied. In the event of an accident, the
restraint systems on the front-passenger
side are deployed. Have restraint systems
replaced that have been deployed.
The front-passenger front airbag will only
deploy if:
Rthe
system, based on the OCS weight
sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied (USA only).
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
center console is not lit, USA:
(Y page 42), Canada: (Y page 48).
Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold.
Driver's knee bag
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 38).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 41
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
Rknee
injuries
injuries
Rlower leg injuries
Driver's knee bag : inflates beneath the
steering column. If the system determines
that deployment of driver's knee bag : can
offer additional protection to that provided by
the seat belt in the event of a frontal impact,
the system will deploy it together with the
front air bags. Driver's knee bag : operates
best in conjunction with a properly positioned
and fastened seat belt.
Rthigh
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection for the thorax of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle
on which the impact occurs. However, they
do not protect the:
Safety
Driver's knee bag : increases protection for
the driver against the risk of:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
Side impact air bags
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 38).
G Warning!
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or door
trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side
impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
41
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
seat cushions.
The side impact air bags are deployed:
Ron
the side on which an impact occurs
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of seat belt use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs/belt buckle
tensioners
The side impact air bags are generally not
deployed if the vehicle overturns, unless the
system detects high vehicle deceleration or
acceleration in a lateral direction and
determines that they can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt.
The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the
system's deployment threshold.
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): if the OCS
detects that the front-passenger seat is not
occupied and the front passenger seat belt is
not fastened (the belt tongue is not engaged
in the seat belt buckle), the side impact air
Rat
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Safety
42
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 42
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
bag on the front-passenger side will not
deploy. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side will deploy if the front
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
! Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):
do not place objects heavier than 20 lb
(9 kg) on the front-passenger seat, as this
could be interpreted as the seat being
occupied. In the event of an accident, the
restraint systems on the front-passenger
side are deployed. Have restraint systems
replaced that have been deployed.
Window curtain air bags
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 38).
The window curtain air bags enhance the level
of protection for the head (but not chest or
arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
The window curtain air bags are installed into
the side of the roof frame and run from the
front door (A-pillar) to the rear windows (Dpillar).
Rregardless
of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of seat belt use
Rif the vehicle overturns and the system
determines that window curtain air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
The window curtain air bags will not deploy in
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset thresholds. You will then be protected
by the fastened seat belts.
Occupant classification system (OCS)
Operating principles of the Occupant
Classification System
The OCS is standard equipment in the USA.
OCS categorizes the occupant on the frontpassenger seat by means of a weight sensor.
The front-passenger front air bag is
automatically deactivated for certain weight
categories. The 42 indicator
lamp shows you the current status. If the
42 indicator lamp lights up, the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The system does not disable:
Rthe
side impact air bag
window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device/belt
buckle tensioner (ETD)
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
Rthe
Rwith
the seat belt properly fastened
a position that is as upright as possible
with the back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet on the floor
The OCS weight sensor is distorted if the
occupant's weight is transferred to another
object in the vehicle, e.g. by leaning on the
armrest.
Rin
Window curtain air bags : are deployed:
Ron
the side on which an impact occurs
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rat
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 43
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
In addition, the occupant weight may appear
to increase or decrease due to the following:
Robjects
hanging on the seat
lodged underneath the seat
Robjects lodged between the seat and the
center console
Robjects lodged between the seat and the
door
Rother passengers exerting weight on the
seat
Robjects applying pressure to the back of
the seat
Make sure that the seat always has clearance
in all directions.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushion are damaged, have the
necessary repair work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use seat
accessories which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Both the driver and the front passenger
should observe the 42 indicator
lamp to determine whether or not the front
passenger is positioned correctly.
Robjects
G Warning!
If the 4 2 indicator lamp
illuminates when an adult or someone larger
than a small individual is in the front
passenger seat, have the front passenger
reposition himself or herself in the seat until
the 4 2 indicator lamp goes out,
or check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS has classified the
front passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-monthold child in a standard child restraint or if the
front passenger seat is classified as being
empty.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 4 2 indicator lamp
will illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
the 4 2 indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard child
restraint or as being a small individual (such
as a young teenager or a small adult), the
4 2 indicator lamp will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine
is started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
illuminated or go out. With the 4
2 indicator lamp illuminated, the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
With the 4 2 indicator lamp out,
the front passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
adult or someone larger than a small
individual, the 4 2 indicator lamp
will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
when the engine is started and then goes out,
indicating that the front passenger front air
bag is activated.
If the 4 2 indicator lamp is
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
is deactivated and will not be deployed.
Z
43
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
44
Occupant safety
If the 4 2 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
is activated and will be deployed
Rin
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 44
Version: 3.0.3.5
the event of certain frontal impacts
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently of the side impact air bags
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by
Rif
Rthe
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the OCS
For further information, see "Air bag display
messages" (Y page 231).
G Warning
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than
children secured in the front-passenger seat.
For this reason, we strongly advise that you
always secure children in the rear seats.
Regardless of the seat position, children
under 12 years must be secured correctly in
a suitable infant or child restraint system or
booster seat suitable for the size and weight
of the child.
The infant or child restraint system must be
correctly secured using the vehicle's seat
belt, the seat belt and Top Tether belt or the
lower anchorages and the Top Tether belt in
complete accordance with the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, in particular children, must sit as
upright as possible, fasten the seat belt
correctly and use a suitable infant restraint
system, child restraint system or booster seat
suitable for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Observe the following
important information if it is absolutely
necessary to carry a child on the frontpassenger seat:
Ryour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
Ra child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates in a collision which could occur
under some circumstances, even with the
air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only way to completely rule out this risk
is by making sure you never place a child in
a rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
we strongly advise that you always carry
children in a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat.
Rif it is absolutely necessary to install a
rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat, make sure the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is disabled. If the
42 indicator lamp does not
light up or goes out when the child restraint
system is installed, check the anchorages
of the restraint system. Check the
42 indicator lamp regularly
while driving to ensure that the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 42 indicator
lamp lights up or remains out, you may only
carry a child on the front-passenger seat
once the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 45
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
Rwhen
securing a child in a child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat, you
must:
- move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible
- use a child restraint system that is
suitable for the age, size and weight of
the child
- observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions in order to install and secure
the child restraint system correctly.
Rfor children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the passenger front air bag
is activated.
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front-passenger front air
bag also should have deployed. The OCS may
have determined:
Rthat
the seat was empty or occupied by a
person with a weight up to or less than that
of a typical 12 month-old child seated in a
standard child restraint
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
person (e.g. a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child that weighs more than a
typical 12 month old child in a child
restraint system
These are examples of when OCS disables the
front-passenger front air bag. This occurs
even though the impact fulfills the criteria for
deployment of the driver's front air bag.
45
G Warning
If the red + SRS warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the 42
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, OCS is
malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air
bag is disabled in this case. Have the system
checked as soon as possible by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the air
bag system and OCS:
Rdo not place any objects with a total weight
of more than 4.4 lb(2 kg) in the parcel net
on the back of the front-passenger seat.
OCS may otherwise be unable to correctly
assess the occupant's weight category.
Rdo not place any objects under or near the
front-passenger seat.
Rdo not hang or fasten any objects on the
seats.
Rdo not store any objects, such as books,
between the front-passenger seat and the
center console or the front-passenger door.
Rdo not slide the front-passenger seat
backwards against any hard objects.
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
in a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the backrest.
Rwhile seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant's weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant's weight
category.
Rread and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
If the key has been removed from the ignition
lock or is in position 0, indicator lamp
42: does not light up.
Z
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
46
Occupant safety
System self-test
The 42 indicator lamp
illuminates when you:
the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock
Rpress the KEYLESS-GO Start-Stop button
once or twice
If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
occupant as an adult, the 42
indicator lamp illuminates and goes out again
after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
classifies the front-passenger seat as being
unoccupied, the 42 indicator
lamp will illuminate and not go out.
Safety
Rturn
G Warning!
If the 4 2 indicator lamp does
not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center before seating any child on the
front passenger seat.
For more information, see "Problems with the
occupant classification system"
(Y page 47).
G Warning
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside
and rear side child restraint system must be
placed entirely on the seat cushion and the
backrest of the front-passenger seat
backrest.
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
seat backrest.
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
installation of child restraint systems.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 46
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 47
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
47
Problems with the occupant classification system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Safety
USA only: The
The OCS is malfunctioning.
42
X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
indicator lamp
Mercedes-Benz Center.
illuminates and
X Read and observe the additional display messages in the
remains illuminated
multifunction display (Y page 231).
when the weight of a
typical adult or an
individual that is the
size of a typical adult
has been detected on
the passenger seat; the
system then
determines the
occupant cannot be a
child.
G Warning
If the 42 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat,
the system then determines the occupant cannot be a child. Do not allow any occupant to use
the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The 42
The OCS is malfunctioning.
indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
illuminate and/or does
child seat.
not remain illuminated X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
when the weight of a
X Make sure there are no objects applying additional weight onto
typical 12-month-old
the seat.
child in a standard child
X
Make sure there are no objects applying additional weight onto
restraint or less/
the seat. Head restraints that press against the roof or books
unoccupied child
that are behind or trapped between the seat, for example, apply
restraint has been
force to the seat. OCS senses such forces as additional weight.
detected on the frontX If the 42 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have
passenger seat.
the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the frontpassenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.
X Read and observe the additional display messages in the
multifunction display (Y page 231).
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
48
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 48
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
Safety
G Warning
If the 42 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the frontpassenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation
system
How the air bag deactivation system
functions
The BabySmart™ system is standard
equipment in Canada.
G Warning
Accident statistics show that children
secured in the rear seats are safer than
children secured in the front-passenger seat.
For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly
advises that you always secure children in the
rear seats. Regardless of the seat position,
children under 12 years must be secured
correctly in a suitable infant or child restraint
system or booster seat suitable for the size
and weight of the child.
Secure the child restraint system with:
Rthe
seat belt of the vehicle
seat belt and a Top Tether belt
Rthe ISOFIX child seat securing system and
a Top Tether belt.
The child restraint system must be installed
and secured correctly, observing the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
Occupants, in particular children, must sit as
upright as possible, fasten the seat belt
correctly and use a suitable infant restraint
system, child restraint system or booster seat
suitable for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Observe the following
important information if it is necessary to
carry a child on the front-passenger seat:
Rthe
RCanada
only: children under 12 years may
only sit in the front-passenger seat if they
are seated in a child restraint system which
is compatible with BabySmart™ and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. When the
child restraint system is installed correctly,
the front-passenger front air bag is disabled
in conjunction with the BabySmart™
system installed in the vehicle. If the frontpassenger front air bag is deployed in the
event of a collision, it could hit the child.
This could lead to serious or fatal injuries.
Ra child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates in a collision which could occur
under some circumstances, even with the
air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only way to completely rule out this risk
is by making sure you never place a child in
a rearward-facing child restraint system on
the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
we strongly advise that you always carry
children in a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat.
Rif it is necessary to install a BabySmart™compatible rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat, make
sure the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is disabled. If the
42 indicator lamp does not
light up or goes out when the child restraint
system is installed, check the anchorages
of the restraint system. Check the
42 indicator lamp regularly
while driving to ensure that the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 42 indicator
lamp goes out or remains out, you may only
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 49
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
carry a child on the front-passenger seat
once the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates.
Rwhen securing a child in a front-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger
seat, you must:
- move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible
- use a child restraint system that is
suitable for the age, size and weight of
the child
- observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions in order to install and secure
the child restraint system correctly.
the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
The underside of the child restraint system
must lie against the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. In the event of an accident,
an incorrectly installed child restraint system
could injure the child instead of offering
protection.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions
when installing special child restraint
systems.
G Warning
When using a BabySmart™-compatible child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
the front-passenger front air bag is only
disabled if the 42 indicator lamp
is illuminated.
Always check the 42 indicator
lamp if you are using a BabySmart™compatible child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat. If the 42
indicator lamp does not light up or goes out
when the child restraint system is installed,
check the anchorages of the restraint system.
If the 42 indicator lamp remains
out, do not use the BabySmart™ child
restraint system to carry a child on the frontpassenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
G Warning
The BabySmart™ air bag disabling system
ONLY works with specially adapted child
restraint systems. It does not work with child
restraint systems that are not compatible with
BabySmart™.
Never place anything between the seat
cushion and the child restraint system (e.g. a
cushion), as this reduces the effectiveness of
Special child restraint systems which are
compatible with BabySmart™ are necessary
for deactivating the front-passenger front air
bag. When the special child restraint system
which is compatible with BabySmart™ is
installed correctly and is recognized by the
sensor system in the front-passenger seat,
the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. In this case, 42
indicator lamp: illuminates. If you have any
questions regarding the special child
restraint systems which are compatible with
BabySmart™, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the key has been removed from the ignition
lock or is in position 0, indicator lamp
42: does not light up.
The system does not disable:
Rthe
side impact air bag
window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device/belt
buckle tensioner (ETD)
Rthe
Z
49
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
50
Occupant safety
System self-test
The 42 indicator lamp
illuminates when you:
the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock
Ron vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start-Stop button once or twice.
The 42 indicator lamp goes out
again after approximately six seconds.
If the 42 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or is lit continuously, the system is
malfunctioning. Before transporting a child
on the front-passenger seat, have the
BabySmart™ system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For more information, see "Problems with the
air bag deactivation system" section
(Y page 51)
Safety
Rturn
G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 4 2
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
4 2 indicator lamp could be
continuously lit, indicating that the system is
not functioning. The front passenger front air
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
deploy in an accident.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 50
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 51
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
51
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Canada only: The
42
indicator lamp is
illuminated constantly.
A special BabySmart™ compatible child restraint system is
installed on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger front air bag is thus deactivated.
A BabySmart™-compatible child restraint system is not installed
on the front-passenger seat. The BabySmart™ system is
malfunctioning.
X Have the BabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning
If the 42 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat,
the system then determines the occupant cannot be a child. Do not allow any occupant to use
the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Canada only: The
The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.
42
X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
indicator lamp does not
child restraint system.
illuminate or does not X
Check the installation of the child restraint system.
remain illuminated with
X If the 42 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have
a BabySmart™
the BabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at an
compatible child
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
restraint system
Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the
properly installed on
BabySmart™ system has been repaired.
the front-passenger
seat.
PRE-SAFE® system
G Warning!
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
the effects of an accident on vehicle
occupants who are wearing their seat belt
properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
personal injuries occurring as a result of an
accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
always drive carefully and adjust your driving
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
conditions.
PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to
protect you in certain hazardous situations.
PRE-SAFE® intervenes:
Rin emergency braking situations, if the BAS
Brake Assist System intervenes
critical driving situations, e.g. if the
vehicle understeers or oversteers severely
when exceeding physical limits or in case
Rin
Z
Safety
Problems with the air bag deactivation system
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Occupant safety
52
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 52
Version: 3.0.3.5
of having to swerve to avoid an obstacle at
a speed above 85 mph (140 km/h).
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation
detected:
Rthe
front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
vehicles with memory functions: the
front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an
unfavorable position under accident
conditions.
Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are
closed so that only a small gap remains.
Ron vehicles with sliding sunroof: if the
vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof closes so
that only a small gap remains.
If the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pretensioning. All settings made by
PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.
If the seat belts are not released:
Ron
X
Move the backrest or the seat back slightly
until the belt pretensioning is reduced.
The locking mechanism releases.
G Warning
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you adjust the seat.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
More information about belt adjustment, a
convenience function integrated into PRESAFE®, can be found in the "Belt adjustment"
section (Y page 56).
NECK-PRO head restraints
The NECK-PRO head restraints increase
protection to the driver's and frontpassenger's head and neck. To this end, the
head restraints on the driver's and frontpassenger seats are moved forwards and
upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of
a certain severity. This provides better head
support.
G Warning
Do not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers)
on the NECK-PRO head restraints. Otherwise,
the NECK-PRO head restraints may not
function properly, or in the event of a rear-end
collision may not be able offer the level of
protection they are designed to provide.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been
triggered in an accident, you must reset the
NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and
front-passenger seat (Y page 52).
Otherwise, the additional protection will not
be available in the event of another rear-end
collision. You can recognize when NECK-PRO
head restraints have been triggered by the
fact that they have moved forwards and can
no longer be adjusted.
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints
Important safety information
G Warning
For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO
head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints checked at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center after a rear-end collision.
G Warning
If you press the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion backwards, make sure that your
fingers are not trapped between the cushion
and the cover. Failure to observe could result
in injuries.
NECK-PRO head restraints
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a certain amount of strength. If
you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO
head restraints, have this work carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 53
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
X
Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of
arrow :.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion backwards in the direction of
arrow = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO head restraint.
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECKPRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
X
Remove the resetting tool : from the
vehicle document wallet.
X Insert resetting tool : into guide ;
between the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint cushion and the rear cover of the
head restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment
mechanism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X Firmly press back the NECK-PRO luxury
head restraint cushion until it engages =.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Replace resetting tool : into the vehicle
document wallet.
Seat belts
Important safety notes
The use of infant or child restraint systems is
required by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
Even if this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened when the vehicle is in motion.
i See "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 59) for further information on
infants and children traveling in the vehicle
as well as on child restraint systems.
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
be considerably more severe without your
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
Z
53
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
54
Occupant safety
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
as intended if the occupants are properly
wearing their seat belts.
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 54
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
positioned on the body.
G Warning
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
there are seat belts available. Make sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
G Warning
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced and their anchoring points must
also be checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Correct use of the seat belt
G Warning
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat
belts can only protect when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in case
of an accident.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
the likelihood of and potential severity of
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
SRS (driver's front air bag, driver side knee
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
impact air bags, window curtain air bags for
door windows), Emergency Tensioning
Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front
seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
(side impact air bags, window curtain air
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETDs).
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 55
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
RPosition
the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake sure the seat belt is always routed
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
RPregnant women should also always use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
G Warning
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
55
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Fastening seat belts
G Warning
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
G Warning
Canada only: children 12 years old and under
may ride on the front seat if a BabySmart™
compatible child restraint system is installed
on the front-passenger seat. Use only
Mercedes-Benz approved BabySmart™
compatible child restraint systems. A
BabySmart™ compatible child restraint
system will deactivate the front-passenger
front air bag when installed properly. The
front-passenger front air bag will not be
deactivated if the child restraint systems that
are installed are not BabySmart™ compatible
or if BabySmart™ compatible child restraint
systems are not installed correctly. If the
front-passenger front air bag is deployed in a
collision, the child could be struck by the air
bag. This could lead to serious or fatal injury.
Z
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 56
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
56
For more information about releasing the seat
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing
seat belts" (Y page 57).
Safety
Seat belt adjustment
The belt adjustment function adjusts the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants. The belt strap
is tightened slightly when:
Ryou
X
Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 94).
X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :.
X Without twisting it, place the shoulder
section of the seat belt over the center of
the shoulder and the lap section across the
hips.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the
driver's and front-passenger seat belts
automatically adjust to the upper body
(Y page 56).
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 56).
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the
driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special
seat belt retractor to secure child restraint
systems properly. For further information on
"Special seat belt retractors", see
(Y page 61).
engage the belt tongue in the belt
buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock and you then engage the belt tongue
in the buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the seat belt. Do
not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is
adjusting. You can switch the belt adjustment
on and off in the on-board computer
(Y page 225).
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
Adjust the belt to a height that allows the
upper part of the seat belt to be routed across
the center of your shoulder.
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions.
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 57
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
X
Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
X Release belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.
Releasing seat belts
X
Press release button ?(Y page 55) and
guide belt tongue ;(Y page 55) back
towards belt sash guide :(Y page 55).
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
their protective function and must be
replaced. Consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Belt warning for driver and front
passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out once the driver and
the front passenger have fastened their seat
belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. The warning tone goes out
after approximately six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed:
Rthe
7 seat belt warning lamp remains
illuminated as long as either the driver's or
front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.
Rif the vehicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h), the 7 seat belt warning
lamp lights up. Additionally, a warning tone
will sound with increasing intensity for a
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
driver's and front-passenger seat belt are
fastened.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front passenger have still not fastened their
seat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but continues to
be illuminated.
After the vehicle has come to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed has exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
Rboth
the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open
i For more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Indicator and
warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
seat belt" (Y page 255).
Emergency Tensioning Devices and
seat belt force limiters
The seat belts for the front seats are equipped
with ETDs/belt buckle tensioners and seat
belt force limiters. The outer seat belts in the
second row of seats are equipped with ETDs
and belt force limiters. The seat belts for the
third row of seats are equipped with ETDs.
! If the front-passenger seat is not
occupied, do not engage the seat belt
tongue in the buckle on the frontpassenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
Tensioning Device/belt buckle tensioner
could be triggered in the event of an
accident.
ETDs/belt buckle tensioners tighten the seat
belts in an accident, pulling them close
against the body.
Z
57
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Safety
58
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 58
Version: 3.0.3.5
Occupant safety
ETDs/belt buckle tensioners do not correct
incorrect seat positions or incorrectly
fastened seat belts.
ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
towards the backrest.
Seat belt force limiters, when activated, are
employed to help reduce the force exerted by
the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
The front belt force limiters are synchronized
with the front air bags, which take on a part
of the deceleration force. Thus, the force
exerted on the occupant is distributed over a
greater area.
The ETDs/belt buckle tensioners can only be
activated when:
Rthe
ignition is switched on
restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 36)
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the three-point seat belts in the
front
Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the front-passenger side.
The ETDs on the outside seats in the second
row and on the seats in the third row are
triggered independently of the lock status of
the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
and severity of an accident:
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end
collision if the vehicle decelerates or
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
direction during the initial stages of the
impact
Rin the event of a side impact, on the side
opposite the impact if the vehicle
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
lateral direction
Rin certain situations if the vehicle overturns
and the system determines that it can
provide additional protection.
If the ETDs/belt buckle tensioners are
triggered, you will hear a bang and a small
amount of powder may also be released. Only
Rthe
in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing.
The powder that is released generally does
not constitute a health hazard. The + SRS
warning lamp lights up.
i If the belt buckle tensioners have been
triggered on the front seats, the buckle will
be pulled down and will be almost flush with
the upper edge of the seat. The + SRS
warning lamp is lit.
G Warning
The belt buckle tensioners on the front seats
only function if the belt buckles can be pulled
down unobstructed. They must not be
restricted in any way. Therefore, do not grab
the belt buckles and do not place any objects
under the belt buckles. Otherwise, the
tensioning of the belt by the buckle is
restricted or will not function, and will not
provide any additional protection.
G Warning
Pyrotechnical ETDs/belt buckle tensioners
that were activated must be replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the
pyrotechnic ETDs/belt buckle tensioners
always follow our safety instructions. These
instructions are available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PRE-SAFE® system is equipped with
electrically reversible pre-tensioners that do
not need replacing after deployment.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 59
Version: 3.0.3.5
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
G Warning
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child's risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
Rsudden
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
X
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint system appropriate to the age and
weight of the child.
X Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained using the child restraint
systems at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
The use of infant or child restraints is required
by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should always be
seated in an infant or child seat restraint
system appropriate for the size and weight of
the child. They must be properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the infant or child
seat restraint system. All infant and child seat
restraint systems must comply with the US
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint
manufacturer of compliance with these
standards can be found on the instruction
label on the child restraint system. You will
also find the statement in the instruction
manual provided with the child restraint
system.
When using an infant restraint system, child
restraint system or booster seat, make sure
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer's
instructions for installation and use.
Z
Safety
Children in the vehicle
59
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
60
Children in the vehicle
Please read the warning labels affixed to the
interior of the vehicle or to the infant restraint
system or child restraint system.
G Warning
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 60
Version: 3.0.3.5
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
The infant or child restraint system must be
properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt,
the seat belt and Top Tether strap, or lower
anchors and Top Tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized child
restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:
RUSA
only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
bag technology that is designed to
deactivate the front-passenger front air
bag, when the system on the frontpassenger seat detects the weight of a
typical 12-month old child in a standard
child restraint.
RUSA only: Children that weigh more than a
typical 12-month old child, the frontpassenger front air bag may be activated/
deactivated. Always make sure that the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
under may ride on the front seat if a
BabySmart™ compatible child restraint
system is installed on the front-passenger
seat. Use only Mercedes-Benz approved
BabySmart™ compatible child restraint
systems. A BabySmart™ compatible child
restraint system will deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag when installed
correctly. The front-passenger front air bag
will not be deactivated if the child restraint
systems that are installed are not
BabySmart™ compatible or if BabySmart™
compatible child restraint systems are not
installed correctly. If the front-passenger
front air bag is deployed, the child could be
killed when it inflates in a crash. This could
lead to serious or fatal injury.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates in a collision which could occur
under some circumstances, even with the
air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to eliminate this risk
completely is never to place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front seat.
We therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing child
restraint on the rear seat.
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front-passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 42
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the 42
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
42 indicator lamp while
driving to make sure that the
42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 42 indicator
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 61
Version: 3.0.3.5
Children in the vehicle
G Warning
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. During an
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
the shoulder belt across the chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
Special seat belt retractor
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the
driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special
seat belt retractor. The activated special seat
belt retractor ensures that the seat belt
cannot slacken after being fastened.
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia
reel.
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt
buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
belt retractor is activated.
X Push down on the child restraint system to
take up any slack.
Removing a child restraint system/
deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
X Press the seat belt release button and
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is
deactivated.
G Warning
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
retractor will be deactivated.
Z
Safety
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured or
even killed if the passenger front air bag
inflates.
RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
restraint on the passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and
weight of the child
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer's instructions
RFor children larger than the typical 12month-old child, the passenger front air bag
may or may not be activated.
61
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
62
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 62
Version: 3.0.3.5
Children in the vehicle
LATCH-type child restraint (ISOFIX) in
the rear
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the center
seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
seat belt could be damaged.
Safety
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
G Warning
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
the shoulder belt across the chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
In order to attain the correct seating position
for children weighing over 41 lb (18 kg), it may
be necessary to use a booster seat until they
reach a height where a normal lap/shoulder
seat belt lies properly across their bodies
without the need for a booster seat.
Install the child restraint system according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
The child restraint system must be installed
firmly on both brackets.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
can come loose in the event of an accident,
causing the child to be severely or fatally
injured.
Child restraint systems/child restraint
retaining brackets that are damaged or have
suffered damage due to an impact must be
replaced.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially-designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats.
Securing rings for two ISOFIX child restraint
systems are installed on the left and right:
Ron
the rear seat backrests of the outer
seats in the second row
Ron the backrests of the seats in the third
row of seats
Install child restraint systems without the
ISOFIX securing system using the vehicle's
seat belts. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for installation of child restraint
systems.
X
Remove covers :.
; Securing rings
X
Install the ISOFIX child restraint system.
Comply with the manufacturer's
instructions when installing the ISOFIX
child restraint system.
Top Tether
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
G Warning
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their
upright position when the rear seats are
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat
backrests in their upright position before
installing the Top Tether straps or when the
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 63
Version: 3.0.3.5
Children in the vehicle
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce
the risk of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorages in the second row
of seats are located on the rear of the rear
seat backrests. For the third row of seats, use
the cargo tie down rings in the trunk floor.
Safety
that rear seat backrests are secured properly
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the
seat backrest could fold forward. The child
restraint system is no longer supported
properly or held in position and can no longer
fulfill its function. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
X
Move the head restraint upwards.
Install the ISOFIX child restraint system
with Top Tether. Comply with the
manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt ? under the head
restraint between the two head restraint
bars.
X Route Top Tether belt ? downwards
between the cargo compartment cover and
rear seat backrest.
X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether
belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.
Ensure that:
X
RTop
X
Remove respective covering cap : of the
Top Tether anchorage.
63
Tether hook = is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ; as shown
RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted
RTop Tether belt ? is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo
compartment cover if the cargo
compartment cover is installed
RTop Tether belt ? is routed between the
rear seat backrest and the cargo net if
the cargo net is installed.
X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Comply with
the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so.
X Move the head restraint back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 98). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt ?.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Panic alarm
64
Child-proof locks
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
G Warning
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 64
Version: 3.0.3.5
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
G Warning
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves in the rear side window.
G Warning
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
children ride in the rear always secure the rear
doors with the child-proof locks.
You secure each door individually with the
child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
X
To activate/deactivate: press switch :.
Switch : engages or extends. If the switch
is pushed in, it is only possible to operate
the side windows in the rear using the
switches on the driver's door.
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
X
To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
Override feature for the rear side
windows
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 59).
X
To activate: press and hold !
button : for about one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes.
X To deactivate: press ! button :
again.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 65
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving safety systems
or
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO Start-Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the
vehicle.
i USA only:
This device complies with the part 15 of the
FCC regulations. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must withstand any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with the RSS-210
regulations of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must withstand any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Important safety notes
G Warning
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
RExcessive
speed, especially in turns
and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the
driving safety systems described in this
section must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
Always adjust your driving style to the
prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and
objects on the street.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
indicator and warning lamps that may come
on as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
RWet
i In wintry driving conditions, always use
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
REBD (Electronic Brake-power Distribution)
65
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the
driving safety systems described in this
section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety information
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 65).
Z
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
66
Driving safety systems
G Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
brake pedal reduces the braking effect.
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 66
Version: 3.0.3.5
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
ABS works from a speed of about
5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of roadsurface conditions. ABS works on slippery
surfaces, even when you only brake gently.
The ! warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
Braking
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal with force until the braking
situation is over.
X To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
G Warning
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving systems
such as the BAS or the ESP® are also switched
off. Observe indicator and warning lamps that
may come on as well as messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing the steering
capability and extending the braking distance.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Off-road ABS
An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically if the offroad drive program (Y page 204) is activated
or the LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 157) is selected.
At a speed below 18 mph (30 km/h) the front
wheels lock periodically when braking. The
digging-in effect achieved in the process
reduces the stopping distance on off-road
terrain. This limits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist)
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 65).
BAS operates in emergency braking
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
G Warning
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
functions, but without the additional brake
boost available that the BAS would normally
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Important safety notes
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 65).
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also
modified to keep the vehicle on the desired
course within physical limits. ESP® assists
the driver when pulling away on wet or
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 67
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving safety systems
slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the
vehicle during braking.
If ESP® intervenes, the d warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
G Warning
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
d warning lamp flashing in the instrument
cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
RWhen
driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed.
! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum
of ten seconds on a brake test
dynamometer. Switch off the ignition.
Application of the brakes by ESP® may
otherwise destroy the brake system.
! Function or performance tests may only
be performed on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
beforehand. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system.
i Only use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 65).
Traction control is part of ESP®.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
individually if they spin. This enables you to
pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
for example if the road surface is slippery on
one side. In addition, more drive torque is
transferred to the wheel or wheels with
traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP®.
X Activate the off-road drive program
(Y page 204) or engage the LOW RANGE
off-road gear (Y page 157) if appropriate
for the driving conditions.
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction
System)
A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically if the offroad drive program is activated
(Y page 204) or the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157) is selected.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
G Warning
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the
circumstances described below. Disabling
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is running.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen
using snow chains
deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
Rin
G Warning!
Activate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin.
Z
67
Safety
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving safety systems
68
Safety
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 68
Version: 3.0.3.5
If you deactivate ESP®:
Off-road ESP®
RESP®
An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically if the offroad drive program is activated
(Y page 204)or if the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157) is selected. It intervenes
with a delay if there is oversteering or
understeering, thus improving traction.
no longer improves driving stability.
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of
the wheels results in a cutting action, which
provides better grip.
Rtraction control is still activated.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the d warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
ESP® trailer stabilization
If your trailer begins to lurch, you can only
stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by
depressing the brake firmly.
In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
detect if the trailer begins to lurch. ESP®
slows the vehicle down by braking and
limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
trailer combination has stabilized.
Trailer stabilization is active from a speed
above 40 mph (65 km/h).
G Warning!
The system will not be able to assist when the
trailer jackknifes
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The d warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
G Warning
When the d ESP® warning lamp is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions and to the nonoperating status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning a drive wheel for an
extended period with ESP switched off. This
could cause serious damage to the drive
train.
X
To activate: press button :.
The d warning lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Ron wet or icy roads
Ron roads with slippery surface
Rin sand or gravel
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
over before the system recognizes swaying of
the trailer.
Rif
Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is
deactivated or disabled because of a
malfunction.
EBD
G Warning
Observe "Important safety instructions"
(Y page 65).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 69
Version: 3.0.3.5
Anti-theft systems
G Warning!
If the EBD malfunctions, the brake system will
still function with full brake boost. However,
the rear wheels could lock up during
emergency braking situations, for example.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident.
Adapt your driving style to the changed
driving characteristics.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
function. This could result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or
deactivate the distance warning function in
the on-board computer (Y page 226).
After activation, the Ä symbol is
displayed in the lower multifunction
display.
Anti-theft systems
Distance warning function (vehicles
with DISTRONIC)
This function warns you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h), if:
Rfor
a period of several seconds, the
distance to the vehicle in front is too short
for the speed at which you are traveling.
The · distance warning lamp in the
instrument cluster will light up.
Ryou are approaching the vehicle in front
rapidly. An intermittent warning tone will
then sound and the · distance warning
lamp in the instrument cluster will light up.
You must apply the brakes yourself in order
to maintain the appropriate distance to the
vehicle in front and prevent a collision.
G Warning!
If the distance warning lamp · in the
instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Ra
door
vehicle with the mechanical key
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
Rthe
Z
Safety
EBD monitors and controls the brake
pressure on the rear wheels to improve
driving stability while braking.
69
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 70
Version: 3.0.3.5
Anti-theft systems
70
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that has triggered it, for
example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than 30
Safety
seconds, the emergency call system
mbrace (USA only) or Tele Aid (Canada
only) initiates a call to the Customer
Assistance Center automatically. The
emergency call system initiates the call
provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/Tele
Aid service
mbrace/Tele Aid service has been
activated properly
Rthe mobile phone, power supply and GPS
necessary are available
Rthe
i Unless you open a door or the trunk lid
within 40 seconds after unlocking the
vehicle:
Rthe
vehicle will be locked again.
anti-theft alarm system will be rearmed.
X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:
insert the key into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X Press the % or & button on the key.
The alarm is switched off.
Rthe
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The key
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
It may be necessary to close the affected
door or the tailgate.
X
To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the
key or KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the anti-theft alarm system is switched
off.
Press the Start/Stop button on the
dashboard. The key must be inside the
vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 71
Version: 3.0.3.5
71
Vehicle equipment ..............................
SmartKey .............................................
Doors ....................................................
Cargo compartment ............................
Side windows ......................................
Sliding sunroof ....................................
72
72
78
80
84
88
Opening and closing
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
72
SmartKey
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 72
Version: 3.0.3.5
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
Rbe
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or cargo
compartment unless they are firmly secured
in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
Rsudden
General information
If you cannot open or lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey, either the battery in the SmartKey
is empty, the SmartKey is faulty, or the vehicle
battery is discharged.
X
Check the battery in the SmartKey and
replace it if necessary (Y page 76).
X Unlock the driver's door using the
mechanical key (Y page 75).
X Lock the vehicle using the mechanical key
(Y page 75).
X Have the vehicle battery and battery
contacts checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is faulty, contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
SmartKey functions
General notes
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC regulations. Operation is subject to
the following conditions:
1. This device must not cause any harmful
interference, and
2. This device must be able to
accommodate interference that is
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 73
Version: 3.0.3.5
SmartKey
i Canada only:
This device complies with Industry
Canada's RSS–210 regulations. Operation
is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device must not cause any harmful
interference, and
2. This device must be able to
accommodate interference that is
received, including interference which
could cause unwanted functions.
Unapproved modifications to this device
may lead to withdrawal of permission to
operate it.
Locking and unlocking centrally
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe
doors
tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
Rthe
X
To unlock centrally: press the %
button.
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking the
vehicle:
Rthe
vehicle is locked again.
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
X
again.
To lock centrally: press the & button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC regulations. Operation is subject to
the following conditions:
1. This device must not cause any harmful
interference, and
2. This device must be able to
accommodate interference that is
received, including interference which
could cause unwanted functions.
Unapproved modifications to this device
may lead to withdrawal of permission to
operate it.
i Canada only:
: & To lock the vehicle
; F To open/close the tailgate
= % To unlock the vehicle
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.
When locking, they flash three times.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada's RSS–210 regulations. Operation
is subject to the following conditions:
1. This device must not cause any harmful
interference, and
2. This device must be able to
accommodate interference that is
received, including interference which
could cause unwanted functions.
Unapproved modifications to this device
may lead to withdrawal of permission to
operate it.
Z
Opening and closing
received, including interference which
could cause unwanted functions.
Unapproved modifications to this device
may lead to withdrawal of permission to
operate it.
73
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
74
SmartKey
Important information about using
KEYLESS-GO
RYou
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 74
Version: 3.0.3.5
can use the KEYLESS-GO key as a
conventional SmartKey.
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
with those of a conventional SmartKey, e.g.
you can open the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
and close it with the & button.
RAlways carry your KEYLESS-GO key on your
person.
RNever store the KEYLESS-GO key together
with:
- electronic devices, such as a mobile
phone or other SmartKey
- metal objects, such as coins or metal foil
Doing so may impair the function of
KEYLESS-GO.
RTo open or close the vehicle, the KEYLESSGO key should not be more than 3 ft (1 m)
from the door or tailgate.
RIf the vehicle is parked for more than
72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outer door handle and
switch on the ignition to reactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function.
RIf the KEYLESS-GO key is removed from the
vehicle, the system may not be able to
recognize the SmartKey anymore. The
vehicle can then no longer be locked or
started with KEYLESS-GO.
RIf the KEYLESS-GO key has been removed
from the vehicle, e.g. when another vehicle
occupant with a KEYLESS-GO key leaves
the vehicle:
- when the Start/Stop button is pressed,
or when trying to lock the vehicle using
the locking button on the outside door
handle, the Key Not Detected message
appears in the multifunction display.
- when the engine is running, the red Key
Not Detected message appears in the
multifunction display as you pull away.
Look for the KEYLESS-GO key and place
it somewhere else in the vehicle. Place
the KEYLESS-GO key on the front-
passenger seat, for example, or in your
shirt pocket.
RIf you have switched on the engine with the
Start/Stop button, you can switch it off
again by:
- pressing the Start/Stop button
- inserting the KEYLESS-GO key into the
ignition lock while the vehicle is at a
standstill and the automatic
transmission is in park position P.
RYou may inadvertently unlock the vehicle if
the KEYLESS-GO key is less than 3 ft (1 m)
from the vehicle and:
- an exterior door handle is hit by a jet of
water, or
you clean an exterior door handle
note that any vehicle occupant can
start the engine when there is a KEYLESSGO key in the vehicle.
Scenario 1: There is a KEYLESS-GO key in
the vehicle and a second one outside the
vehicle. If you leave the KEYLESS-GO key
in the vehicle when you leave and lock the
vehicle, no message appears in the
multifunction display.
Scenario 2: There is a KEYLESS-GO key in
the vehicle, but none outside the vehicle. If
you get out of the vehicle and attempt to
lock it, the Key Detected In Vehicle
message appears in the multifunction
display. The vehicle is not then locked.
When starting the engine and whilst driving,
KEYLESS-GO also checks whether a valid
SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically
establishing radio contact.
-
RPlease
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 75
Version: 3.0.3.5
SmartKey
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: press locking
button :.
If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only
the cargo compartment of the vehicle is
unlocked.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the setting of the locking
system in such a way that only the driver's
door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This
is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
X To change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
(Y page 76) flashes twice.
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 69).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X Press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X Press the Start/Stop button in the ignition
lock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
or
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey must be outside the
vehicle.
Removing the mechanical key
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as
follows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: press locking
button : on one of the door handles.
X
Push release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time, remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
SmartKey battery
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice.
Important safety notes
It is advisable to have batteries replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
Opening and closing
X
75
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
SmartKey
76
G Warning
Batteries contain toxic and caustic
substances. For this reason, keep batteries
out of the reach of children.
If a battery has been swallowed, seek medical
help immediately.
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 76
Version: 3.0.3.5
Changing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 75).
G Warning
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Observe
government disposal guidelines. California
residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The SmartKey battery is working properly if
battery charge indicator lamp : lights up
briefly.
If battery charge indicator lamp : does not
light up briefly during the test, the SmartKey
battery is discharged.
X Replace the SmartKey battery
(Y page 76).
i You can obtain a SmartKey battery at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
& or % button results in the vehicle
being locked or unlocked respectively.
X
X
Press mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens. Do
not hold the cover closed while doing so.
Remove the cover of the battery tray.
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X Insert the front tabs of the battery tray's
cover first and then press to close it.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 77
Version: 3.0.3.5
SmartKey
77
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from a
distance of approximately 1.5 ft (50 cm) and try to unlock or
lock the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary
(Y page 76).
X Lock (Y page 80) or unlock (Y page 80) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X Lock (Y page 80) or unlock (Y page 80) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO is in standby mode because the vehicle has not been
or unlock the vehicle
unlocked for an extended period.
using KEYLESS-GO.
X Pull the door handle twice and then insert the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the %/& button.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the %/& button.
You have lost the
SmartKey.
X
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey canceled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z
Opening and closing
Problems with the SmartKey
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Opening and closing
78
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 78
Version: 3.0.3.5
Doors
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 322).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 325).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors
Important safety notes
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
Rbe
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or cargo
compartment unless they are firmly secured
in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
Rsudden
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 79
Version: 3.0.3.5
Doors
79
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked, unless the childproof locks have been activated (Y page 64).
Open the door only when the traffic
conditions permit.
If the vehicle has been opened with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO key, opening from
inside triggers the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 69).
X
To lock: press button ;.
The vehicle locks itself when all doors and
the tailgate are closed.
X To unlock: press button :.
You can open a front door from inside the
vehicle even if it has been locked. Open the
door only when the traffic conditions permit.
If the vehicle has been locked with the locking
button for the central locking function:
Rand
X
Pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This feature may be useful if,
for example, you wish to unlock the frontpassenger door from the inside or lock the
vehicle before you pull away.
The central locking/unlocking button does
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The buttons are located on both front doors.
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
from the inside if the vehicle has been
locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
i It is only possible to lock the vehicle
the SmartKey has been reset to the
factory settings, the complete vehicle is
unlocked when a front door is opened from
the inside
Rand the SmartKey has been set to an
individual setting, only the front door that
is opened from the inside is unlocked
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not
unlocked if you use the unlocking button for
the central locking system.
Automatic locking
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels of the
vehicle are moving at a speed above 9 mph
(15 km/h). Therefore, there is a risk of being
locked out when the vehicle is being pushed,
towed or tested on a dynamometer.
You can switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board
computer (Y page 224).
centrally if the front-passenger door is
closed.
Z
Opening and closing
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Cargo compartment
80
Unlocking the driver's door
(mechanical key)
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 80
Version: 3.0.3.5
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked
centrally with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO:
X Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 75).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
X
Press down the locking knobs in the frontpassenger and rear doors manually, if
necessary.
X Close the driver's door from the outside.
X Press down the locking knob of the driver's
door by reaching in through the open rear
door.
i Make sure that you have the SmartKey on
your person and that it has not been left in
the vehicle.
X
X
Close the rear door on the driver’s side.
Make sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The antitheft alarm system is not primed.
X
Firmly turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position
1 and hold it in this position.
X Pull the door handle quickly.
The locking knob pops up.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
X Pull the door handle again.
Locking the vehicle
If the vehicle can no longer be locked
centrally with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO:
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
door on the front-passenger side and the
tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear door on
the driver’s side.
X Press the locking button on the driver’s
door (Y page 79).
The locking knobs in the front-passenger
door and in the rear doors drop down.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
G Warning
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, and do not give them access
to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. They could:
Rinjure
themselves on vehicle parts
seriously or fatally injured by extreme
heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with
vehicle equipment that may still be in
operation even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the ignition, such as the
seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment or memory function.
Rbe
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 81
Version: 3.0.3.5
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing from the outside
Opening
You can only open the tailgate after unlocking
it first.
X Press the % button on the SmartKey.
Opening and closing
If children open a door, they could cause
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or
even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and a child could be burned on these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or cargo
compartment unless they are firmly secured
in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
Rsudden
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
X
Pull handle :.
X Raise the tailgate.
Closing
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
For the tailgate to be opened fully, there must
be a minimum clearance from floor to ceiling
of 7.40 ft (2.25 m).
The tailgate can be:
Ropened
Ropened
and closed manually from outside
and closed automatically from
outside
Ropened
inside
and closed automatically from
81
X
Pull the tailgate down using recess :.
Push the tailgate closed from outside the
vehicle.
X Lock the vehicle if necessary with
the & button on the SmartKey or with
KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).
X
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Cargo compartment
82
Automatic opening and closing from
the outside
Important safety guidelines
G Warning!
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 82
Version: 3.0.3.5
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
RPress
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull outside handle on the tailgate.
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
You can close the tailgate automatically using
the SmartKey, the closing button5 or the
locking button6.
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
For the tailgate to be opened fully, there must
be a minimum clearance from floor to ceiling
of 7.40 ft (2.25 m).
Opening
You can open the tailgate automatically with
the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate.
X Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate opens.
or
X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the
handle and let it go again immediately.
Closing
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
closing switch on the driver’s door.
RPress the tailgate closing switch.
5
6
Closing button and locking button (example:
vehicle with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESSGO)
X
To close: press closing button : on the
tailgate.
or
X
Press and hold the F button on the
SmartKey until the tailgate closes.
X To close and lock simultaneously:
Press locking button ; on the tailgate.
i The tailgate can only be opened and
closed with the SmartKey if there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
If the tailgate touches an object while
closing, the closing procedure is
interrupted and the tailgate reopens.
i Only with KEYLESS-GO: if you leave a
KEYLESS-GO key in the cargo
compartment, the tailgate will not lock.
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate only.
For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO only.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 83
Version: 3.0.3.5
Cargo compartment
The tailgate is not closed unless a
KEYLESS-GO key is detected.
83
You can open/close the tailgate from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0): Press button F on the
SmartKey.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
G Warning!
Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
X
To open: pull remote operating switch :
for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.
X
To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1
or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press remote operating switch for
tailgate : until the tailgate is closed.
If the tailgate touches an object, the closing
procedure is interrupted and the tailgate
reopens.
X To interrupt the closing procedure: pull
or push the remote operating switch for
tailgate :.
Opening the tailgate from the inside
G Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Children could open the tailgate from
the inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! Always make sure there is sufficient
space when opening.
You can unlock and open the tailgate from
inside the vehicle.
The handle is on the lower part of the tailgate
window on the right-hand side when viewed
in the direction of travel.
Z
Opening and closing
Automatic opening and closing from
the inside
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Side windows
84
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 84
Version: 3.0.3.5
(Y page 82) on the tailgate or pull the
handle on the outside of the tailgate again.
X To store the position: press and hold the
closing button on the tailgate until you hear
a short tone.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating the tailgate
X
Press handle : in the direction of
arrow ; as far as it will go and hold it there.
X From this position, pull handle : in the
direction of arrow = as far as it will go and
hold it there.
X Swing the tailgate upwards.
i Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate:
If you do not open the tailgate after
unlocking, it will lock again automatically
after a few seconds.
Limiting the opening angle of the
tailgate
Important safety guidelines
You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate
in the top half of its opening range. This could
be useful, for example, if there is insufficient
space above the tailgate.
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise
be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle
outside.
Activating the tailgate
X
To open the tailgate: pull the handle on
the tailgate.
X To stop the opening procedure at the
desired position: press the close button
X
Press and hold the closing button
(Y page 82) in the tailgate until you hear
two short tones.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G Warning
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, and do not give them access
to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. They could:
Rinjure
themselves on vehicle parts
seriously or fatally injured by extreme
heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with
vehicle equipment that may still be in
operation even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the ignition, such as the
seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or
even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
Rbe
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 85
Version: 3.0.3.5
Side windows
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
Rsudden
G Warning!
When opening or closing the windows, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a door
window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window and open
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the "Closing
when a door window is blocked" section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of a door window can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the hinged quarter windows can
be immediately halted by pressing or pulling
the switch.
If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button & on the SmartKey or by
pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle,
the automatic reversal function will not
operate.
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the window
opening.
G Warning!
Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
downward motion of the pane may pull that
part of your body down between the window
pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch and pull it to close the window.
Opening and closing the side
windows
: Front left
; Front right
= Rear right
? Rear left
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
i It is not possible to operate the door
windows from the rear compartment when
the override feature is activated for the
door windows.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
Z
Opening and closing
hot, and a child could be burned on these
parts.
85
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Side windows
86
i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing again.
i You can continue to operate the side
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 86
Version: 3.0.3.5
windows after you switch off the engine.
This function remains active for five
minutes or until one of the front doors is
opened.
X
To close: pull switch : and release.
Both hinged side windows close fully.
X To stop the closing procedure: press
switch : again.
The hinged side window opens fully.
i If the hinged side windows are blocked
when closing, the closing procedure is
interrupted and the hinged side windows
open again slightly.
i For safety reasons, the hinged side
windows can only be opened again after
four seconds.
Opening and closing the hinged side
windows
You can operate the hinged side windows
electrically.
The hinged side windows can only be
operated from the driver's seat.
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
as you close the hinged side windows. If there
is a risk of somebody becoming trapped,
release the switch or push the switch again to
reopen the side window.
Convenience opening
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, you can use the SmartKey
to simultaneously:
Ropen
the side windows
the hinged side windows
Ropen the sliding sunroof
Rswitch on the seat ventilation of the driver's
seat
Ropen
i The convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
X
Door control panel
Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the %
button.
X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are in
the desired position.
X
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To open: press switch : and release.
Both hinged side windows open fully.
To interrupt the convenience opening:
release the % button.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 87
Version: 3.0.3.5
Side windows
X
General information
When you lock the vehicle, you can
simultaneously:
Rclose
the side windows
Rclose the hinged side windows
Rclose the sliding sunroof
To interrupt the convenience closing:
release the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the
vehicle but must not be further than 3 ft (1 m)
from a door.
X Close all the doors.
G Warning
When closing the door windows and the
sliding sunroof, make sure that there is no
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
RRelease the & button to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold the
% button. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there is
no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure, press and hold the
& button.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the lock button on the outside door
handle to stop the closing procedure.
pull on the same outside door
handle and hold firmly. The door windows
and the sliding sunroof will open for as long
as the door handle is held but the door is
not opened.
RImmediately
Using the SmartKey
i The SmartKey must be close to the
driver's door handle.
X
Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
X Lock the vehicle by pressing the &
button.
X Press and hold the & button until the
side windows and the sliding sunroof are
fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
Keep locking button : on the door handle
pressed until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing:
release locking button : on the door
handle.
Resetting the side windows
You must reset each side window if:
Rthe
battery has been disconnected or has
become discharged.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.
X Close all the doors.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed. (Y page 85)
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
Z
Opening and closing
Convenience closing
87
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Sliding sunroof
88
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Opening and closing
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 88
Version: 3.0.3.5
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 85).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Problems with the side windows
If a side window is obstructed again during
closing and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the antientrapment feature.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window
to close without the anti-entrapment feature
for as long as you hold the switch.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because objects are trapped between the
side window and the door frame.
Sliding sunroof
X
Important safety notes
X
Remove the objects.
Close the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because objects in the guide rail are
preventing the window from being raised.
X
X
Remove the objects.
Close the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed,
and you cannot see the cause.
G Warning
Closing the side windows with increased force
or without the anti-entrapment feature could
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure
that nobody can become trapped when
closing the side windows.
If a side window is obstructed during closing
and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased
force.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
Rbe
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 89
Version: 3.0.3.5
Sliding sunroof
hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
entire body parts or portions of them may
protrude from the passenger compartment.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
braking maneuvers
changes of direction
Ran accident
! If the sliding sunroof cannot be opened or
G Warning!
! Do not forget that the weather can
Rstrong
Rsudden
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing
procedure.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the
automatic operation and anti-entrapment
features. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held.
See the "Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof
is blocked" section for details.
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
any direction.
G Warning!
89
closed due to a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
change abruptly. Make certain that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle
interior.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
i You can still operate the tilt/sliding
sunroof even if you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function
remains active for five minutes or until one
of the front doors is opened.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
Z
Opening and closing
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 90
Version: 3.0.3.5
Sliding sunroof
90
Opening and closing
X
Overhead control panel
: To raise
; To open
Reinsert the fuse.
X Switch on the ignition.
X Raise the tilt/sliding sunroof fully at the
rear (Y page 89).
X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another
second.
X Make sure that the tilt/sliding sunroof can
be opened or closed fully again using the
opening/closing process (Y page 89).
X If the tilt/sliding sunroof can be raised fully
at the rear it is set correctly. If this is not
the case, you must repeat the previously
described steps.
= To close
X
Switch on the ignition.
X Push or pull the 2 switch in the
corresponding direction.
i If you press the 2 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing again.
Automatic opening/raising is only available
if the tilt/sliding sunroof is in the closed
position.
You can open/close the cover for the
sunblind manually when the tilt/sliding
sunroof is raised/closed.
Resetting
Problems with the sliding sunroof
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
G Warning!
You could be severely or even fatally injured
when closing the sliding sunroof with
increased closing force or if the antientrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure
that nobody can become trapped when
closing the sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
closing:
X
Reset the tilt/sliding sunroof if it does not
open smoothly, or if the battery has been
disconnected or has become discharged.
! Contact a qualified specialist workshop if
the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
fully or reset.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
from the main fuse box. To find out where
the fuse is located, refer to the fuse
allocation chart in the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 310).
Immediately after the sliding sunroof
blocks, pull the 2 switch in the
overhead control panel down to the point
of resistance and hold it until the sliding
sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
closing again:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof
blocks, pull the 2 switch in the
overhead control panel down to the point
of resistance and hold it until the sliding
sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
anti-entrapment feature.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 91
Version: 3.0.3.5
Sliding sunroof
91
G Warning!
Opening and closing
Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof
switch to close the sliding sunroof
immediately after it had been blocked two
times will cause the sliding sunroof to close
without the anti-entrapment feature for as
long as you hold the switch.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
92
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 92
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 93
Version: 3.0.3.5
93
Vehicle equipment .............................. 94
Correct driver's seat position ............ 94
Seats .................................................... 95
Steering wheel .................................. 105
Mirrors ............................................... 108
Memory functions ............................. 110
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 94
Version: 3.0.3.5
Correct driver's seat position
94
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Correct driver's seat position
Ryou
have moved the backrest to an
almost vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
that your thighs are gently supported.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
X Check whether the head restraint is
adjusted properly (Y page 97).
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
the center of the head restraint.
Observe the important safety notes on
(Y page 105).
X Check whether steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel
manually7(Y page 106)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 106)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Ryou
Observe the important safety notes on
(Y page 95).
X Check whether you have adjusted seat =
properly.
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 96)
When adjusting the seat, make sure:
Ryou
are as far away from the driver's air
bag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
7
USA only.
Observe the important safety notes on
(Y page 53).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 55).
The seat belt should:
Rfit
snugly across your body
routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
hip joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors
Rbe
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 95
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
(Y page 108) in such a way that you have
a good view of road and traffic conditions.
X Vehicles with memory function: save the
seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings (Y page 110).
Seats
Important safety notes
G Warning
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control, all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be done
before setting the vehicle in motion.
G Warning
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer is
in a position that is as upright as possible and
seat belts are properly positioned on the
body.
G Warning
Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you
can correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel.
Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
Radjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level.
Rnever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning
The electrically adjustable seats can be
operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's
unsupervised access to a vehicle could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see "Children in the vehicle".
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
G Warning
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
Z
95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 96
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
96
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
!
To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
not spill any liquids on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not to be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the " Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. covers, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Rdo
Please contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center for more information.
i Related topics:
RCargo
compartment enlargement
(folding the second and third rows of
seats forwards) (Y page 266)
Adjusting the seats
i Vehicles without the memory function:
the seats can be adjusted within five
minutes of opening a front door.
The time span starts over if, within these
five minutes, you:
Ropen
or close a front door
the key into or remove the key
from the ignition lock
Rswitch the ignition on or off.
If the key is in position 2 in the ignition, you
can adjust the seats at any time.
Rinsert
! When you move the seats, make sure that
there are no objects in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could
damage the seats and the objects.
! When the rear bench seat is folded
forwards, the front seats cannot be moved
to their rearmost position. You could
otherwise damage the seats and the rear
bench seat.
! Make sure that the sun visor is folded up
before adjusting the backrest and head
restraint height. The head restraint and sun
visor could otherwise collide when the head
restraint is fully extended.
i The rear-compartment head restraints
can be removed (Y page 99).
8
Only for vehicles with the memory function.
: Head restraint height8
; Backrest angle
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
? Seat cushion angle
A Seat height
i Vehicles with the memory function: if
PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better
position if it was previously in an
unfavorable position.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 97
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
97
i You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 110).
Adjusting the head restraints
Adjusting the head restraint height9
! The head restraints may only be removed
in a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you go
to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Push or pull the lower edge of the head
restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Adjusting the head restraints
electrically10
X
To adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 96) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
X
If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is
necessary to press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
G Warning!
When folding back the head restraint side
bolsters, do not put your hands between the
side bolster and the cushion holder. There is
a danger of becoming trapped.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints
G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
System: When adjusting the head restraint,
make sure your fingers do not become caught
between the head restraint cushion and the
monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury.
X
9
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull right and/or left-
For vehicles without memory function only.
for vehicles with memory function.
10 Only
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Adjusting the head restraints manually
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
98
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 98
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
hand side bolster : into the desired
position.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;.
Rear seat head restraints
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Head restraints on the outer seats in the 3rd row
of seats
X
If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is
necessary to press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the head restraint height (2nd
and 3rd rows of seats)
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head.
You can adjust the two outer head restraints
in the 2nd row of seats and the head
restraints in the 3rd row of seats.
Outer seat head restraints in the 2nd row of seats
Outer seat head restraints in the 2nd row of seats
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 99
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
Head restraints on the outer seats in the 3rd row
of seats
Outer seat head restraints in the 2nd row of seats
X
Using both hands, reach backwards and
grasp the sides of the head restraint.
X Pull the lower edge of the head restraint
forwards or backwards until it is in the
desired position.
Removing and installing the rear head
restraints
G Warning!
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
which have the head restraints installed. In
the event of an accident, this reduces the risk
of injury for passengers seated in the rear
compartment.
2nd row of seats: if you wish to remove/
install the head restraints from the outer
seats, you must fold the respective seat
backrest forwards (Y page 100).
3rd row of seats: if you wish to remove/install
the head restraints, you must fold the
respective seat backrest forwards
(Y page 100).
Head restraints on the outer seats in the 3rd row
of seats
X
To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X 2nd row of seats: fold back the seat
backrest until it engages.
3rd row of seats: fold the seat up or down
(Y page 100).
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X 2nd row of seats: fold back the seat
backrest until it engages.
3rd row of seats: fold the seat up or down
(Y page 100).
Z
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
100
Seats
Adjusting the seats in the second and
third row
G Warning
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 100
Version: 3.0.3.5
Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt
provide the best restraint when the wearer is
in a position that is as upright as possible and
the seat belt is properly positioned on the
body.
Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you
can correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
After adjusting the seat, always ensure that
the seat and the backrest are correctly
engaged. The backrest must be in an upright
position.
Test the stability of the latch by pushing and
pulling the backrest. If the seat and backrest
are not correctly latched, the seat could move
forward and the backrest could fold down.
While braking, changing direction, or in an
accident, you could slide out from under the
seat belt. The child seat would no longer be
correctly supported or correctly positioned
and would no longer carry out its intended
function. This could cause serious or fatal
injuries.
Adjusting the backrest angle (second
row of seats)
G Warning
The seat belt only offers its intended
protection when the seat backrest is in a
nearly vertical position and the occupant is
sitting upright. The seat backrest and seat
belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
positioned on the body.
You should therefore adjust the seat backrest
to a position as upright as possible.
The backrest angle can be adjusted to five
positions.
X
Pull backrest release ; in the direction of
the arrow and hold it in this position.
Backrest : folds forwards.
X Adjust the backrest angle as desired.
X Release backrest release ;.
X Lean back firmly against the backrest to
ensure that it is engaged.
Folding the seats up/down (third row of
seats)
The third row of seats consists of two
electrically foldable individual seats, which
can be lowered into the cargo compartment.
If the seat is not correctly locked in position,
the display message: 3rd row of seats,
right-hand side not locked appears in
the multifunction display.
! Make sure that there is nothing on the
folded-down seats in the cargo
compartment. The cargo compartment
must be empty for the third row of seats to
be folded up. The seats or the objects in the
cargo compartment could otherwise be
damaged.
Make sure that the seats in the third row
are empty and not blocked before folding
them down.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 101
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
The switches for folding the left or right seats
up and down are marked: L for the left seat
when viewed in the direction of travel, R for
the right seat when viewed in the direction of
travel.
! If there are objects underneath the seat,
If the right-hand rear door is open
X
To fold up: fold the right-hand outer seat
in the second row of seats forwards
(Y page 101).
X Briefly press switch :.
The seat folds up.
X To fold down: briefly press switch ;.
The seat folds down.
If the tailgate is open
X
To fold up: briefly press switch :.
The seat folds up.
X To fold down: briefly press switch ;.
The seat folds down.
the seat can no longer be folded up or down
fully. The seat could be damaged.
Only drive with the panel completely
installed.
To open: fold the corresponding seat up or
down (Y page 100).
X When the seat is halfway folded up or down,
lock the backrest manually.
X Grasp the panel recess.
X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
X To close: fold the corresponding seat up or
down (Y page 100).
X When the seat is halfway folded up or down,
lock the backrest manually.
X Attach the panel using the guide pins.
X Push the panel downwards until it engages.
X Fold the seat up and down fully to check
that the panel is seated correctly.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (third row
of seats)
G Warning!
Detachable panel (third row of seats)
To help avoid personal injury, the second-row
seat backrests must be properly locked either
in the upright position or, when using the
expanded cargo volume, in the fully folded
position while the vehicle is in motion.
If you drop objects underneath the seats in
the third row, you can remove the panel in
order to reach beneath the seat.
If the right outer seat in the second row of
seats is in the entry/exit position, the display
message: 2nd row of seats, rightZ
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
101
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Seats
102
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 102
Version: 3.0.3.5
hand side not locked appears in the
multifunction display.
When you fold the seat and backrest back
until they engage, the display message
disappears.
For further information on enlarging the cargo
compartment (folding the second row of
seats forwards), see (Y page 267), and for
information on folding the seats in the third
row up and down, see (Y page 100).
X
Pull release handle : again in the direction
of the arrow to the pressure point and hold
it in this position.
X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function:
The right-hand front seat moves slightly
forwards.
EASY-ENTRY feature
The release handle for the EASY-ENTRY
feature is located on the side at the back of
the right outer seat in the second row of
seats.
Entry position
EASY-EXIT feature
The release loop for the EASY-EXIT feature is
located at the bottom on the back of the right
outer seat in the second row of seats.
X
Move the head restraint to the lowest
position (Y page 98).
X Pull release handle : in the direction of
the arrow to the pressure point and hold it
in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
X
Pull release loop : in the direction of the
arrow and hold it in this position.
The backrest folds forwards.
X Pull release loop : again in the direction
of the arrow and hold it in this position.
X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards.
i Vehicles with memory function:
The right-hand front seat moves slightly
forwards.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 103
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
103
row of seats forwards and open the lefthand rear door.
This may be required, for example, in the
event of an accident or similar situation if
you cannot leave the vehicle using the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (third row of
seats).
Exit position
Vehicles with memory function: call up the
saved setting (Y page 110), to move the
right-hand front seat to the saved position.
Moving the outer seats in the second
row back to the normal position
G Warning!
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure
Rthe seats are properly locked
Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position
and are properly locked
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide
under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries.
X
To lock the seat: fold back the seat until
it engages.
X Fold back the backrest until it engages.
Lean back firmly against the backrest to
ensure that it is engaged.
Emergency exit for the third row of
seats
i In an emergency, you can fold the
To help avoid personal injury when folding the
seat backrest forward, make sure you move
both feet and legs all the way back and out of
the way to avoid them contacting the seat as
it pivots forward.
In order to prevent an accident or any other
potentially dangerous situations when
opening the rear door and exiting the vehicle,
make sure you are aware of the traffic
situation at all times.
X
Move the head restraint to the lowest
position (Y page 98).
X Pull release handle : in the direction of
the arrow.
Fold backrest ; forwards.
X Open the left-hand rear door.
X Get out of the vehicle.
Adjusting the multicontour seat
You can adjust the contour of the front seats
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
backrest of the left outer seat in the second
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G Warning!
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 104
Version: 3.0.3.5
Seats
104
Switching the seat heating on/off
Switching on/off
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G Warning!
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Use switch : to move the thigh cushion
into the desired position.
X Press the W or X button to adjust the
contour of the backrest to suit your back.
X Press button ? to move the point of
greatest backrest curvature downwards to
the lumbar region and press button = to
move it upwards to the upper back region.
X Use button ; to adjust the side bolsters
for optimal lateral support.
Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.
The health of passengers that have limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to excessively high temperatures may
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
level 3 repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
One or several indicator lamps in the seat
heating button flash.
Adjusting the four-way lumbar
support
The lumbar support for the driver's seat can
be individually adjusted to provide optimum
support for your back.
: To raise the backrest contour
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
? To harden the backrest contour
Driver's and front-passenger seat
Rear compartment seats
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five
minutes.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 105
Version: 3.0.3.5
Steering wheel
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Problems with the seat heating
If one or all of the indicator lamps in the seat
heating button are flashing, the seat heating
has switched off automatically. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers which you
do not need, such as the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the
seat heating will switch back on
automatically.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
i You can open the side windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof with the key
(Y page 86). The seat ventilation of the
driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Problems with the seat ventilation
If one or all of the indicator lamps in the seat
ventilation button are flashing, the seat
ventilation has switched off automatically.
The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too
low because too many electrical consumers
are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers which you
do not need, such as the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the
seat ventilation will switch back on
automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G Warning
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
Z
105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Steering wheel
106
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 106
Version: 3.0.3.5
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Adjusting the steering wheel
manually
This function is only available in vehicles in
the USA.
Adjusting the steering wheel
electrically
: To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
; To adjust the steering wheel height
i Related topics:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature
(Y page 107)
Rstoring settings (Y page 110)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
: Release handle
The steering-wheel heating heats the leather
areas of the steering wheel.
; To adjust the steering wheel height
= To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
X
Pull release handle : out completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
X Push release handle : in completely until
it engages fully.
The steering column is locked.
X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the
direction of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = comes on or goes out.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 107
Version: 3.0.3.5
Steering wheel
If the steering wheel heating indicator lamp
on the lower left lever of the steering column
is flashing, the steering wheel heating has
switched off automatically. The vehicle's
electrical system voltage is too low because
too many electrical consumers are switched
on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers which you
do not need, such as the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the
steering wheel heating will switch back on
automatically.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
G Warning
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
one of the memory position buttons.
RPress memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver's door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
RPress
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
The steering wheel swings upwards when
you:
Rremove
the key from the ignition lock.
the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
in position 1
Ropen the driver's door and the key is in
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock.
Ropen
i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
The steering wheel is moved to the last
selected position when:
Rthe
Ryou
driver's door is closed, and
insert the key into the ignition lock.
or
Rin vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, you press the
Start/Stop button once.
When you close the driver's door with the
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
also automatically moved to the previously
set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 110).
You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
computer (Y page 225).
G Warning
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
i If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
is triggered in an accident, the steering
column will move upwards when the
driver's door is opened. This occurs
irrespective of the position of the key in the
ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the
vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational after an accident if the
EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in
the on-board computer.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the steering wheel
heating
107
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Mirrors
108
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-glare)
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 108
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare
switch : forwards or back.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior
mirror or button = for the left-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button : as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button : up, down, to
the right or to the left until the exterior
mirror is set to a position that provides you
with a good overview of traffic conditions.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G Warning
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
closer than they appear. Check your interior
rear view mirror and glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
if the rear window heating is switched on and
the outside temperature is low.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than
30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold
in the exterior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 109
Version: 3.0.3.5
Mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 226):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or frontpassenger door.
i The mirrors do not fold out if they have
been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X Vehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors: press the mirror-folding
button (Y page 108) repeatedly until you
hear the mirror engage in position.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 108).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G Warning!
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the ignition is switched on and
incident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
Z
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
otherwise not fold in when you select the
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
on-board computer (Y page 226).
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
position 1 in the ignition lock.
X Briefly press button :.
109
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Memory functions
110
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button : to adjust the
exterior mirror to a position which allows
you to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
G Warning!
i If you shift the transmission to another
G Warning!
X
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 110
Version: 3.0.3.5
position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving
position.
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
X
The memory function can still be used when
the key has been removed. For this reason,
children should never be left unsupervised in
the vehicle. They could otherwise become
trapped when adjusting the seat or the
steering wheel.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary. You could
otherwise be distracted from the traffic
conditions by the steering wheel and seat
moving of their own accord, and as a result
cause an accident.
With the key in position 2 in the ignition
lock and the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side activated, engage reverse
gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Ras
soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h)
Rabout ten seconds after you have
disengaged reverse gear
Rif you press button = for the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
Memory functions
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 96).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 106) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 108).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
X
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 111
Version: 3.0.3.5
Memory functions
111
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
112
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 112
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 113
Version: 3.0.3.5
113
Vehicle equipment ............................
Exterior lighting ................................
Interior lighting .................................
Changing bulbs .................................
Windshield wipers ............................
114
114
118
120
125
Lights and windshield wipers
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
114
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 114
Version: 3.0.3.5
Exterior lighting
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Light switch
Operation
Lights and windshield wipers
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Exterior lighting
Important safety notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations. In these countries, the daytime
running lamps are automatically switched on
when the engine is started.
1W Left-hand standing lamps
2X Right-hand standing lamps
3$ Lights off/daytime running lamps
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
running lamps
5T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument lighting
6L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
7R Vehicles without front fog lamps:
rear fog lamp
Notes on driving abroad
Converting to symmetrical low beam
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps
to symmetrical low beam in countries in
which traffic drives on the opposite side of the
road to the country where the vehicle is
registered. This prevents oncoming traffic
from being dazzled. Symmetrical lights do not
illuminate as large an area of the edge of the
carriageway.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, as close to the border
as possible before driving in these countries.
Converting to asymmetrical low beam
after returning: have the headlamps
converted back to asymmetrical low beam at
a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon as
possible after crossing the border when
returning.
7N Vehicles with fog lamps: front fog
lamp
8R Vehicles with fog lamps: rear fog
lamp
The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and
the high beam flasher are operated using the
combination switch (Y page 117).
! Switch off the parking lamps and standing
lamps when you leave the vehicle. This
prevents the battery from discharging.
The exterior lighting (except the parking
lamps/standing lamps) switches off
automatically if you:
Rremove
the key from the ignition lock
the driver's door with the key in
position 0
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
Ropen
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 115
Version: 3.0.3.5
Exterior lighting
Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
or
X
If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press
the light switch in to the stop.
Low-beam headlamps
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the key in the ignition lock to position
2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
X To switch off the low-beam
headlamps: turn the light switch to $.
Daytime running lamps
Daytime running lamps in Canada
In Canada, the "daytime running lamps"
function is required by law. It can therefore
not be deactivated.
X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
With the engine running: depending on the
ambient light, either the daytime running
lamps or the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
If the low-beam headlamps are switched
on, the T indicator lamp on the light
switch and the L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster light up.
With the engine running while the vehicle is
stationary or if the parking brake is applied:
the daytime running lamps/low-beam
headlamps switch off after 3 minutes if you
shift the selector lever to P from a driving
position.
With the engine running, the vehicle
stationary and bright ambient light: if you set
the light switch to T, the daytime running
lamps and the parking lamps switch on.
Daytime running lamps in the USA
The daytime running lamps are deactivated
ex works on vehicles for the USA.
X
To switch on the daytime running
lamps: switch on the "daytime running
lamps" function via the on-board computer
(Y page 223).
X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
With the engine running: depending on the
ambient light, either the daytime running
lamps or the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
If the low-beam headlamps are switched
on, the T indicator lamp on the light
switch and the L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster light up.
If you set the light switch to T or L
while the engine is running, the manual
setting overrides the daytime running lamps.
Automatic headlamps
G Warning!
If the light switch is set to Ã, the low-beam
headlamps will not come on automatically if
it is foggy. This could endanger you and
others. Therefore, turn the light switch to
L in fog.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
G Warning
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position à to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from à to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
X
To switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
X
115
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Exterior lighting
116
With the engine running: depending on the
brightness of the ambient light, the daytime
running lamps11 or the low-beam
headlamps are switched on or off
automatically.
When the low-beam headlamps are
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Fog lamps and rear fog lamps
Lights and windshield wipers
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 116
Version: 3.0.3.5
Front fog lamps
Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the
"fog lamps" function.
G Warning!
If you suspect that driving conditions will be
foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
may not be visible and you could endanger
yourself and others.
G Warning
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position à to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from à to L will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Rear fog lamp
X To switch on (vehicles with front fog
lamps): turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or T. When
the light switch is set to Ã, you cannot
switch on the rear fog lamp.
X Pull the light switch out to the second stop.
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
light switch in as far as it will go.
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch goes out.
X
To switch on (vehicles without front fog
lamps): turn the key in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L. When the
light switch is set to Ã, you cannot
switch on the rear fog lamp.
X Pull the light switch out to the stop.
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
light switch in as far as it will go.
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light
switch goes out.
X
To switch on the front fog lamps: turn
the key in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L or T. If the
light switch is set to Ã, you cannot
switch on the fog lamps.
X Pull the light switch out to the first detent.
The green N indicator lamp on the light
switch lights up.
X To switch off the front fog lamps: press
the light switch in as far as it will go.
The green N indicator lamp on the light
switch goes out.
11 Only
if daytime running lamps have been activated via the on-board computer.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 117
Version: 3.0.3.5
Exterior lighting
Combination switch
Turn signals
117
High beam flasher
X
To switch on: turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine.
X Pull the combination switch briefly in the
direction of arrow =.
: High-beam headlamps
; Right turn signal
= High beam flasher
? Left turn signal
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
High-beam headlamps
X
To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the key in the ignition lock to position
2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
X To switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on:
Rif
an air bag is deployed
vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
Rthe
The hazard warning lamp switches off
automatically after full brake application if the
vehicle then reaches a speed above
6 mph (10 km/h) again.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Hazard warning lamps
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
118
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 118
Version: 3.0.3.5
Interior lighting
operated five times while the lights are on and
the engine is running (Y page 125). When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Active light function
The active light function is a system that
moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated
while driving. This allows you to recognize
pedestrians, cyclists and animals.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Overhead control panel
: p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
; v To switch the rear interior lighting
on/off
= | To switch the automatic interior
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
The headlamps clear up after a short
distance.
If the moisture does not disappear, the
headlamp casing is not sealed correctly and
moisture has been able to enter.
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
lighting control on/off
? c To switch the front interior lighting
on/off
A p To switch the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off
B Front interior lighting
C Front reading lamps
D Front interior lighting
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 119
Version: 3.0.3.5
Interior lighting
119
The interior lighting switches off after a delay.
You can set the delayed switch-off using the
on-board computer.
i The interior lighting switches off
automatically after five minutes in certain
conditions. This is the case when a door
stays open and the key in the ignition lock
is in position 0 or is removed.
Manual interior lighting control
! If the interior lighting has been switched
on manually, it will not be switched off
automatically.
This can cause the battery to discharge.
Make sure that the interior lighting does
not remain switched on too long after the
engine has been switched off.
X
To switch the front interior lighting on/
off: press the c button.
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
off: press the v button.
Rear overhead control panel (3rd row of seats)
: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
X
To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
; p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on/off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting
control is activated, the button is flush with
the overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X To switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
key.
Runlock
the vehicle
a door
Rremove the key from the ignition lock .
The interior lighting delayed switch-off must
be activated (Y page 224)
Ropen
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Rear overhead control panel (second row of seats)
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
120
Changing bulbs
Changing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
you can recognize this by the following: the
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the engine. For this to be
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Lights and windshield wipers
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 120
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning!
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could
get an electric shock and be seriously or even
fatally injured if you touch the electric
contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never
remove the cover from Xenon bulbs.
Do not change Xenon bulbs yourself, but have
them replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
G Warning!
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should
therefore allow them to cool down before you
change them. Otherwise, you could be burned
if you touch them.
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.
Otherwise, they could damage the bulbs, for
example, and injure themselves.
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.
Such a bulb may break or even explode and
injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurized and can
explode when you change them, particularly
if they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 120). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lintfree cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 121
Version: 3.0.3.5
Changing bulbs
Tail lamps with LEDs
: Rear fog lamp: H 21 W (driver's side only)
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; Backup lamp: P 21 W
Lights and windshield wipers
Halogen headlamps
: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: 3457A
A Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
License plate lamp
: License plate lamp: C 5 W
Bi-Xenon headlamps
: High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: 3457A
Changing the front bulbs
Low-beam headlamp (halogen
headlamp)
? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
X
X
121
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Changing bulbs
122
Lights and windshield wipers
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 122
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Standing lamps/parking lamps
High-beam headlamps
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X
Turn signal lamps/side marker lamps
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
X
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the hood.
X Turn bulb holder : (WY 5 W) / ; (3457
A) counter-clockwise and pull it out.
X Remove the bulb from bulb
holder : / ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb
holder : / ;.
X Insert bulb holder : / ; into the lamp
and turn it clockwise.
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 123
Version: 3.0.3.5
Changing bulbs
Changing the rear bulbs
123
Right-hand side trim panel
Opening/closing the side trim
You must open the side trim panel in the
cargo compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
X
To open: insert a suitable object, e.g. a
coin, into the slot of release knob : on
side trim panel ;.
X Turn release knob : 90° in the direction
of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : 90° in the opposite
direction to the arrow.
Tail lamps with LEDs
X
To open: turn release knob : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
X Insert a suitable object, e.g. a coin, into the
slots of release knobs =.
X Turn release knobs = 90° in the direction
of the arrow and remove stowage
compartment ?.
X To close: insert stowage
compartment ? and turn release
knobs = in the opposite direction to the
arrow until the slots on the release knobs
are in a vertical position.
X Insert side trim panel ; and turn release
knob : 90° in the opposite direction to
the arrow.
: Rear fog lamp
; Backup lamp
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the cargo compartment.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 123).
X Turn the corresponding bulb holder
counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
Left-hand side trim panel
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Changing bulbs
124
X
Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 123).
License plate lamp
Lights and windshield wipers
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 124
Version: 3.0.3.5
To check and adapt the headlamp setting,
proceed as follows:
X Park the vehicle on level ground at a
distance of 25 feet (7.6 m) from a wall or
similar.
X Make sure that the vehicle load is in the
normal range.
X Switch on the L low-beam headlamps.
If the light of the headlamps is not distributed
as shown in the illustration above, follow the
instructions below:
X Open the hood (Y page 294).
X
Switch off the lights.
Open the tailgate.
X Remove screws :.
X Remove the license plate lamp.
X Replace the bulb.
X Insert the license plate lamp.
X Replace and tighten screws :.
X
Setting the headlamps
: V vertical axis
; H (horizontal) height, measured from the
center
Setting the headlamps correctly is extremely
important. Setting the high-beam headlamps
also sets the low-beam headlamps. (The term
headlamps covers both high and low beam.)
The adjustment screws are located under the
cover.
X Insert a suitable tool into the openings in
the cover. The directions of arrow =
and ? indicate the angle at which the tool
needs to be inserted in order to reach the
adjustment screws.
X Turn both screws uniformly until the
vertical setting corresponds to :. Turn the
screws clockwise to adjust the headlamp
upwards and counterclockwise to adjust it
downwards.
Gradation:
RScrew at arrow =: 0.67˚ angle of
inclination
RScrew at arrow ?: 0.50˚ angle of
inclination
The left and right headlamp need to be
adjusted individually.
i If it is not possible to adjust the
headlamps accurately, have the
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 125
Version: 3.0.3.5
Windshield wipers
adjustment performed at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
125
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
Windshield wipers
Important safety notes
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windows will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield/rear
window can scratch the glass if wiping
takes place when the windshield/rear
window is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
Combination switch
1 $ Windshield wipers off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low12
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high13
4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B í Single wipe/ î To wipe the
windshield using washer fluid
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
Turn the combination switch to the
corresponding position.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
inadvertently. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically
according to the intensity of the rain. In
the Å position, the rain sensor is more
sensitive than in the Ä position, causing
the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when you
stop the vehicle and open a front door. This
12 Rain
13 Rain
sensor set to low sensitivity.
sensor set to high sensitivity.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
G Warning!
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Windshield wipers
126
prevents a person from being splashed
inadvertently when getting into or out of the
vehicle.
Intermittent wiping continues when all doors
are closed and
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission to
drive position D or reverse gear R
or
Ryou change the wipe setting on the
combination switch.
i To prevent smearing on the windshield or
Lights and windshield wipers
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 126
Version: 3.0.3.5
noise when wiping, wipe the windshield
occasionally with washer fluid.
Switching the rear window wiper on/
off
Combination switch
: è Switch
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X
Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Turn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G Warning
For safety reasons, switch off the windshield
wipers and remove the key from the ignition
lock before changing the wiper blades
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that
the on-board electronics are in state 0).
Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched
on suddenly and cause injury.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield can be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades replaced by a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing the windshield wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 127
Version: 3.0.3.5
Windshield wipers
127
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
replacing the wiper blade.
Removing the wiper blade
Press both release clips ;.
Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
X
Installing the wiper blades
X
Position the new wiper blade : with
recess B on lug A.
X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
G Warning
The wiper arm could be set in motion and
injure you if the windscreen wipers are
switched on.
X
Remove the key from the ignition lock.
Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it is released.
X Remove wiper blade ;.
X
Installing the wiper blade
X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
Problems with the windshield wipers
The windshield wipers are obstructed
Leaves or snow, for example, may be
obstructing the windshield wiper movement.
The wiper motor has been deactivated.
Z
Lights and windshield wipers
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Windshield wipers
128
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the
key from the ignition lock.
or
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
Lights and windshield wipers
The windshield wipers are not working
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the
combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 128
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 129
Version: 3.0.3.5
129
Vehicle equipment ............................
Overview of climate control systems ...................................................
Operating the control systems ........
Setting the air vents .........................
130
130
136
142
Climate control
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
130
Overview of climate control systems
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notes
Climate control
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 130
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 86).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
this reason, you should always observe the
interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Service Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise, the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Dual-zone automatic climate control/multizone automatic climate control14 controls the
temperature and the humidity of the vehicle
interior and filters out undesirable
substances from the air.
Dual-zone automatic climate control/multizone automatic climate control14 is only
operational when the engine is running15.
Optimum operation is only achieved when
you drive with the side windows and tilt/
sliding sunroof closed.
14 For
15 The
Canada only.
"residual heat" function can only be switched on/off when the ignition is switched off.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 131
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overview of climate control systems
131
Control panel for the dual-zone automatic climate control
i Notes/tips
: Sets the temperature, left
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
; Sets climate control to
automatic
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
= Defrosts the windshield
Only use the "defrosting" function briefly until the
windshield is clear again.
? Increases the airflow
A Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents
B Switches cooling with air
dehumidification on/off
Switches the residual heat
function on/off
C Sets the temperature, right
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or
ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is
switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
D Switches rear-compartment
climate control on/off
E Directs the airflow through the
center and side air vents
F Directs the airflow to the
footwells and side air vents
G Displays the airflow level
H Reduces the airflow
Z
Climate control
Function
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
132
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 132
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overview of climate control systems
Function
i Notes/tips
I Switches the rear window
heating on/off
J Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode
Only use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there
are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The
windows could otherwise fog up as, in airrecirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the
vehicle.
K Interior temperature sensor
Climate control
L Switches climate control on/
off
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
Control panel for the multi-zone automatic climate control
For USA only
Function
i Notes/tips
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
; Sets climate control to
automatic
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 133
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overview of climate control systems
Function
= Defrosts the windshield
133
i Notes/tips
Only use the "defrosting" function briefly until the
windshield is clear again.
? Increases the airflow
A Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents
Switches the residual heat
function on/off
C Sets the temperature, right
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or
ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is
switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
D Switches rear-compartment
climate control on/off
E Directs the airflow through the
center and side air vents
F Directs the airflow to the
footwells and side air vents
G Displays the airflow level
H Reduces the airflow
I Switches the rear window
heating on/off
J Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode
Only use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, e.g. if there
are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The
windows could otherwise fog up as, in airrecirculation mode, no fresh air is drawn into the
vehicle.
K Interior temperature sensor
L Switches climate control on/
off
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
Rear control panel
M Increases the airflow
Z
Climate control
B Switches cooling with air
dehumidification on/off
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
134
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 134
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overview of climate control systems
Function
N Sets the temperature
i Notes/tips
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
O Sets the rear-compartment
climate control to automatic
P Directs the airflow through the
rear air vents
Q Directs the airflow through the
footwell vents
R Switches rear-compartment
climate control on/off
Climate control
S Reduces the airflow
For Canada only
Function
i Notes/tips
Front control panel
: Sets the temperature, left
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
; Sets climate control to
automatic
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
= Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents, left
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 135
Version: 3.0.3.5
Overview of climate control systems
Function
? Defrosts the windshield
135
i Notes/tips
Only use the "defrosting" function briefly until the
windshield is clear again.
A Increases the airflow
B Switches the rear window
heating on/off
C Directs the airflow through the
defroster vents, right
E Sets the temperature, right
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
F Switches climate control on/
off
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
G Directs the airflow to the
footwells and side air vents,
right
H Directs the airflow through the
center and side air vents, right
I Switches cooling with air
dehumidification on/off
Switches the residual heat
function on/off
Activate climate control using the à and Á
buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and Á
buttons light up.
Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or
ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is
switched off. The "residual heat" function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
J Display
K Reduces the airflow
L Activates/deactivates airrecirculation mode
M Directs the airflow through the
center and side air vents, left
N Directs the airflow to the
footwells and side air vents,
left
Z
Climate control
D Operates the rearcompartment climate control
via the front control panel
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
136
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 136
Version: 3.0.3.5
Operating the control systems
Function
i Notes/tips
O Interior temperature sensor
P Switches the MONO function
on/off
Use the MONO function if you want to adopt the
temperature, air distribution and airflow settings
from the driver's side for all climate control zones.
The indicator lamp in the º button lights up.
Rear control panel
Q Increases the airflow
R Sets the temperature
Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
Climate control
S Sets the rear-compartment
climate control to automatic
T Directs the airflow through the
rear air vents
U Directs the airflow through the
footwell vents
V Switches rear-compartment
climate control on/off
W Reduces the airflow
Operating the control systems
Switching the control on/off
Important information
G Warning!
When the climate control system is
deactivated, the outside air supply and
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and
endangering you and others.
i Activate climate control primarily using
the à button (Y page 138).
Activating/deactivating the front
climate control using the front control
panel
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings come
into effect again.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 137
Version: 3.0.3.5
Operating the control systems
Activating/deactivating the rearcompartment climate control using the
front control panel (dual-zone
automatic climate control)
Activating/deactivating the rearcompartment climate control using the
rear control panel (multi-zone
automatic climate control)
X
X
Activating/deactivating the rearcompartment climate control using the
front control panel (multi-zone
automatic climate control)
For USA only:
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X To activate/deactivate: press the ±
button (Y page 132).
The indicator lamp in the ± button lights
up or goes out.
For Canada only:
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X To activate: press the Y button
(Y page 132).
ON and MODE are shown in the multi-zone
automatic climate control display behind
the Y symbol. The MODE display goes
out after three seconds. The display
switches back to the standard display.
X To deactivate: press the Y button
(Y page 132).
MODE is shown in the display behind the
Y symbol.
X Press the ^ button (Y page 132).
OFF is shown in the display behind the
Y symbol.
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Activate multi-zone automatic climate
control with the front control panel.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up.
X To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Switching cooling with air
dehumidification on/off
Important information
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
G Warning
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when automatic climate control is
in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign
that there is a malfunction.
i The cooling with air dehumidification
function uses refrigerant R134a. This
coolant does not contain
chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does
not damage the ozone layer.
Z
Climate control
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X To activate/deactivate: press the ±
button (Y page 131).
The indicator lamp in the ± button lights
up or goes out.
137
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Operating the control systems
138
Activating/deactivating
! If the cooling with air dehumidification
does not switch on, it is possible that the
climate control system has lost coolant.
Have the cooling with air dehumidification
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
To switch on: press the Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Á button lights
up.
X To switch off: press the Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Á button goes
out. The cooling with air dehumidification
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Climate control
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 138
Version: 3.0.3.5
Problems with the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function
If the indicator lamp in the Á button does
not go out when switched off, the cooling with
air dehumidification function is switched off
due to a malfunction. You can no longer
activate the cooling with air dehumidification
function.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
G Warning
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution.
Automatic mode will achieve optimal
operation if cooling with air dehumidification
is also activated. If desired, cooling with air
dehumidification can be deactivated.
Controlling the front climate control
using the front control panel
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
X To deactivate: press the K or I
button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic airflow is deactivated and
the airflow is controlled according to the
level set. Automatic air distribution
remains activated.
or
X Press the Z, M, ¯, \, P,
c or O button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution is
deactivated. Air distribution is controlled
according to the position set. Automatic
airflow remains activated.
Controlling the rear-compartment
climate control automatically using the
rear control panel
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Activate multi-zone automatic climate
control using the front control panel.
X Set the desired temperature.
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
X To deactivate: press the K or I
button.
Automatic airflow is deactivated and the
airflow is controlled according to the level
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 139
Version: 3.0.3.5
Operating the control systems
set. Automatic air distribution remains
activated.
or
X
Press one of the M or O buttons.
Automatic air distribution is deactivated.
Air distribution is controlled according to
the position set. Automatic airflow remains
activated.
139
front control panel: turn the SmartKey in
the ignition lock to position 2.
X Turn thumbwheels : and C16/E17
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
For USA only:
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and
C clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 131).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Multi-zone automatic climate control
To increase/reduce the rearcompartment temperature using the
front control panel: turn the SmartKey in
the ignition lock to position 2.
X Press the ± button.
X Turn control C clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
For Canada only:
X
To increase/reduce the rearcompartment temperature using the
front control panel: turn the SmartKey in
the ignition lock to position 2.
X Press the Y button.
The display changes to rear-compartment
climate control.
X Turn control E clockwise or counterclockwise (Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
i To return to the standard display, press
the Y button.
i The rear display changes to the standard
Climate zones of multi-zone automatic climate
control
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
well as for the rear compartment.
X To increase/reduce the frontcompartment temperature using the
16 USA
display automatically after three seconds.
To increase/reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the rear
control panel: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 2.
X Turn thumbwheel N16/R17 clockwise or
counter-clockwise (Y page 132).
Only change the temperature setting in
small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
X
only.
only.
17 Canada
Z
Climate control
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Operating the control systems
140
Setting the air distribution
Multi-zone automatic climate control: you can
set the air distribution individually for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.18
Front control unit:
Climate control
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 140
Version: 3.0.3.5
Z directs the airflow through the
defroster vents
M directs the airflow through the
defroster vents
¯ directs the airflow through the
defroster vents
c directs the airflow through the footwell
and side air vents
O directs the airflow through the footwell
and side air vents
\ directs the airflow through the center
and side air vents
P directs the airflow through the center
and side air vents
Rear control panel:
M directs the airflow through the rearcompartment air vents
O directs the airflow through the footwell
air vents
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press the Z, M, ¯, c, O,
\ or P button.
finished, the airflow is adjusted back to the
previous setting.
Switching the MONO function on/off
Only multi-zone automatic climate control
features the "MONO" function.19
You can use the MONO function to adopt the
settings configured for temperature, air
distribution and airflow on the driver's side for
the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment.
X Press the º button.
The indicator lamp in the º button lights
up or goes out.
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
i You should only select the defrosting
function until the windshield is clear again.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To activate: press the ¦ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¦ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rcooling
with air dehumidification on
airflow20
Rhigh temperature20
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
Setting the airflow
Rhigh
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To increase/reduce: press the K or
I button.
Vehicles with Voice Control System: when
voice control is started, the airflow is
restricted to 50%. After voice control is
18 Canada
only.
only.
20 Depending on the outside temperature.
19 Canada
X
To deactivate: press the ¦ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
out. The previously selected settings come
into effect again. The cooling with air
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 141
Version: 3.0.3.5
Operating the control systems
dehumidification function remains on. Airrecirculation mode remains deactivated.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
or
X
Press the à button.
or
X
Turn the temperature control clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
or
X
Press the K or I button.
141
The rear window heating has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the window is clear as it only switches
off automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window heating may switch off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press the ª button.
The indicator lamp in the ª button lights
up or goes out.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the "cooling with air
dehumidification" function Á.
X Activate automatic mode Ã.
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the defrosting function (Y page 140).
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Switch on the windshield wipers.
X Press the P/\21 or O/c21
air distribution button.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Rear window heating
Activating/deactivating
G Warning
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
21 Canada
If the indicator lamp in the ª rear window
heating button flashes, the on-board voltage
is too low or the roof is open. The rear window
heating has deactivated itself prematurely or
cannot be activated.
X Switch off any consumers that are not
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
lighting.
When the battery is sufficiently charged,
the rear window heating is activated again
automatically.
Activating/deactivating airrecirculation mode
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the
vehicle will then be recirculated.
The operation of the air-recirculation mode is
the same for all control panels.
G Warning
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning is activated, or press the ¬
button.
only.
Z
Climate control
Problems with the rear window heating
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Setting the air vents
142
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X To activate: press the d button.
The indicator lamp in the d button lights
up.
i Air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
temperatures. When air-recirculation mode
is activated automatically, the indicator
lamp in the d button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about 30
minutes.
X
Climate control
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 142
Version: 3.0.3.5
To deactivate: press the d button.
The indicator lamp in the d button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode switches off
automatically:
Rafter
approximately five minutes if
outside temperatures are under about
41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if
cooling with air dehumidification is
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes if outside
temperatures are over about
41 ‡ (5 †)
i The air-recirculation mode does not
switch off automatically if outside
temperatures exceed 79 ‡ (26 †). After
about 30 minutes, outside air will be
added.22
Switching the residual heat on/off
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the
stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after
the engine has been switched off. The heating
time depends on the temperature that has
been set.
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
22 Vehicles
with multi-zone automatic climate control.
i If you activate the "residual heat" function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock or remove it.
X To switch on: press the Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Á button lights
up.
X
To switch off: press the Á button.
The indicator lamp in the Á button goes
out.
i Residual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rafter
about 30 minutes
the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
Rwhen
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G Warning
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
could cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 143
Version: 3.0.3.5
Setting the air vents
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep
the air inlet grille on the hood free of
blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves
Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet
grilles in the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
the sliders of the air vents to the center
position.
X
143
To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the
left or right.
i Side window defroster vent : is never
completely shut, even if side air vent ; is
shut.
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
Climate control
Setting the center air vents
: Rear-compartment air vent, left
: Center air vent, left
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
; Center air vent, right
= Rear control panel23
= Center vent thumbwheel, right
When the climate control panel is switched
on/off, the air supply through the rearcompartment air vents is also switched on/
off.
? Center vent thumbwheel, left
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? to the right or left.
Setting the side air vents
23 Vehicles
with multi-zone automatic climate control.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Setting the air vents
144
Center vents in the rear compartment (3rd row of
seats)
: Rear-compartment air vent, left
Climate control
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel,
right
? Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel,
left
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
or ? up or down.
Setting the rear-compartment side air
vents
: B-pillar air vent
; B-pillar air vent
= Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent, rear
? Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent, front
X
To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
or ? up or down.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 144
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 145
Version: 3.0.3.5
145
Vehicle equipment ............................
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Driving ...............................................
Automatic transmission ...................
Refueling ............................................
Parking ...............................................
Driving tips ........................................
Driving systems ................................
Off-road driving systems ..................
Towing a trailer .................................
146
146
146
152
159
165
167
179
202
209
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
146
Driving
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 146
Version: 3.0.3.5
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the happier you will be with its
performance in the future.
RDrive
at varying vehicle speeds and engine
speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
for this reason.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this
period, e.g. driving at full throttle.
RChange gear in good time, at the latest
when the tachometer needle is ⅔ of the
way to the red area in the tachometer
display.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance
(kickdown).
ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when
driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and bring the
vehicle up to full speed.
i Also, observe these breaking-in notes
when the vehicle's engine, front-axle
transmission or differential have been
replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed
restrictions.
Driving
Important safety notes
G Warning
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals' range of movement.
Keep the driver's footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
G Warning
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control.
G Warning
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of parking position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 147
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving
147
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
g To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3 To start the engine
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. The indicator lamps of the low-beam
headlamps, high-beam headlamps or the turn
signal lamps only light up if the low-beam
headlamps, high-beam headlamps or turn
signal lamps are switched on. If an indicator
lamp does not light up when the ignition is
switched on, check it and replace it if
necessary. If an indicator lamp does not go
out after the engine is started or if it lights up
while the vehicle is in motion, see
(Y page 254).
X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is
switched off.
The battery may otherwise discharge.
If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition
lock, the vehicle battery may not be charged
sufficiently.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge if
necessary (Y page 323).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 325).
i The SmartKey can be turned in the
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a SmartKey with an integrated KEYLESS-GO
function and a detachable Start/Stop button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in succession corresponds to the different
key positions in the ignition lock. This is only
the case if you are not depressing the brake
pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then you can insert the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop
button from the ignition lock when you
leave the vehicle. However, you should
always take the SmartKey with you when
leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be
started with the Start/Stop button and the
electrical equipment can be operated while
the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
: Start/Stop button
; Ignition lock
X
Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
lock ;.
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
Z
Driving and parking
KEYLESS-GO
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving
148
i When you insert Start/Stop button :
into ignition lock ;, the system requires a
detection time of two seconds before you
can use Start/Stop button :.
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 148
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Do not press the brake pedal.
switched on, check it and replace it if
necessary. If an indicator lamp does not go
out after the engine is started or if it lights up
while the vehicle is in motion, see
(Y page 254).
Starting the engine
Important safety instructions
G Warning
Start/Stop button
= USA only
? Canada only
X
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
You can now activate the windshield
wipers, for example.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
i If you then open the driver's door when in
X
this position, the power supply is
deactivated.
X
Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
button : twice.
i If you press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position and the driver's door
is open, the power supply is deactivated
again.
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up. The indicator lamps of the low-beam
headlamps, high-beam headlamps or the turn
signal lamps only light up if the low-beam
headlamps, high-beam headlamps or turn
signal lamps are switched on. If an indicator
lamp does not light up when the ignition is
when starting the engine.
Automatic transmission
Shift the transmission to position P.
i The transmission position display in the
multifunction display shows P.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
X
To start a gasoline engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock
(Y page 147) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X When the % preglow indicator lamp
goes out, turn the SmartKey to position 3
(Y page 147) and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
i You can start the engine without preglow
if the engine is warm.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
G Warning!
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 149
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving
149
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of parking position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
G Warning
i It is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
the parking lock released. If you do not
depress the brake pedal, you can move the
DIRECT SELECT selector lever but the
parking lock remains engaged.
i The Start/Stop button can be used to
start the vehicle without inserting the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. The
SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
X
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
instead of with KEYLESS-GO, remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X To start a gasoline engine: press the
Start/Stop button (Y page 147) once.
The engine starts.
X To start a diesel engine: press the Start/
Stop button (Y page 147) once.
Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
i If the engine is warm, the preglow time is
shortened.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X Wait until the gear change is completed
before pulling away.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 166).
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
! If a warning tone sounds and the
Release Park. Brake message appears
in the instrument cluster, the parking brake
is still applied. Release the parking brake.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic
locking feature (Y page 224).
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving
150
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Driving and parking
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G Warning
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
start assist. After approximately one second,
hill start assist will no longer brake your
vehicle and it could roll away.
X
Take your foot off the brake pedal.
i Once you have taken your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around
one second.
X
Pull away.
Hill start assist will not function if:
Ryou
are pulling away on a level road or a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 150
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 151
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving
151
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
RThere
is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
the next attempt to start with the SmartKey.
X Before the next starting attempt with KEYLESS-GO: shut all open
vehicle doors so that the signals from the SmartKey may be
better received.
or
X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition.
X Use the SmartKey to start the engine, (Y page 148) as external
radio signals cause KEYLESS-GO to malfunction. Avoid
excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as
these will drain the battery.
RThere
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too
weak or discharged.
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 325).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving and parking
152
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 152
Version: 3.0.3.5
Automatic transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Vehicles with a
gasoline engine:
The engine is not
running smoothly and
is misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant
temperature gauge
shows a value above
248 ‡(120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 297). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Important safety notes
Overview of transmission positions
G Warning
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of parking position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
P
R
N
D
Park position with parking lock
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
in the transmission position display
(Y page 153) in the multifunction display.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 153
Version: 3.0.3.5
Automatic transmission
Engaging park position P
Rif
X
Rswitch
i Vehicles with a production date as of 18
January 2010: if you open the driver's door
when the vehicle is stationary or if the
speed is very low, the automatic
transmission shifts to park position P
automatically.
! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
applied, release the parking brake.
off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO:
Rmake
sure the ignition is switched on.
the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
Rshift to park position P.
Rrelease the brake pedal.
Rremove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Rswitch on the ignition.
Rdepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
Rshift to neutral N.
Rrelease the brake pedal.
Rif applied, release the parking brake.
Rswitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Rwhen
Shifting to transmission position D
Shifting to neutral N
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
When the engine is switched off, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Transmission position display
The current transmission position is shown in
the multifunction display.
Remaining in neutral N
If you wish to keep the automatic
transmission in neutral N, e.g. to wash the
vehicle in a car wash with a towing device,
observe the following:
Using the SmartKey:
: Transmission position
Rmake
i The arrows in the transmission position
sure the ignition is switched on.
the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
Rshift to neutral N.
Rrelease the brake pedal.
Rwhen
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
Z
Driving and parking
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of the arrow P.
153
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
154
Automatic transmission
! If the transmission position display in the
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 154
Version: 3.0.3.5
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Select transmission position D.
Do not restrict the shift range.
A
Transmission positions
B
C
Park position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P unless the vehicle is
stationary. The parking lock should
not be used as a brake when
parking. In addition to engaging the
parking lock, you must always
apply the parking brake to secure
the vehicle.
In the event of a fault in the vehicle
electronics, the transmission can
be locked in position P.
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Reverse
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. The transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Driving in neutral N can
damage the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
Gearshifting
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position D. This automatic
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Ra
shift range restriction, if selected
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Rthe
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 155
Version: 3.0.3.5
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
155
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Kickdown
X
Vehicles for USA: fully depress the
accelerator pedal.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Vehicles for Canada: depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free by repeatedly
shifting back and forth between transmission
positions D and R can help to free a vehicle
that has become stuck in mud or snow. The
engine management system of the vehicle
limits shifting back and forth between
transmission positions D and R to a maximum
speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and
forth between transmission positions D and
R, move the selector lever up and down
beyond the pressure point.
Working on the vehicle
G Warning
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise
the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
You can restrict or derestrict the shift range
by using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
Shift ranges
Introduction
When the automatic transmission is in
position D, it is possible to restrict or
derestrict the shift range (Y page 155).
The shift range selected is shown in the
multifunction display. The automatic
transmission shifts only as far as the selected
gear.
Driving situations
=
You can use the engine's braking
effect.
5
To use the braking effect of the
engine on downhill gradients and
for driving:
Ron
steep mountain roads
mountainous terrain
Rin arduous conditions
Trailer towing
Rin
X
When towing a trailer and driving downhill,
shift to a lower gear if the automatic
transmission constantly shifts between
two gears.
X Engaging a lower gear and reducing the
speed reduces the risk of the engine
overheating.
4
To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and on long downhill
stretches
Z
Driving and parking
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Automatic transmission
156
Restricting the shift range
Driving and parking
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The shift range is restricted.
i In order to prevent the engine from
overrevving, the automatic transmission
does not shift down when the engine speed
is too high.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
range is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission
shifts up in order to prevent the engine
from overrevving, even if the shift range is
restricted.
Derestricting the shift range
X
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The shift range is derestricted.
Clearing the shift range restriction
X
Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter until D is shown again in the
multifunction display.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D.
Selecting the ideal shift range
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter and hold it in position.
The automatic transmission shifts to the
gear which allows ideal acceleration and
deceleration. To do this, the automatic
transmission shifts down one or more
gears.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 156
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 157
Version: 3.0.3.5
Automatic transmission
157
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Transfer case
The vehicle has permanent 4-wheel drive
(4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to
both axles.
! Performance tests may only be carried
out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
system or transfer case could otherwise be
damaged. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for a performance
test. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
! If the parking brake is being tested on a
brake dynamometer, the ignition must be
switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop
button in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will
otherwise automatically intervene. The test
must last a maximum of 10 seconds. The
brake system could otherwise be damaged.
Driving and parking
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.
is deteriorating.
It is only possible to shift into 2nd gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no
X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into 2nd gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Use the LOW RANGE off-road gear:
Rwhen
driving off-road
fording
Rwhen towing on uphill or downhill gradients
When LOW RANGE is engaged, the engine’s
performance characteristics and the
gearshifting characteristics of the automatic
transmission are adapted for this purpose. In
addition, ABS, ESP® and 4ETS specially
adapted to off-road driving will be activated.
Information about driving off-road
(Y page 173).
Information about driving safety systems in
connection with LOW RANGE (Y page 65).
Rwhen
LOW RANGE off-road gear
The LOW RANGE off-road gear is only
available in vehicles with the Off-Road Pro
Engineering package.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
158
Automatic transmission
Shift ranges
There are two shift ranges.
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 158
Version: 3.0.3.5
HIGH
RANGE
On-road position for all
normal driving situations
(LOW RANGE off-road gear
off).
LOW
RANGE
In comparison with the
HIGH RANGE on-road
position, the gear ratio
between the engine and
wheels is one-third. Drive
torque is thus
proportionately higher.
Selecting LOW RANGE off-road gear
G Warning!
Always wait until the procedure of shifting
from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and from
LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE – has been
entirely completed. During this procedure do
not turn off the engine or shift the automatic
transmission into another gear.
If you do not wait until the shifting procedure
has been entirely completed then it might not
be correctly performed. The transfer case
might be in neutral, thus interrupting the
transfer of power between the engine and the
drive axle.
The vehicle is then freely movable, even if a
gear has been selected, and could
unintentionally be set into motion –
particularly on up – or downhill grades. This
could lead to an accident and cause injury to
yourself and others.
Please observe related messages appearing
in the multifunction display.
Shifting to LOW RANGE off-road gear
(from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE)
! Only carry out the gear change process if:
Rthe
engine is running
Rthe automatic transmission is in position
N
Ryou
are driving no faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h)
i After switching off the ignition, HIGH
RANGE will not be automatically
reactivated.
X
Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the control system recognizes that
all the conditions are fulfilled, HIGH RANGE
will shift to LOW RANGE. A tone sounds and
LOW RANGE indicator = appears in the
multifunction display.
Once the shifting process has been
completed, indicator lamp ; lights up.
i While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you
can cancel the shifting process by pressing
LOW RANGE button : again.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 159
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
Shifting out of LOW RANGE off-road gear
(from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE)
! Only carry out the gear change process if:
Rthe
engine is running
Rthe automatic transmission is in position
N
Ryou
are driving no faster than 43 mph
(70 km/h)
i After switching off the ignition, HIGH
RANGE will not be automatically
reactivated.
X
Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
When the control system recognizes that
all the conditions are fulfilled, LOW RANGE
will shift to HIGH RANGE. A tone sounds
and indicator lamp ; and LOW RANGE
indicator = in the multifunction display go
out.
i While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you
can cancel the shifting process by pressing
LOW RANGE button : again.
For information about messages in the
multifunction display, see (Y page 245).
Refueling
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
and poisonous. They burn violently and can
cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
159
G Warning
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline
to spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
G Warning!
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
vehicles with a gasoline engine. Even small
amounts of the wrong fuel result in damage
to the fuel system and engine.
! Do not start the engine if you accidentally
refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the
fuel could enter the fuel lines. This would
require draining of the fuel tank and fuel
lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! You should only refuel with unleaded
premium-grade gasoline as this avoids
damaging the catalytic converter.
If engine running problems are apparent,
have the cause checked immediately and
repaired. Excess unburned fuel can
otherwise enter the catalytic converter,
leading to overheating and possibly
causing a fire.
i Only refuel with unleaded premium-grade
gasoline with a specified minimum octane
number of 91 (average value of 96 RON/
86 MON).
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving and parking
160
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 160
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
the label on the gasoline pump, ask the gas
station staff.
You can find further information under
"Fuel" (Y page 366), by consulting an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Diesel
Fuel grade
! Only refuel with ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM). Using other diesel fuels could
result in increased wear and damage to the
engine and/or exhaust system.
Never refuel with marine diesel or heating
oil.
Do not mix these fuels with diesel fuels and
do not use any special additives, as this
may result in damage.
Diesel fuel with improved cold flow properties
is available during the winter months. Further
information on fuel properties can be
obtained from oil companies, e.g. at filling
stations.
Refueling
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESSGO.
The position of the fuel filler flap is to the rear
on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap
is displayed in the instrument cluster 8.
The arrow next to the filling pump indicates
the side of the vehicle.
! When refueling using a fuel can, use a
filter or use a clean cloth as a filter.
Otherwise, particles from the fuel can may
block the fuel lines and/or the diesel
injection system.
i Refuel only with ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
MAXIMUM).
Usually you will find information about the
fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find
the label on the gasoline pump, ask the gas
station staff.
You can find further information under
"Fuel" (Y page 366), by consulting an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or by
visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Low outside temperatures
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with
a diesel engine. Never mix diesel with
gasoline or kerosene, as this may result in
damage to the engine or fuel system.
: To open the fuel filler flap
; To insert the fuel filler cap
= Fuel type
? Tire pressure table
Opening
X
Switch off the engine.
i When the engine is running and the fuel
filler flap is open, the yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp and the ! (USA only)
or ; (Canada only) engine diagnostics
warning lamp may light up.
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
see (Y page 259).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 161
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
KEYLESS-GO: the driver's door is open.
This returns the ignition to position 0,
which corresponds to the SmartKey being
removed. The driver's door can be closed
again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
X
Open the tailgate.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel
(Y page 123).
X
Pull emergency release : in the direction
of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
Closing
X
Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it
clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly
engages.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents
the fuel filler flap from closing after the
vehicle has been locked.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
Emergency fuel filler flap release
G Warning!
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
filler flap.
The emergency release is located behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment.
Z
Driving and parking
X
161
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
162
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 162
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Driving and parking
Problem
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel filler flap
cannot be opened.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of explosion or fire
The fuel line or fuel tank is defective.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 147) in the ignition lock
immediately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap is not released.
or
The SmartKey batteries are discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 75).
X Open the tailgate.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 161).
The fuel filler flap is released, but the opening mechanism is
jammed.
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 161).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel tank in a diesel There is air in the fuel system.
engine vehicle has
X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel.
been run completely
X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds. Turn the SmartKey
dry and the engine will
to position 2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
not start.
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for approximately 10 seconds. Turn
the SmartKey to position 2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 163
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
Important notes on use
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment24 must
be operated with AdBlue® reducing agent in
order to function properly. Adding AdBlue® is
one of the tasks performed during
maintenance. Under normal operating
conditions, a tank of AdBlue® lasts until the
next service due date.
When the AdBlue® supply has almost run out,
the Check Additive – See Operator's
Manual message is shown in the
multifunction display.
When the AdBlue® supply sinks to a minimum
level, the Remaining Starts: 20 message
is shown in the multifunction display.
i When the Remaining Starts: 20
message is shown in the multifunction
display, you can start the engine 20 more
times. If AdBlue® is not topped up, it is then
not possible to start the engine again. Top
up the AdBlue® tank with approximately
1 gallon (3.8 l) of AdBlue® or have the
AdBlue® tank refilled at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Use the special AdBlue® refill bottle when
adding between maintenance intervals. For
more information, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Roadside Assistance if applicable
(Y page 20).
Further information about BlueTEC exhaust
gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
24 Only
Adding AdBlue®
G Warning!
Make sure
RAdBlue®
does not come into contact with
skin, eyes, or clothing
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children
If you and/or others have come into contact
with AdBlue®:
AdBlue® has gotten into contact with
eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately
and seek medical help.
RClean affected skin immediately with plenty
of water.
RIf
AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Consult a physician.
RIf
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes.
! Only use AdBlue® that complies with
ISO 22241. Do not add any special
additives to AdBlue® and do not thin
AdBlue® with water. This could destroy the
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with AdBlue® immediately with
water or remove AdBlue® using a damp
cloth and cold water. If the AdBlue® has
already crystallized, use a sponge and cold
water to clean it. AdBlue® residues
crystallize after time and contaminate the
affected surfaces.
on BlueTEC vehicles.
Z
Driving and parking
AdBlue®
163
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 164
Version: 3.0.3.5
Refueling
164
! AdBlue® is not a additive and must not be
Driving and parking
added to the diesel tank. If AdBlue® is
added to the diesel tank this could damage
the engine.
i If you are adding between maintenance
intervals, add approximately 1 gallon (3.8 l)
of AdBlue® to the AdBlue® tank. 1 gallon
(3.8 l) of AdBlue® is approximately
2 AdBlue® refill bottles.
Further information about
AdBlue®(Y page 367).
The AdBlue® filler neck is under the luggage
compartment floor.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the tailgate.
X Lift the luggage compartment floor
(Y page 310).
X
Unscrew the covering cap from AdBlue®
refill bottle =.
X
Place AdBlue® refill bottle = on the filler
neck as shown and screw on clockwise
hand-tight.
! Only screw on the AdBlue® refill bottle
hand-tight. It could otherwise be damaged.
X
Press AdBlue® refill bottle = down.
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up
to one minute.
i If the AdBlue® refill bottle is no longer
pressed down, the filling process stops and
the partially emptied bottle can be
removed.
X
X
X
Turn AdBlue® cap : anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Turn AdBlue® filler cap ; anti-clockwise
and open it.
Filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strap.
Release AdBlue® refill bottle =.
Turn AdBlue® refill bottle = anti-clockwise
and remove it.
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ; on the filler
neck and turn it clockwise.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 165
Version: 3.0.3.5
Parking
Insert AdBlue® cap : as shown and turn
it clockwise as far as it will go.
X Fold the load compartment floor down.
X Close the tailgate.
X Drive at a speed above 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Check Additive – See
Operator's Manual disappears after
approximately one minute.
i If the Check Additive – See
Operator's Manual is still displayed in
the multifunction display, top up with
another bottle of AdBlue®.
i Then, have the AdBlue® supply checked
and filled completely if necessary.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
a qualified specialist workshop such as an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose.
Parking
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Vehicle movement may result in serious
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep
right foot on the brake pedal.
the parking brake.
RShift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
RSlowly release the brake pedal.
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
REngage
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESSGO start/stop button.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Switching off the engine
Important safety instructions
G Warning
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the engine
not running, there is no power assistance for
the brake and steering systems. In this case,
it is important to keep in mind that a
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
i If you cannot turn off the engine as
described here, see "Emergency engine
shut down" (Y page 331).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
Using the SmartKey
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
i If you turn off the engine with the
SmartKey and then remove it from the
ignition lock or open a front door, the
automatic transmission switches to P
automatically.
Z
Driving and parking
X
165
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Parking
166
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 166
Version: 3.0.3.5
Using KEYLESS-GO
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 147).
When the driver's door is closed, the Start/
Stop button is in position 1. When the
driver's door is opened, the Start/Stop
button moves to position 0. This
corresponds to removing the SmartKey.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
i If you turn off the engine with the Start/
Stop button and open a front door, the
automatic transmission switches to P
automatically.
i The engine can be turned off while the
vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
If you have started the engine with the Start/
Stop button and it cannot be switched off as
described:
X
remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock.
X insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The engine stops. The ignition lock is in
position 0.
Parking brake
G Warning
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle's
brake lights do not light up when the parking
brake is engaged.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of park position
P, either of which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
X
To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
X To release: depress the brake pedal and
keep it depressed.
X Pull release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
in the instrument cluster.
Parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
than four weeks, the battery may be damaged
by exhaustive discharge.
X Disconnect the battery or connect it to a
trickle charger.
i You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer
than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer
damage as a result of lack of use.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 167
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety instructions
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be his/her
primary focus when driving. For your safety
and the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
before placing or taking a telephone call.
telephone25
If you choose to use the
while
driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the telephone when road, weather
and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND25 (Cockpit
Management and Data System) if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself
and others.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
To save fuel, observe the following notes:
X
Keep tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.
X Remove unnecessary cargo.
X Remove the roof carrier when not in use.
X Remove the basic carrier bars when not in
use.
X Maintain a low engine speed until the
engine is warm.
Avoid frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
X Have all maintenance work performed at
the service intervals specified in the
Service Booklet or indicated by the service
interval indicator.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.
Drinking and driving
G Warning
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Pedals
G Warning
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals' range of movement.
Keep the driver's footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
pedals still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
all legal requirements.
Z
Driving and parking
X
Driving tips
25 Observe
167
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
168
Driving tips
Coasting with the engine switched off
G Warning!
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 168
Version: 3.0.3.5
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the brake when the engine is not running.
Steering and braking requires significantly
more effort and you could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
in motion.
Exhaust check
G Warning
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work optimally if they are
maintained exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, all work on the engine must be carried
out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed in
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Service Booklet.
Engine oil
! Vehicles with a diesel particle filter:
If the vehicle is mostly driven for short
distances, it is possible that malfunctions
may occur during the automatic cleaning of
the diesel particle filter. This can lead to
engine damage. Therefore, if you frequently
drive short distances, make sure to drive
on highways or country roads for 20
minutes at least every 500 km.
Brakes
Important safety notes
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of control loss.
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the Off-road
ABS.
G Warning
Make sure that you do not endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the cargo on the brakes by shifting
to a lower gear in good time. This allows
you to take advantage of engine braking
and helps you to avoid overheating the
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine
braking, a drive wheel may not turn for
some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface.
This could cause damage to the drive train.
Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 169
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
Heavy and light loads
G Warning
Depressing the brake pedal constantly results
in excessive and premature wear to the brake
pads.
It may also cause the brakes to overheat,
seriously impairing their effectiveness. It may
then not be possible to stop the vehicle in
sufficient time to avoid an accident.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
cargo, do not stop the vehicle immediately,
but drive on for a short while. This allows the
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
G Warning
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water
deep enough to wet brake components, the
first braking action may be somewhat
reduced. You have to depress the brake pedal
more firmly. Maintain a safe distance from
vehicles in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
attention to the traffic conditions. This will
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
more quickly and protecting them against
corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt
treated roads
G Warning
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the
braking effect, resulting in a significantly
longer braking distance, which could lead to
an accident.
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally brake carefully, without
putting other road users at risk, when you
are driving on salted roads. This helps to
remove any salt that may have started to
build up on the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular care.
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are removed
from the brake discs.
Maintenance of the brakes
! If the brake warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster and you hear a warning
tone, even though the parking brake has
been released, the brake fluid level may be
too low. Observe additional warning
messages in the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked
immediately. This work should be carried
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
G Warning
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
braking is substantially impaired. This could
result in an accident.
! A function or performance test may only
be carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.
If you are planning to have the vehicle
tested on such a dynamometer, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to
obtain further information first. Otherwise,
the drive train or the brake system may
suffer damage.
Z
169
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
170
Driving tips
! As the ESP® system operates
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 170
Version: 3.0.3.5
automatically, the engine and the ignition
must be switched off (SmartKey in position
0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop
button in position 0 or 1) while the parking
brake is being tested on a brake
dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP® may seriously damage the brake
system.
If your brake system is only subjected to
moderate loads, you should regularly test
your brake system's function by forcefully
depressing the brake pedal when driving at
high speed. This also improves the brake
pads' friction.
G Warning
Make sure that you do not endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 66).
Parking brake
If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt could get into
the parking brake.
In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction
in the braking power of the parking brake,
observe the following:
Rgently depress the parking brake from time
to time before beginning the journey.
Rdrive approximately 110 yd (100 m)
without exceeding a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
G Warning!
While performing this procedure please
assure that the vehicle is stopped before
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
light up when the parking brake is engaged.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when you engage the parking brake.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou
drive at low speeds
tires have adequate tread depth
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning can occur
you must drive in the following manner:
Rthe
RLower
your speed
ruts
RBrake carefully
RAvoid
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
can cause engine damage.
i Set the raised vehicle level before driving
through standing water.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 171
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
Off-road fording
171
! Under no circumstances should you
RDrive
slowly and at an even speed through
the water.
RDo not stop.
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors
while fording. Otherwise, water could get
into the vehicle interior and damage the
vehicle's electronics and interior
equipment.
: Fording depth
Fording
depth
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC
package
Raised level
20 in.
(50 cm)
Vehicles with the Off-Road
Pro engineering package
Off-road level 3
20 in.
(50 cm)
Off-road level 2
20 in.
(50 cm)
Off-road level 1
REstablish
23.6 in.
(60 cm)
how deep the water is and the
characteristics of the body of water before
fording.
RSelect the highest possible vehicle level.
RSelect the off-road drive program
(Y page 204) or the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157).
RSelect the off-road drive program
(Y page 204).
RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2.
RAvoid high engine speeds.
REnter and exit the water at a flat place and
at a steady walking pace.
RWater
offers a high degree of resistance,
and the ground is slippery and in some
cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
dangerous to pull away in the water.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
you drive.
RClean any mud from the tire tread after
fording.
RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.
Winter driving
Important safety notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, at the onset of
winter.
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 173).
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective
cover. The measuring function of the
Onboard Diagnosis System may otherwise
provide inaccurate values. Some of these
values are required by law and must
therefore always be accurate.
Winter tires
Use winter tires at temperatures below
45 ‡ (7 †) and on snow or ice-covered roads.
Only winter tires also bearing the i
Z
Driving and parking
accelerate before entering the water. The
bow wave could cause water to enter and
damage the engine and other assemblies.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving tips
172
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 172
Version: 3.0.3.5
snowflake symbol next to the M+S marking
provide the best-possible grip in wintry road
conditions. Only these tires will allow the ABS
and ESP® driving systems to function
optimally in winter, as these tires have been
designed specifically for driving on snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics.
G Warning
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 1/6
inch (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
installed.
Once you have installed the winter tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 339).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 341).
G Warning
If you use your spare wheel when M+S tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
well impair turning stability and that overall
driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with an M+S tire at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use snow chains
which have been specially approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
corresponding standard of quality.
! Vehicles with the Adaptive Damping
System (ADS): do not drive in ADS SPORT
mode if snow chains have been mounted.
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
! There is not enough space for snow
chains on some wheel sizes. Observe the
information under "Tires and wheels" in the
"Technical Data" section to avoid damage
to the vehicle or the wheels.
ROnly
use snow chains when driving on an
area completely covered by snow. Do not
exceed the maximum permissible speed of
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove the snow
chains as soon as possible when you are no
longer driving on snow-covered roads.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Applicable regulations must
be observed if you wish to mount snow
chains.
RSnow chains must not be mounted on
emergency spare wheels.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
Ryou
may not attach snow chains to all
wheel-tire combinations; see the "Tires and
wheels" section in the "Technical data"
chapter.
Rmount snow chains only in pairs and only
on the rear wheels. Observe the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted on the front
wheels, the snow chains could grind
against the bodywork or components of the
chassis. This could result in damage to the
vehicle or the tires.
! Vehicles with steel wheels
If you wish to mount snow chains to steel
wheels, make sure that you remove the
respective wheels' hubcaps first. The
hubcaps may otherwise be damaged.
i You may wish to deactivate
ESP®(Y page 66) when pulling away with
snow chains installed. This way you can
allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
manner, achieving an increased driving
force (cutting action).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 173
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
Slippery road surfaces
G Warning
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
not facing the wind.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of control loss.
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the Off-road
ABS.
You should drive particularly carefully on
slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden
acceleration, steering and braking
maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
i For more information on driving with
snow chains, see (Y page 172).
173
G Warning
Make sure that you do not endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Driving off-road
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Grains of sand, particles of dirt and other
abrasive materials can enter the brake
system. This can lead to excessive wear and
unpredictable braking efficiency.
After the brakes have been exposed to dirty
conditions, have them checked and cleaned
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Otherwise, there is a risk that braking power
may be insufficient in the event of an
emergency, or that the braking effect may be
unpredictable.
G Warning!
Do not load items on the crossbars. It may
cause instability during some maneuvers
which could result in an accident.
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected
obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle
cannot complete the attempted climb, back it
down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so
the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you use
only the service brake. For information on
driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
174
Driving tips
G Warning!
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 174
Version: 3.0.3.5
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
level is as low as possible. With higher ride
height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
situations.
G Warning!
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
General information
Read this section before driving your vehicle
off-road. Practice by traveling over more
gentle off-road terrain first.
Familiarize yourself with the characteristics
of your vehicle and the gear change process
before driving through difficult terrain.
The following driving systems are specially
adapted to off-road driving:
Roff-road
drive program (vehicles without
the Off-Road Pro engineering package)
(Y page 204)
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 157)
Roff-road ABS (Y page 66)
Roff-road 4ETS (Y page 67)
Roff-road ESP®(Y page 68)
Rhill start assist
Rdifferential locks (Y page 207)
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
(Y page 203)
Observe the following notes:
Rstop
your vehicle and, if necessary, select
the off-road drive program (Y page 204) or
the LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 157) before driving off-road.
Rselect a vehicle level that is suitable for the
terrain. Make sure there is always sufficient
ground clearance to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
Ractivate the differential lock if necessary.
Rmake sure that items of luggage and cargo
are stowed safely and are well secured
(Y page 268).
Ralways keep the engine running and in gear
when driving on a downhill gradient.
Activate DSR (Y page 203).
Ralways keep the doors, tailgate, windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof closed while the
vehicle is in motion.
Radapt the speed to suit the terrain
conditions. The more uneven, worn or
steeper the terrain is, the slower you should
drive.
Rdrive slowly and at an even speed through
the water. Ensure that a bow wave does not
form as you drive.
Rdrive with extreme care on unfamiliar offroad routes where visibility is poor. For
safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first
and survey the off-road route.
Rlook out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,
tree stumps and furrows.
Rcheck the depth of water before fording
rivers and streams.
Rdo not stop in water and do not switch the
engine off.
Rdrive quickly on sand to overcome the
rolling resistance. Otherwise, the vehicle
could dig itself into the sand.
Rdo not jump with the vehicle. This
interrupts the vehicle's traction.
Ralways keep the engine running and in gear
when driving on slopes.
Rdo not shift the automatic transmission to
transmission position N.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 175
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
Check list before driving off-road
X
Engine oil level: check the engine oil and
top it up if necessary.
The oil supply can only be guaranteed on
steep slopes if the engine oil level is
sufficient.
! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in motion, stop the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.
Check the engine oil level. The engine oil
warning lamp warning must not be ignored.
Continuing the journey while the symbol is
displayed could lead to engine damage.
X
Wheel-changing tool kit: check that the
jack is working and make sure you have the
wheelbrace, a robust tow cable and a
folding spade in the vehicle.
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread
depth and tire pressure. A table with the
recommended tire pressures can be found
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your
vehicle.
X Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects, e.g. small stones, from the
wheels/tires.
X Replace any missing valve caps.
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X Wheels: dented or deformed wheels could
result in a loss of tire pressure and damage
the tire bead. Therefore, check the wheels
before driving off-road and replace them if
necessary.
Check list after driving off-road
G Warning
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle appears
175
unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Driving over rough terrain places greater
demands on your vehicle than driving on
normal roads. After driving off-road, check
the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident
to yourself and other road users.
X Deactivate the off-road drive program
(Y page 204) or the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157).
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 203).
X Set the differential lock setting to AUTO on
the selector wheel (Y page 207).
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level
suitable to the road conditions, e.g. to the
highway/high-speed level.
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and
check for damage.
X Clean the front and rear license plates.
X Clean the wheels/tires, wheel arch and the
underbody with a water jet. Check for
damage and remove any foreign objects.
X After the trip, examine without fail the
entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,
bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
exhaust system for damage.
X Check whether twigs or other parts of
plants have become trapped. These
increase the risk of fire and can damage
fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber
bellows of the axle joints and propeller
shafts.
X After driving for extended periods across
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels,
brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
and cleaned.
X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
travel, check for foreign objects in the
wheels and drive train and remove them if
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
176
Driving tips
necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
balance and cause vibrations.
X Test the brakes.
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 176
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving on sand
G Warning!
Rdrive
slowly.
ruts are too deep, drive with the
wheels on one side on the middle section
of turf if possible.
Rwhere
Crossing obstacles
Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
Observe the following rules when driving on
sand:
Rselect
a higher vehicle level.
high engine speeds.
Rselect a shift range appropriate to the
terrain.
Rdrive quickly to overcome the rolling
resistance. Otherwise, the vehicle could dig
itself into the sand.
Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if
possible. Make sure that the ruts are not
too deep, that the sand is firm enough and
that your vehicle has sufficient ground
clearance.
Ravoid
Tire ruts and gravel roads
Observe the following rules when driving
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with
loose gravel:
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged
or bottom out and get stuck.
Rselect
the off-road drive program
(Y page 204) or the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157).
Rselect a higher vehicle level.
Ravoid high engine speeds.
Rselect shift range 1.
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask
passengers for guidance when driving over
large obstacles. The passenger should
always keep a safe distance from the
vehicle when doing so in order to avoid
injury as a result of unexpected vehicle
movements. After driving off-road or over
obstacles, check the vehicle for possible
damage, especially to the underbody and
the components of the chassis.
Observe the following rules when driving over
tree stumps, large stones and other
obstacles:
Rselect the off-road drive program
(Y page 204) or the LOW RANGE off-road
gear (Y page 157).
Ravoid high engine speeds.
Rselect shift range 1.
Rdrive very slowly.
Rdrive straight over the center of obstacles:
front wheel first, then rear wheel.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 177
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
177
Driving in mountainous terrain
Driving and parking
Approach/departure angle
: Approach/departure angle, front
; Approach/departure angle, rear
Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package
:
;
Raised level
31°
26°
Highway level
26°
21°
Vehicles with Advanced
Off-Road package
:
;
Off-road level 3
32°
27°
Off-road level 2
31°
26°
Off-road level 1
28°
23°
Highway level
26°
21°
RComply
with the rules for off-road driving.
not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines or gradients, but instead follow the direct line
of fall. The maximum gradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is 100%, which corresponds
to an approach/departure angle of 45°. Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability
depends on the off-road conditions.
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, select shift range 1.
RDrive slowly.
RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at a suitable engine speed (maximum 3000 rpm).
RUse the braking power of the engine when driving down a slope. Observe the engine speed,
do not overrev the engine.
RCheck the brakes after driving off-road for a long time.
RDo
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
178
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 178
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving tips
G Warning!
Driving and parking
Never turn the vehicle around on steep inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the vehicle cannot
complete the attempted climb, back it down in reverse gear.
i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away on a hill.
For more information, see "Hill start assist" (Y page 150).
Maximum gradient climbing ability
Driving downhill
On good road surfaces, the maximum
gradient climbing capability of your vehicle is
100%, which corresponds to an approach/
departure angle of 45°. Note that the
vehicle's gradient-climbing capability
depends on the off-road conditions.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep
terrain.
RDrive
i If the load on the front axle is reduced
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope,
the front wheels have a tendency to spin.
4ETS recognizes this and brakes the
wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque
is increased and it is easier to pull away.
i Vehicles with an Advanced Off-road
package have a differential lock for the
transfer case and a differential lock for the
rear axle to improve vehicle traction.
Hilltops
When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator
immediately before reaching the brow of the
hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to
travel over the brow.
This style of driving prevents:
Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
brow of a hill
of traction
Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down
the other side
Rloss
slowly.
not drive at an angle down steep
inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
with the front wheels aligned straight.
Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,
tip and rollover.
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,
select shift range 1.
RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
gently. When doing so, make sure that the
vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
of fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
after a long downhill stretch.
RDo
i The special off-road ABS setting enables
the front wheels to be locked accurately,
briefly and repeatedly, causing them to dig
into the loose ground. Note that when the
front wheels are fully braked, they slide
easily over the ground surface and
therefore steering is impaired.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. The
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Service24h" section of the Service
Booklet.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 179
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine, which relieves the load
on the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
G Warning
When cruise control brakes, the brake pedal
is pulled back (i.e. operated automatically).
The area around the pedal must not be
blocked by obstacles:
RDo
not place any objects in the footwell.
REnsure that floormats and carpets are fixed
securely. In particular, do not place several
floormats on top of one another.
RDo not place your foot under the brake
pedal, as it could become trapped.
Non-compliance could lead you to cause an
accident in which you and/or others could be
seriously injured.
i Cruise control should not be activated
during off-road driving.
Cruise control lever
G Warning
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle's speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
spin and loss of control.
RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
in fog.
The "Resume" function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
179
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
= To deactivate cruise control
? To store the current speed or to call up
the last stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the status indicator of the
multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles
only: e.g. ¯90 Km/h
RCanada
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving systems
180
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 180
Version: 3.0.3.5
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last speed stored
Setting a speed
G Warning
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
X
Press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ; for a lower speed.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
the desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For
example, if you accelerate briefly to
overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
G Warning
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
Setting in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
X
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ; for a lower speed.
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced.
Setting in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
beyond the pressure point, up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 181
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
forwards =.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou
depress the parking brake.
are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
control Off message in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
Ryou
i The last speed stored is cleared when you
switch off the engine.
DISTRONIC
Important safety notes
DISTRONIC regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the
distance to the vehicle detected in front. It
brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed.
On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a
trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3
in good time. By doing so, you will make use
of the braking effect of the engine, which
relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake and
maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in
front.
181
G Warning!
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly
recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
G Warning
When DISTRONIC brakes, the brake pedal is
pulled back (i.e. operated automatically). The
area around the pedal must not be blocked by
obstacles:
Rdo
not place any objects in the footwell.
Rensure that floormats and carpets are fixed
securely. In particular, do not place several
floormats on top of one another.
Rdo not place your foot under the brake
pedal, as it could become trapped.
Non-compliance could lead you to cause an
accident in which you and/or others could be
seriously injured.
G Warning!
The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
speed adjustment reduction capability is
intended to make cruise control more
effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.
It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
replace the need for extreme care.
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
stopping distance, always remains with the
driver.
The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
conditions into account. Complex driving
situations are not always fully recognized by
the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
missing distance warnings.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
operates in the same way as cruise control in
the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If there
is a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC operates in
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
182
Driving systems
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC while driving on roads
with steep gradients.
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 182
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning
DISTRONIC distance control is not a
substitute for the driver's active involvement.
It does not react to pedestrians or stationary
objects and cannot detect or predict the
road's course and the movements of the
vehicles in front.
DISTRONIC can only brake using 40% of the
vehicle's maximum possible braking force.
The driver must always pay attention to road,
weather and traffic conditions. He must steer,
brake and drive the vehicle so that he
maintains control over it.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
velocity measurement systems, etc. may
cause DISTRONIC to malfunction.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
conditions into account. Only use the
Distronic if the road, weather and traffic
conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.
G Warning!
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
The Distronic does not function in adverse
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do
not switch it on if:
Rroads
are slippery or covered with snow or
ice. The wheels could lose traction while
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle
could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain
or fog, for example. The distance control
system functionality could be impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the Distronic is
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able
to recognize dangerous situations until it is
too late. This could cause an accident in which
you and/or others could be injured.
G Warning!
The "Resume" function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
Close attention to road and traffic conditions
is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not the Distronic is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Distronic will not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
vehicles.
Switch off the Distronic
Rwhen
changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
the left lane
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
Rin complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, the Distronic will continue
to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
The Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set
distance from moving objects in front of it.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 183
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is forbidden by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device may invalidate the vehicle's general
operating permit.
Cruise control lever
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed
; To store the current speed or a lower
speed
= To deactivate DISTRONIC
? To store the current speed or to call up
the last stored speed
Activating DISTRONIC, storing and
maintaining the current speed
G Warning!
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC
is activated. For this reason, deactivate
DISTRONIC if the vehicle is to be set in motion
by other means (e.g. in a car wash or by
towing).
183
You can activate DISTRONIC in the following
circumstances:
Rif the engine has been started and you have
been driving for up to two minutes
driving, except if you brake
Rif the parking brake is not applied
Rif ESP® is activated
Rif the transmission is in position D
Rwhile
Activating while driving
When driving at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
and is shown in the multifunction display. If
the vehicle in front is not shown in the
multifunction display and is no longer being
detected, because it has changed lanes, for
example, DISTRONIC is deactivated and you
hear a warning tone.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ? or press it up : or down ; to the
pressure point.
DISTRONIC is activated.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
i You can use the cruise control lever to set
the stored speed and the thumbwheel on
the cruise control lever to set the specified
minimum distance (Y page 185).
i If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC Override message
appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will
be driving at the speed you determine by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving and parking
184
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 184
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Driving
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
operates in the same way as cruise control.
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake and
maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in
front.
If DISTRONIC detects a faster-moving vehicle
in front, it increases the driving speed, but
only up to the desired speed you have stored.
G Warning!
If you depress the brake pedal, DISTRONIC is
deactivated. DISTRONIC will then no longer
brake your vehicle. In such cases, control the
distance from vehicles traveling in front with
the brake alone. You could otherwise cause
an accident and thereby injure yourself and
others. The driver remains fully responsible
for the vehicle's distance from other vehicles,
the speed being driven and for braking in good
time.
Stopping
G Warning!
DISTRONIC must never be operated,
activated or deactivated by a passenger or
from outside the vehicle.
If DISTRONIC detects that the vehicle in front
is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is
stationary.
If DISTRONIC is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone.
X To prevent the vehicle from rolling away,
apply the foot brake or parking brake.
Setting a speed
G Warning
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
X
Press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ; for a lower speed.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
the desired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC is
activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed
to the new speed stored.
Setting in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
X
i Depending on the specified minimum
distance, your vehicle will come to a
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the thumbwheel on
the cruise-control lever.
DISTRONIC is deactivated automatically
when stopping:
Ron
flat stretches of road or on downhill
gradients when the vehicle is stationary
Rwhile the vehicle is still moving on uphill
gradients, to prevent the vehicle from
unexpectedly rolling back when
DISTRONIC is deactivated
Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ; for a lower speed.
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced.
Setting in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
beyond the pressure point, up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 185
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
185
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last speed stored
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC is activated and accepts the
current speed if it is activated for the first
time, or adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. This time span
determines the distance that DISTRONIC
should maintain from the vehicle in front,
depending on the road speed. You can see
this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 186).
X
To increase: turn thumbwheel ; towards
=.
DISTRONIC then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
X To decrease: turn thumbwheel ;
towards :.
DISTRONIC then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
i Make sure that you maintain the
minimum distance to the vehicle in front as
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary.
DISTRONIC displays in the
speedometer
G Warning!
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving
recommendations for safe following distance.
When DISTRONIC is activated, one or
two segments in the set speed range light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC.
Z
Driving and parking
G Warning
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
186
Driving systems
If DISTRONIC detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between the speed of the
vehicle in front : and stored speed = light
up.
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 186
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning
DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2(4 m/s2).
This corresponds to approximately 40% of
your vehicle's maximum possible braking
power.
You must apply the brakes yourself to avoid a
collision. DISTRONIC brakes the vehicle to
restore the set distance to the vehicle in front
or to restore the set speed. In this case, the
brake pedal is depressed automatically,
which can be seen by a movement of the
brake pedal.
Always keep the driver's footwell clear,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects in this area may impair pedal
movement and cause the DISTRONIC braking
function to malfunction.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
DISTRONIC displays in the
multifunction display
X
Press the V or U button to select the
DISTRONIC menu (Y page 217).
Display when DISTRONIC is switched off
When DISTRONIC is deactivated, you will see
the following in the multifunction display:
: Vehicle in front, if detected
; Distance indicator, displaying current
distance to the vehicle in front
= Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front, adjustable
? Own vehicle
Display when DISTRONIC is activated
After this time, you will see the following in
the multifunction display while DISTRONIC is
activated:
: DISTRONIC activated
; Stored speed
When activating DISTRONIC and when setting
the speed, stored speed ; appears for
around five seconds.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 187
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
RUSA
only: DTR XXX Miles
only: DTR XXX km/h
RCanada
Deactivating DISTRONIC
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC is then
deactivated.
G Warning!
The Distronic works to maintain the speed
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
previously selected speed.
The Distronic regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
RWhile
There are a number of ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
X
Brake.
i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i DISTRONIC is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC adjusts
the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
DISTRONIC is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou
apply the parking brake.
Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected.
RESP® intervenes or if you deactivate ESP®.
Ryou shift the transmission to P, R or N.
If DISTRONIC is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC
Off message in the multifunction display for
approximately five seconds.
Ra
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means of
steering or braking the vehicle.
Ra
G Warning!
The Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
Z
Driving and parking
After approximately five seconds, current
saved speed ; is displayed in the status
indicator in the multifunction display:
187
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
188
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 188
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle
cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will
be too short.
Driving and parking
Narrow vehicles
The ability of DISTRONIC to detect vehicles
when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC has not yet detected the vehicle
in front on the edge of the road, because of
its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle
in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles traveling
on a different line. The distance to the vehicle
in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lane
DISTRONIC does not brake for obstructions
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals
an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC
will not brake for these.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 189
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Crossing vehicles
discrepancies while still parked. However, for
significant level changes, e.g. after the
vehicle has been stationary for a long period,
the engine must be on. For safety reasons,
the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is
opened, and it continues once the door has
been closed.
G Warning!
DISTRONIC may detect vehicles that are
crossing your lane by mistake. Activating
DISTRONIC at, for example, a traffic light with
crossing traffic, could cause your vehicle to
pull away at the wrong time.
Level control
Important safety guidelines
Level control automatically adapts the vehicle
level to the current operating and driving
situation. This results in reduced fuel
consumption and improved handling.
Vehicles with ADS: when you are driving in
ADS COMF or ADS AUTO(Y page 194), the
vehicle is automatically lowered to highspeed level as the speed increases. As the
vehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raised
back up to highway level. In ADS
SPORT(Y page 194), the vehicle skips
highway level and is lowered directly to highspeed level.
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle
to adjust to the new level as quickly as
possible.
The vehicle level may change visibly if you
park the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. If the temperature drops, the
vehicle level is lower; with an increase in
temperature, the vehicle level rises.
When you unlock the vehicle or open a door,
the vehicle begins to balance the load
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when changing
the vehicle level. You could otherwise trap
yourself or others.
G Warning!
Always select as low a vehicle level as
possible. If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle
center of gravity shifts upwards. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping over.
Adapt your driving style to suit the vehicle
level. ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an
accident if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot
override the laws of physics.
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
select a high vehicle level in good time.
Make sure that there is always sufficient
ground clearance to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
! Remove the key from the ignition before
raising one or more wheels with the
appropriate equipment.
Information on "Off-road driving"; see
(Y page 173).
Vehicles without the extended Off-Road
Pro engineering package
Basic setting
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
lowered depends on the basic setting
selected.
Select:
RRaised
level for off-road driving
RHighway/high-speed level for normal roads
Z
189
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 190
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
190
The individual vehicle levels differ from
highway level as follows:
R+2.3
in (+ 60 mm) in raised level
in (+/–0 mm) in highway level26
R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in high-speed level
Once the raised level has been reached, you
will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
Driving and parking
R+/–0
Raised level
Only select raised level if this is appropriate
for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel
consumption increases and handling may be
affected.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
If you have not previously selected the offroad menu (Y page 220) in the on-board
computer, the message disappears after
about five seconds.
Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being
lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground,
damaging the underbody.
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press button :.
The vehicle rises to raised level.
While the adjustment is taking place, a
message appears in the multifunction
display, e.g.:
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press button :.
The vehicle adjusts to highway level.
While the adjustment is taking place, a
message appears in the multifunction
display, e.g.:
If you press the V, U, & or *
button on the multifunction steering wheel,
the message will disappear.
26 Ground
clearance: 8.5 in (217 mm).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 191
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
If you press the V, U, & or *
button on the multifunction steering wheel,
the message will disappear.
Once highway level has been reached, all
indicator lamps = go out. You will see a
message in the multifunction display, for
example:
The individual vehicle levels differ from
highway level as follows:
R+3.5
in (+ 90 mm) in off-road level 3
in (+ 60 mm) in off-road level 2
R+1.2 in (+ 30 mm) in off-road level 1
R+/–0 in (+/–0 mm) in highway level
R–0.6 in (–15 mm) in high-speed level
R+2.3
Off-road levels
G Warning!
If you have not previously selected the offroad menu (Y page 220) in the on-board
computer, the message disappears after
about five seconds.
The vehicle automatically selects highway
level if you are driving faster than 55 mph
(88 km/h). Depending on the ADS setting,
the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level at
speeds higher than this.
i If you are towing a trailer, the vehicle is
not lowered to high-speed level.
Vehicles with the extended Off-Road
Pro engineering package
Basic settings
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
lowered depends on the basic setting
selected.
Select:
ROff-road
level 3 for freeing the vehicle in
impassable terrain at low speeds only
ROff-road level 2 for driving on normal offroad terrain
ROff-road level 1 for driving on easily
negotiable off-road terrain
RHighway/high-speed level for normal roads
191
Vehicle off-road level 3 is not intended for use
on paved roads. This vehicle level is intended
for clearing impracticable situations at low
speed exclusively. The vehicle has a very high
center of gravity in off-road level 3. This
increases the overturning hazard.
RSelect off-road level 3 exclusively for
clearing impracticable situations at low
speed.
RAdapt your driving style to the modified
conditions.
RDo not exceed a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
RAvoid extreme, quick steering movements.
RKeep in mind the vehicle’s driving
characteristics are modified.
You should therefore drive in off-road level 3
with particular caution as it could otherwise
lead to an accident and/or serious injury to
you or others.
If you are driving too fast in off-road level 3,
the Reduce speed to under 12 mph
(20 Km/h) message appears in the
multifunction display. You also hear a
warning. The vehicle is lowered.
i You cannot clear these messages.
Only select an off-road level when this is
appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise,
fuel consumption increases and handling may
be affected.
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 192
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
192
Driving and parking
Once off-road level 2 has been reached, you
will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
X
Start the engine.
X Turn the selector wheel clockwise :.
The vehicle is raised.
or
X Turn the selector wheel counterclockwise ; .
The vehicle is lowered.
Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road
level flash:
ROff-road
level 1: the lower indicator lamp
flashes
ROff-road level 2: the lower and center
indicator lamps flash
ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps
flash
The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level
selected. As soon as an off-road level is
reached, the corresponding indicator lamp
stops flashing and lights up constantly.
While the adjustment is taking place, a
message appears in the multifunction
display, e.g.:
The vehicle rises from off-road level 1 to offroad level 2.
If you press the V, U, & or *
button on the multifunction steering wheel,
the message will disappear.
Lower and center indicator lamps = are on.
If you have not previously selected the offroad menu (Y page 220) in the on-board
computer, the message disappears after
about five seconds.
The Max. Speed 12 MPH (20 Km/h)
message draws your attention to the
maximum speed permitted for off-road
level 3.
While the adjustment from off-road level 2 to
off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a
message such as the following in the
multifunction display:
Once off-road level 3 has been reached, you
will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
If you drive above 12 mph (20 km/h) in offroad level 3, you will see the following
message in the multifunction display:
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 193
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
193
Off-road level 3 is canceled.
If you then increase the speed again, the
message remains in the multifunction
display. The newly set level is not displayed
until the vehicle has been set to a level
suitable for the current speed.
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will
see a message such as the following in the
display while the vehicle is being lowered:
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.
Once off-road level 2 has been reached, you
will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
If you drive faster than 60 mph (96 km/h), offroad level 1 is canceled. The vehicle is
lowered to highway level.
You will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
Depending on the ADS setting (Y page 194),
the vehicle is lowered to high-speed level at
higher speeds. When you drive at under
25 mph (40 km/h) again, the vehicle is raised
to highway level again.
Highway/high-speed level
! Make sure that there is enough ground
clearance when the vehicle is being
lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground,
damaging the underbody.
If you select an off-road level when driving at
too high a speed, the Level Selection
Not Permitted message appears in the
multifunction display.
You can select from the following:
ROff-road
level 1 up to 60 mph (96 km/h)
level 2 up to 40 mph (64 km/h)
ROff-road level 3 up to 12 mph (20 km/h)
If you drive at speeds over 55 mph
(88 km/h) or for approximately 20 seconds
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph
ROff-road
Z
Driving and parking
(88 km/h), off-road level 2 is canceled. The
vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1.
You will see a message in the multifunction
display, for example:
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving systems
194
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 194
Version: 3.0.3.5
: To raise the level
; To lower the level
= Indicator lamps
X
Start the engine.
If one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X
Turn the selector wheel
counterclockwise ; until all indicator
lamps = that are lit start to flash.
The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As
soon as the next lowest level is reached,
the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes
out.
While the adjustment is taking place, a
message appears in the multifunction
display, e.g.:
If you have not previously selected the offroad menu (Y page 220) in the on-board
computer, the message disappears after
about five seconds.
The vehicle automatically selects highway
level if you are driving faster than 60 mph
(115 km/h). Depending on the ADS setting
(Y page 194), the vehicle is lowered to highspeed level at higher speeds.
i If you are towing a trailer, the vehicle is
not lowered to high-speed level.
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
General notes
ADS is continuously electronically controlled.
It adapts the damping characteristics to the
current operating and driving situation.
Damping is controlled separately for each
wheel. This increases driving safety and tire
comfort.
This depends on:
Ryour
driving style
road surface conditions
Rthe ADS setting
Rthe vehicle level setting
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the key from the ignition lock.
Rthe
If you press the V, U, & or *
button on the multifunction steering wheel,
the message will disappear.
Once highway level has been reached, all
indicator lamps = go out. You will see a
message in the multifunction display, for
example:
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 195
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
195
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
Vehicles without the extended Off-Road Pro
engineering package
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch
Rshift
N.
on the ignition.
the transmission to position D, R or
Rrelease
Vehicles with the extended Off-Road Pro
engineering package
You can choose between the following ADS
settings:
the parking brake.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
RAUTO
for normal driving situations;
indicator lamps ; and = are off.
RSPORT for sporty driving; indicator
lamp ; is on. In comparison to AUTO or
COMF, the vehicle is 0.6 in (15 mm) lower.
RCOMF for a more comfortable ride;
indicator lamp = is on.
X
X
Start the engine.
Press button : repeatedly until the
desired setting is selected.
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
G Warning!
The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.
It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
Range of the sensors
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
slush; otherwise they may not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 303).
Z
Driving and parking
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always remains with the driver.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
196
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 196
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Minimum distance
Center
Approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
Approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, all
warning displays light up and a warning tone
sounds. If the distance falls below the
minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Side view
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is in the
roof lamp in the rear compartment.
Top view
Front sensors
Center
Approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
Approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
Approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
Approx. 32 in (80 cm)
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes
or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Warning display for the front area
: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position
determines which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 197
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Transmission
position
Warning display
D
Front area activated
R or N
Rear and front areas
activated
P
No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Rsixth
segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Vehicles with Advanced Off-Road-Package
: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
Towing a trailer
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow
hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC
measures the minimum detection range to
an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball
coupling.
! Vehicles with an exterior spare wheel:
Remove the detachable ball coupling if the
trailer tow hitch is not required.
PARKTRONIC measures the minimum
detection range to an obstacle from the
bumper, not the ball coupling.
Vehicles without Advanced Off-Road-Package
: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
; Indicator lamp
Z
197
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
198
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 198
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Driving and parking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC
X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
warning displays are lit.
specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20 seconds and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC
X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 303).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
approximately 20
ultrasound waves.
seconds.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Rear view camera
Important safety guidelines
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
It shows the area behind your vehicle in the
COMAND APS display.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
The rear view camera is located in the handle
strip of the tailgate.
: Rear view camera
View through the camera
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear-view mirror.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 199
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
G Warning!
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles
Rfrom
a distorted perspective
Rinaccurately
Rmay
not display obstacles at all
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
camera may not show objects which are
Rvery
close to the rear bumper
the rear bumper
Rabove the tailgate handle
You are responsible for safety at all times and
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
Runder
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
light
Rthe immediate surroundings are
illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker)
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
the cold (lens condensation)
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
In this case, have the position and setting
of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you contact a MercedesBenz Center for this purpose.
Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property
including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
Activating the rear view camera
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the "rear view camera"
function is selected in COMAND APS; see
the separate operating instructions for
COMAND APS.
X Engage reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND APS display with guide lines.
Guide lines in the COMAND APS display
G Warning!
Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
you are color-blind or have impaired color
vision.
Only use rear view camera if you can see and
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
rear view camera on the COMAND system
display.
G Warning
Please note that objects that do not touch the
ground may appear to be further away than
they actually are, for example:
Rthe
bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
trailer drawbar
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear end of a truck
Ra slanted post
In such cases, you should not use the guide
lines to judge the distance. You may misjudge
the distance, which increases the risk of
impacting the objects.
Even if the object you approach is directly on
the ground, do not approach the object any
closer than the red guide line.
Rthe
Z
199
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving and parking
200
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 200
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,
strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles
are detected late or not at all.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
and injure yourself and others.
i USA only:
Guide lines ; and = show the approximate
distance from the rear of the vehicle. Yellow
guide line ; indicates a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1 m) and red guide line
= indicates a distance of approximately
10 in (0.25 m). The distance only applies to
objects at ground level. Blue line : depicts
the width required for the vehicle. It is used
to align the vehicle with the edge of the road,
e.g. the curb.
Blind Spot Assist
Important safety guidelines
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It is active at speeds above
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles in the monitored area. If
you then indicate a turn towards that side
before changing lane, you will also receive
visual and audible collision warnings. For this
purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the
rear bumper.
G Warning
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
assist driving. It may fail to detect some
vehicles and is no substitute for attentive
driving.
Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and
traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System." The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be
switched on (Y page 224) and operational.
Monitoring range of the sensors
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to
your vehicle as shown in the diagram.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 201
Version: 3.0.3.5
Driving systems
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles
that approach and drive past at high speeds
are not detected. There is no display and no
warning.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be
possible to monitor the complete width of the
neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
the next lane may not be detected, especially
if they are driving in a staggered formation.
This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
that edge of their lane which is furthest away
from your vehicle.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
and injure yourself and others.
If the lanes are narrow, the system may be
unable to distinguish the neighboring lane
from the one beyond it. For this reason, the
system may indicate vehicles in the farther
lane, especially if the vehicles are driving in a
staggered formation in different lanes. In
particular, this may be the case if the vehicles
are driving at that edge of their lane which is
nearest your vehicle.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings
may be issued unnecessarily
when driving close to crash barriers or
similar solid lane borders.
Rthe warning may be interrupted when
traveling next to long vehicles for extended
periods.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice
or slush around the sensors. For example, the
radar sensors must not be covered by bicycle
racks or overhanging loads. In the event of a
severe impact or damage to the bumpers,
have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
properly.
Information and warning display
Driving and parking
G Warning
201
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
If Blind Spot Assist is switched on, indicator
lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up
yellow up to a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if the
reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind
Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
G Warning
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds under
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are
yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are
then not indicated.
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Off-road driving systems
202
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
and injure yourself and others.
Collision warning
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 202
Version: 3.0.3.5
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn
signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red
warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal
remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There
are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 224) and Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 226) are activated in the on-board
computer.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Warning lamps : light up red in the
exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5
seconds and then turn yellow.
Off-road driving systems
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are
permanently driven. Together with ESP® and
4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle
whenever a drive wheel spins due to
insufficient grip.
G Warning!
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
traction:
RWhile
driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
resulting from excessive speed.
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
Towing a trailer
When you attach a trailer, make sure you have
correctly established the electrical
connection. This can be accomplished by
checking the trailer lighting. In this event,
Blind Spot Assist is deactivated. The indicator
lamp lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors
and the message: Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavailable See
Operator's Manual appears in the
multifunction display.
i The indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors
can be switched off.
To do this, you must deactivate Blind Spot
Assist when:
key is in position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Rthe engine is not running.
Rthe electrical connection to the trailer
has been established.
Rthe
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground
or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
contact with the ground.
i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
chains if necessary.
! When testing the parking brake, operate
the vehicle only briefly (for a maximum of
ten seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.
When doing this, turn the key to position
0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can
cause damage to the drive train or the
brake system.
! Function or performance tests may only
be performed on a 2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate the vehicle on such a
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 203
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
dynamometer, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
beforehand. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system.
Information on "Off-road driving"; see
(Y page 173).
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Important safety guidelines
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving
downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the
speed selected on the on-board computer.
The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater
the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When
driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill
gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or
non-existent.
The speed is set to 4 mph (6 km/h) at the
factory; you can adjust this in the on-board
computer (Y page 226).
G Warning!
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is a
convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The system
setting must be appropriate to the
topographical and weather conditions
encountered, which can change quickly. The
driver is responsible for the vehicle speed and
for safe brake operation at all times.
Depending on the programmed speed, actual
vehicle speed and gradient, switching on DSR
while driving can cause the vehicle to slow
down rapidly, and you may hear a sound,
caused by the activation of the vehicle's brake
system through DSR. Sudden and unexpected
deceleration can result in loss of vehicle
control, causing an accident and/or serious
personal injury to you and others. Do not
switch on DSR in a situation where rapid
deceleration could result in a loss of vehicle
control.
203
R or N position. You can drive at a higher or
a lower speed than that set on the on-board
computer at any time by accelerating or
braking.
G Warning!
If you depress the accelerator pedal with DSR
activated, the vehicle can drive faster than the
programmed set speed. You should therefore
drive downhill with particular caution as it
could lead to an accident and/or serious
injury to you or others. Keep in mind that as
soon as you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal with DSR switched on, DSR
will start regulating the vehicle's speed
including use of brakes if required. Depending
on the programmed set speed, actual vehicle
speed and gradient, DSR can cause the
vehicle to slow down rapidly. Sudden and
unexpected deceleration can result in loss of
vehicle control, causing an accident and/or
serious personal injury to you and others.
Information on "Off-road driving"; see
(Y page 173).
Activating/deactivating DSR
Activating
You can only activate DSR when driving at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h).
Vehicles without the Off-Road Pro engineering
package
DSR controls the set speed when it is active
and the automatic transmission is in the D,
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 204
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
204
Driving and parking
10 mph (Canada: between 4 km/h and
18 km/h) while the vehicle is in motion.
Vehicles with the Off-Road Pro engineering
package
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
X
To increase or reduce the set speed in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments:
briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher set speed
or down ; for a lower set speed.
The set value appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To increase or reduce the set speed in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments:
briefly press the cruise control lever past
the pressure point, up : for a higher set
speed or down ; for a lower set speed.
The set value appears in the multifunction
display.
The DSR symbol and a message such as the
following appear in the multifunction display:
If the vehicle's speed is too high, the DSR
symbol and the Max. Speed 20 mph
(Canada: 30 km/h) message are shown in the
multifunction display.
Deactivating
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The DSR symbol appears in the
multifunction display with the Off
message.
X
DSR switches off automatically when you
drive at speeds over 21 mph (Canada:
35 km/h). The DSR symbol appears in the
multifunction display with the Off message.
You also hear a warning tone.
Changing the set speed while
the vehicle is in motion
When DSR is switched on, you can change the
set speed to a value between 3 mph and
Off-road drive program
i The off-road drive program is only
available on vehicles without the Off-Road
Pro Engineering package.
The off-road drive program assists you when
driving off-road. The engine's performance
characteristics and the gearshifting
characteristics of the automatic transmission
are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
driving are also activated.
Do not use the off-road drive program on
roads that are snowy or icy or if your vehicle
has snow chains mounted.
For information on driving off-road, see
(Y page 173).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 205
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
205
Shift ranges
LOW RANGE
Off-road position for
driving off-road and
fording
The gear ratio between the
engine and wheels is only
approximately one third of
that in the HIGH RANGE
road position. The drive
torque is correspondingly
higher as a result.
Do not use LOW RANGE:
Ron
X
To activate: press off-road button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Off-road
indicator = appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To deactivate: press off-road button :.
Indicator lamp ; and off-road indicator
= go out.
LOW RANGE
General notes
The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in
driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
characteristics and the gearshifting
characteristics of the automatic transmission
are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
driving are also activated.
For information on "Off-road driving", see
(Y page 173). You will find information about
driving safety systems in conjunction with
LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section
(Y page 65).
slippery road
surfaces, e.g. in the case
of slush
Ron snow or ice-covered
roads
Rif you have mounted
snow chains to your
vehicle
G Warning!
Always wait until the procedure of shifting
from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and from
LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE – has been
entirely completed. During this procedure do
not turn off the engine or shift the automatic
transmission into another gear.
If you do not wait until the shifting procedure
has been entirely completed then it might not
be correctly performed. The transfer case
might be in neutral, thus interrupting the
transfer of power between the engine and the
drive axle.
The vehicle is then freely movable, even if a
gear has been selected, and could
unintentionally be set into motion –
particularly on up – or downhill grades. This
could lead to an accident and cause injury to
yourself and others.
Please observe related messages appearing
in the multifunction display.
Z
Driving and parking
HIGH RANGE Road position for all
normal driving situations
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 206
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
206
indicator = in the multifunction display go
out.
Driving and parking
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
Messages in the multifunction display
If a gear change process has not been
successful, the following messages may be
displayed in the multifunction display:
Max. Speed 25 Mph (Canada: 40 Km/h): you
have been driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h). Indicator lamp ; also flashes.
X
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE
! Only carry out the gear change process if:
Rthe
engine is running
transmission is in position N
Ryou are not driving faster than
25 mph (40 km/h)
Rthe
X
Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. LOW RANGE
indicator = appears in the multifunction
display.
When the gear change is complete,
indicator lamp ; lights up.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
! Only carry out the gear change process if:
Rthe
engine is running
Rthe transmission is in position N
Ryou are not driving faster than 43 mph
(70 km/h)
X
Press LOW RANGE button :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes.
If the gear change process has taken place,
indicator lamp ; and LOW RANGE
Drive more slowly to carry out the gear
change process.
Shift briefly into N: the transmission is
in position D and you are driving slower than
25 mph (40 km/h).
X Shift the transmission to N to complete the
gear change process.
Shifting Process Canceled
Reactivate: the shifting process has not
been completed.
X Ensure that all gear change conditions are
fulfilled and carry out the gear change
process again.
Stop vehicle, engage parking brake:
a warning tone is also heard. The gear change
process has not been completed. LOW
RANGE is in the neutral position. There is no
connection between the engine and the drive
wheels.
! Do not drive any further, otherwise you
could damage the vehicle’s drive train.
X
Stop the vehicle. Take into account the
road and traffic conditions when doing this.
X Depress the parking brake.
X Carry out the gear change process again.
If the gear change process has been carried
out, the Stop vehicle, engage
parking brake message disappears.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 207
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
Differential lock
General notes
i Differential locks are available only in
vehicles with the Off-Road Pro engineering
package.
Your vehicle is equipped with the following:
RA
differential lock for the transfer box: this
controls the balance between the front and
rear axles.
RA differential lock for the rear axle: this
controls the balance between the wheels
and the rear axle.
Differential locks improve the vehicle's
traction. 4ETS (Y page 67)controls the
balance between the wheels on the front axle.
Information on "Off-road driving"; see
(Y page 173).
Information about the differential and
differential locks
When the vehicle is driving around a curve,
the wheels on the outside of the curve have
to cover a greater distance and therefore
have to turn faster than the wheels on the
inside. The differential, a transmission in the
drive train, balances these different rotational
speeds out, making cornering possible.
The disadvantage of a differential: the wheels
with the least grip are driven the hardest.
Example: one wheel on a driven axle is on a
snow-covered surface and therefore has no
traction. This wheel has the most driving
force, since the differential distributes most
of the force to the wheel with the least
resistance. The wheel on the opposite side of
this axle, which is on a solid surface and could
therefore enable traction, does not have any
driving force. 4ETS eliminates this
disadvantage and ensures good steerability
by braking the spinning wheel automatically
and thereby directing more force to the wheel
that is on a solid surface and can provide
traction.
ESP® and 4ETS are traction systems that are
ideally suited to road driving and driving on
easily negotiable off-road terrain. The LOW
RANGE off-road gear also improves off-road
capability.
Difficult off-road conditions require additional
measures, such as locking one or more
differentials. Your vehicle has two differential
locks: one (central) differential lock for the
transfer case and one differential lock for the
rear axle. Both differential locks can be
activated using the selector wheel on the
center console. When the (central)
differential for the transfer case is locked, the
speed of the front wheels is the same as the
speed of the rear wheels. When the
differential for the rear axle is locked, both of
the rear wheels turn at the same speed,
independent of their individual torques. Note
that activating the differential locks
significantly reduces the steerability of the
vehicle.
For your safety, the safety of others and to
prevent damage to the vehicle, the
differential locks must not be activated on
paved roads. Note that the differential
function is necessary when driving on paved
roads and that the differentials must never be
locked on paved roads. Otherwise, the
vehicle can no longer be steered. The
differential locks must therefore only be
activated when driving off-road, and then only
if activating the other driving systems (4ETS,
ESP® and LOW RANGE off-road gear) is no
longer sufficient.
Engaging the differential locks
! Drive off slowly when the differential
locks are engaged.
Function or performance tests may only be
performed on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you
wish to operate the vehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
beforehand. You could otherwise damage
the drive train or the brake system.
Z
207
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
208
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 208
Version: 3.0.3.5
Off-road driving systems
! The differential locks must not be
Driving and parking
activated when the vehicle is being towed
or while the wheels are spinning.
Automatic mode
Use automatic mode ; for all driving
situations, including driving off-road or when
fording.
In automatic mode, the differential locks are
engaged and disengaged according to driving
requirements. This guarantees sufficient
traction for most driving situations with
unrestricted vehicle steerability.
X Start the engine.
The differential locks are in automatic
mode. The indicator lamp in selector
wheel : lights up above symbol for
automatic mode ;.
Engaging manually
G Warning!
Never drive on a paved surface with the center
and rear axle differential locks manually
engaged. Ability to steer the vehicle is greatly
reduced when the differential locks are
manually engaged, increasing the risk of an
accident.
For safety reasons, the locks are
automatically released at a vehicle speed
above 31 mph (50 km/h). Nevertheless, you
should only manually lock the differential if
absolutely necessary because engaged locks
will restrict the vehicle drivetrain while
cornering and cause the vehicle to chatter.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident.
Only engage the differential locks manually if
traction in automatic mode is insufficient.
At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), you
can engage the differential locks manually.
X Start the engine.
X Turn selector wheel : to desired position
= or ?.
The indicator lamp in selector wheel :
lights up at the corresponding symbol.
The engaged differential appears in the
multifunction display:
A The differential lock for the transfer case
is locked.
If you have not previously selected the offroad menu (Y page 220) in the on-board
computer, the message disappears after
about five seconds.
The differential locks are not controlled
automatically. The steerability of the vehicle
is restricted considerably. Drive carefully and
accelerate gently for optimum traction.
! If the differential locks are activated
manually, the wheels scuff on the road
when cornering since the rotation
difference between the wheels is no longer
balanced out.
You can switch back to automatic mode at
any time. For safety reasons, the differential
locks disengage automatically at speeds
above 31 mph (50 km/h). If you stop the
vehicle and switch off the ignition for longer
than ten seconds, the differential locks
switch back to automatic mode.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 209
Version: 3.0.3.5
Towing a trailer
Message in the multifunction display
Diff. Lock System Overheated Wait briefly.
The differential lock system has overheated
and briefly disengaged.
X
Continue driving.
The differential locks cool off and are soon
available once again.
Towing a trailer
Notes on towing a trailer
Important safety instructions
G Warning!
Failure to use proper equipment and driving
technique can result in a loss of vehicle
control when towing a trailer.
Improper towing or failure to follow the
instructions in this manual can result in
vehicle damage and/or serious personal
injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully
to assure safe trailer operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
should you require an explanation of
information contained in this manual.
General information
ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on
your vehicle.
Further information on availability and on
installation is available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not
suitable for installing detachable trailer
couplings.
RDo not install hired trailer couplings or
other detachable trailer couplings on the
bumpers of your vehicle.
RTo reduce the risk of damage to the ball
coupling, remove it from the ball coupling
recess when not in use.
209
Coupling up a trailer
G Warning!
While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer,
make sure nobody locks or unlocks the
vehicle and/or opens or closes doors or the
tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
button or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
Observe the maximum permissible trailer
dimensions (width and length).
Most federal states and all Canadian
provinces require by law:
Rsafety
chains between the towing vehicle
and the trailer. The chains should be crosswound under the trailer drawbar. They must
be fastened to the vehicle's trailer
coupling, not to the bumper or the axle.
Allow for enough play in the chains to
facilitate turning tight corners.
Ra separate brake system for certain types
of trailer.
Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Check
the specific legal requirements applicable
to your federal state.
If the trailer detaches from the towing
vehicle, the safety switch applies the
trailer's brakes.
! Do not connect the trailer's brake system
(if featured) to the hydraulic brake system
of the towing vehicle, as the latter is
equipped with an anti-lock brake system.
Doing so will result in a loss of function of
the brake systems of both the vehicle and
the trailer.
i The vehicle's wiring harness features a
line to the brake indicator lamp.
Z
Driving and parking
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Towing a trailer
210
X
Driving and parking
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 210
Version: 3.0.3.5
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is set to position P.
X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X Select highway level.
X Vehicles with the adaptive damping
system: set ADS to AUTO or COMF.
X Switch off the engine.
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish all electrical connections.
i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
with a trailer attached, the vehicle will
always remain at highway level. When
coupling up a trailer, please observe the
following:
Rif highway level has not been set
manually, the vehicle will automatically
sink to highway level as soon as it
reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
Rhigh-speed level is not available.
These restrictions apply to all accessories
powered through a connection to the trailer
power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle
carrier.
Towing a trailer
There are numerous legal requirements
concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed
restrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/
trailer combination complies with the local
requirements not only in your area of
residence but also at any location to which
you are traveling. The police and local
authorities can provide reliable information.
Please observe the following when towing a
trailer:
RTo
acquaint yourself with driving with a
trailer and with the resulting changes to
handling, you should practice cornering,
stopping and reversing in a traffic-free
location.
RBefore driving, check:
- the trailer coupling
- the safety switch for braked trailers
- the safety chains
- the electrical connections
- the lights
- the wheels
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
unobstructed view of the rear section of the
trailer.
RIf the trailer features electronically
controlled brakes, pull away the vehicle/
trailer combination carefully, manually
brake using the brake controller, and check
the brakes for correct function.
RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent
the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is
in motion.
RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check
the cargo for secure fastening and make
sure that the trailer lamps and (if
applicable) the trailer brakes are
functioning correctly.
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
stable when towing a trailer than when
driving without one. Avoid sudden steering
movements.
RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
accelerates more slowly, has a decreased
gradient climbing capability and a longer
braking distance.
It is more susceptible to side winds and
requires more careful steering.
RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress
the brake pedal moderately at first, so that
the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then
increase the pressure on the brake pedal.
RIf the automatic transmission continues to
shift back and forth between two gears
when driving up or downhill, restrict the
shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2, or 1.
A lower gear and lower speed reduce the
risk of engine failure.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 211
Version: 3.0.3.5
Towing a trailer
long and steep gradients that are
difficult to drive down in shift range 1,
switch to the off-road drive program or
engage the LOW GEAR off-road gear.
RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear
to utilize the engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if
installed, the trailer brakes.
RIf the coolant temperature increases
dramatically while the air-conditioning
system is switched on, switch off the airconditioning system.
Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated
by opening the windows and by setting the
blower fan and the interior temperature to
maximum.
RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention
to the extended length of your vehicle/
trailer combination.
Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer
combination, you will have to travel an
additional distance beyond the vehicle you
are overtaking before returning to the
previous lane.
Decoupling a trailer
G Warning!
While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer,
make sure nobody locks or unlocks the
vehicle and/or opens or closes doors or the
tailgate.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result.
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
button or the vehicle level control system
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
X
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is set to position P.
X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X
Close all doors and the tailgate.
X Apply the trailer's parking brake.
G Warning!
As soon as you disconnect the electrical
connection between the trailer and the
vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid
personal injury, make sure no one is near the
wheel housing or underneath the vehicle
before the electrical connection is
disconnected.
When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle is
temporarily raised because the springs are
relieved of load. Be especially careful during
this process, as you could otherwise injure
yourself and/or others. Make sure that any
persons remaining in the vehicle do not press
the switches for vehicle level control or the
ADS.
X
Detach the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the
trailer.
X Switch off the engine.
Permissible trailer load and drawbar
noseweight
Weight specifications
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the
combined weight of the trailer together with
the cargo and equipment loaded on the
trailer. Permissible gross weight: 7500 lb
(3402 kg).
The permissible Trailer drawbar Weight
Rating (TWR) is the maximum weight
permitted on the trailer drawbar: 600 lb
(272 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved
trailer couplings.
Loading a trailer
RWhen
loading a trailer, please note that
neither the permissible gross trailer weight
nor the permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
Z
Driving and parking
ROn
211
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Driving and parking
212
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 212
Version: 3.0.3.5
Towing a trailer
Rating (GVWR) may be exceeded. The
permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is specified on the type plate
located on the B-pillar on the driver's side
of your vehicle.
You can find the maximum permissible
values on the type plates of your vehicle
and the trailer. Always observe the lowest
respective value when determining the
maximum weight with which you can load
the vehicle and the trailer.
RThe drawbar noseweight acting on the ball
coupling has to be added to the rear axle
weight in order to prevent the permissible
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) from
being exceeded. The permissible Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is specified
on the type plate located on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of your vehicle.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the
trailer so that the drawbar noseweight
remains between 8% and 15% of the
permissible gross trailer weight.
i The weight of additional accessories,
passengers, and cargo reduces the
permissible trailer load and drawbar
noseweight for your vehicle.
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight
RTo
check that the weights of the towing
vehicle and the trailer comply with the
maximum permissible values, have the
vehicle/trailer combination (including the
driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully
laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated
weighbridge.
RCheck the permissible axle weight of the
front and rear axle, the Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW), and the drawbar noseweight.
Check the permissible axle weight of the
front and rear axle, the Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW), and the drawbar noseweight.
Trailer power supply
The trailer power socket of your vehicle is
designed for connecting the 7-pin connector
supplied as part of the Mercedes-Benzapproved trailer coupling.
i Depending on your trailer, you may need
an adapter to connect your trailer to the
vehicle.
Further information is available from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 213
Version: 3.0.3.5
213
Vehicle equipment ............................
Important safety notes ....................
Displays and operation ....................
Menus and submenus ......................
Display messages .............................
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................
214
214
214
217
229
254
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
214
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 214
Version: 3.0.3.5
Displays and operation
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Important safety notes
You will find an illustration of the instrument
cluster in the "At a glance" section
(Y page 28).
G Warning
A driver's attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside temperature
Rwarning/indicator lamps
Rmalfunction/warning messages
Rfailure of any systems
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
caution. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner's and/or driver's
responsibility to maintain the vehicle's
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages.
Displays and operation
Tachometer
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
DISTRONIC mode:
One or two segments around the stored
speed light up.
Operating the on-board computer
The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 215
Version: 3.0.3.5
=
Displays and operation
215
V Selects a menu: scrolls back
U and forth
A Switches off the Voice Control
System; see the separate
operating instructions
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
& Press briefly:
* Scrolls back and forth within a
menu
In the Audio menu: selects a
stored station, an audio track
or a video scene
In the Telephone menu:
switches to the phone book
and selects a name or a
telephone number
& Press and hold:
* In the Audio menu: selects
the previous/next station or
selects an audio track using
rapid scrolling
In the Telephone menu:
starts rapid scrolling through
the phone book
Multifunction display
To activate the multifunction display:
Rswitch
on the ignition
on the lights
Ropen the driver's door
Rpress reset button . in the instrument
cluster
Values and settings as well as display
messages are shown in the multifunction
display.
Rswitch
:
Multifunction display
;
~ Makes/accepts or rejects/
6 ends a call
W Selects submenus in the
X Settings menu
Changes values
Adjusts the volume
? Switches on the Voice Control
System; see the separate
operating instructions
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
216
Displays and operation
: Trip odometer
; Total distance recorder
= Gear indicator
? Status line with outside temperature or
speed (Y page 222)
Further information on the gear indicator
(Y page 153).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 216
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 217
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.
Function
:
Standard display menu (Y page 218)
pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 339)
Rtire pressure monitor (USA only) (Y page 341)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 299)
Rtire
;
Audio menu (Y page 219)
=
Navigation menu (Y page 220)
?
Offroad menu (Y page 220)
Rlevel control (Y page 189)
Rcompass display (Y page 291)
Rdifferential locks (status indicator) (Y page 207)
A
DISTRONIC menu (Y page 181)
B
Message memory27 menu (Y page 229)
C
Settings menu (Y page 221)
D
Additional functions menu (Y page 226)
27 The
217
menu is only visible when there is a display message.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Menus and submenus
218
On-board computer and displays
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 218
Version: 3.0.3.5
Function
E
Trip computer menu (Y page 227)
F
Telephone menu (Y page 227)
Standard display menu
Standard display
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the standard display.
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X
Standard display
: Trip odometer
; Odometer
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the standard display.
X Press the & or * button to select the
coolant temperature.
You can select the following functions in the
Standard display menu by pressing & or
*:
Rtire
pressure loss warning system
(Y page 339) (Canada only)
Rtire pressure monitor (Y page 341) (USA
only)
Rcoolant temperature (Y page 218)
Rdigital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 218)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
(Y page 299)
X To reset the trip odometer: press and
hold the . reset button in the instrument
cluster until the trip odometer is reset.
Displaying the coolant temperature
G Warning
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
Under normal driving conditions, with the
correct anti-corrosion and antifreeze additive
concentration, the reading may rise to
248 ‡(120 †).
! If the coolant temperature exceeds
248 ‡(120 †) do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
Displaying the digital speedometer or
outside temperature
If you have selected the digital speedometer
for the status line (Y page 222), the outside
temperature will be displayed here.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 219
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the standard display.
X Press the & or * button to select
digital speedometer or the outside
temperature.
: Waveband28
; Current channel
X
Digital speedometer
To select a stored channel: briefly press
the & or * button.
X To select a channel from the channel
list: press and briefly hold the & or
* button.
X To select a station using the station
search29: press and briefly hold the &
or * button.
Audio player or audio media operation
Outside temperature
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio acts like a
normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
You can only change the waveband and store
new stations using COMAND APS.
X Switch on COMAND APS and select Radio
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Audio menu.
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on COMAND APS and select the
audio player or medium (see the separate
operating instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Audio menu.
CD changer display (example)
: Current CD (for CD/DVD changer)
; Current track
28 When
29 Only
current channel ; has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
if no station list is received.
Z
219
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Menus and submenus
220
On-board computer and displays
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 220
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
To select the next/previous track:
briefly press the & or * button.
X To select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and briefly hold the
& or * button.
Route guidance inactive
The direction of travel appears in the
multifunction display. If the name of the
street is part of the navigation system data,
this will also be displayed.
The current track will not be displayed in
audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode:
external audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
X
Switch on COMAND APS and select video
DVD (see the separate operating
instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Audio menu.
Route guidance active
The multifunction display shows navigation
instructions, for example:
DVD changer display (example)
: Current DVD (for DVD changer)
; Current scene
X
Press the & or * button to select a
scene.
Navigation menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navigation menu, the instructions
from the navigation system appear in the
multifunction display. For more information,
see the separate operating instructions.
X Switch on COMAND APS (see the separate
operating instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Navigation menu.
Off-road menu
Depending on your vehicle's optional
equipment, you can set the following current
settings to be shown in the Off-road menu:
Rlevel control (Y page 189)
Rcompass (Y page 291)
Rdifferential locks (Y page 207)
i Large buildings, power cables or powerful
transmission masts as well as metallic
objects on or in the vehicle may interfere
with the compass display.
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Offroad menu.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 221
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
X
Press the . reset button again.
The settings of most functions are restored
to the factory settings.
or
X
Example display for vehicles with the Off-Road Pro
engineering package
Settings menu
Introduction
The Settings menu allows you to:
RRestoring the factory settings
RChanging the instrument cluster settings
RChanging the time/date settings30
RChanging the lighting settings
RChanging the vehicle settings
RChanging the convenience settings
Resetting to factory settings
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lamps function in the Lighting submenu is
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press and hold the . reset button on the
instrument cluster for approximately three
seconds.
A prompt appears in the multifunction
display asking you to confirm by pressing
the . reset button again.
30 This
If you want to retain the settings, do not
press the . reset button a second time.
After approximately five seconds, the
Settings menu appears again.
X Press V or U to select a different
menu.
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
This function is only available in Canada.
The Display Unit Speedometer/
Odometer function allows you to choose
whether certain displays appear in km/h or
mph.
The selected unit of measurement for
distance applies to:
Rthe
analog speedometer
odometer and the trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Rthe navigation instruction in the
Navigation menu
RDISTRONIC
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press W or X to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press & to select Display Unit
Speedometer/Odometer.
X Press the W or X button to select
Km or Miles as the unit of measurement for
distance.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Rthe
function is not available in vehicles with the navigation module.
Z
221
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
222
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 222
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
Selecting the unit of distance for the
digital speedometer
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press the & button to display Display
Unit Digital speedometer.
X Press the W or X button to select
Km or Miles as the unit of measurement for
distance.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Selecting the language
The Language function allows you to select
the language for the instrument cluster.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press W or X to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press the & button to select Language.
X Press the W or X button to select the
desired language.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Selecting the status line display
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press W or X to select the
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X Press & to select Status Line
Display.
X
Press W or X to select the display in
the status line: speed (Speed) or outside
temperature (Outside Temperature).
The selected display now appears
constantly in the lower multifunction
display. When you scroll through the
Standard display menu (Y page 218), you
will see the display you have not selected.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Time/date
Only vehicles without the navigation module
have this submenu. To set the time and date
on vehicles without the navigation module,
see the separate operating instructions.
In the Time / Date submenu, you can set the
time and date.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Time / Date submenu.
X To set the clock: press & on the
steering wheel to select Clock Set hour
or Clock Set Minute(s).
or
X To set the date: press & to select
Date Set day, Date Set Month or Date
Set Year.
X Press W or X to set a value.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Lighting
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
This function is not available in Canada.
If you have activated the daytime running
lamps function and the light switch is in the
$ or à position, the daytime running
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 223
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
lamps are switched on automatically when
the engine is running.
In the dark, the following also light up:
X
Rthe
Press the W or X button to select the
Lighting submenu.
X Press & to select Surround Lighting
Function.
Rthe
X
low-beam headlamps
parking lamps
Rthe tail lamps
Rthe license plate lamp
Rthe side marker lamps
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Lighting submenu.
X Press & to select Daytime Running
Lamps.
X Press W or X to set daytime running
lamps to On or Off.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Switching the surround lighting on/off
If you activate the surround lighting function
and the light switch is set to Ã, the
following will light up if it is dark and you
unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey:
Rthe parking lamps
Rthe license plate lamp
Rthe tail lamps
Rthe fog lamps31
Rthe low-beam headlamps32
Rthe side marker lamps
The surround lighting switches off
automatically after 40 seconds or when the
driver's door is opened.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
31 Only
32 Only
Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Surround Lighting
function.
X When leaving the vehicle, turn the light
switch to position Ã.
The surround lighting is activated.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Setting the ambient lighting
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Lighting submenu.
X Press the & button to select Ambient
Light.
X Press W or X to adjust the
brightness to any level from Level 0 (off)
to Level 5 (bright).
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Activating/deactivating the exterior
lighting delayed switch-off
When you activate the Headlamp Delayed
Shut-off function and the light switch is set
to Ã, the exterior lighting remains on for
another 15 seconds after closing the doors
when it is dark.
If the engine is switched off and then none of
the doors are opened, or if an open door is
not closed, the exterior lighting goes out after
60 seconds.
If you have activated the delayed switch-off
function, the light switch is set to à and
for vehicles with front fog lamps.
for vehicles without front fog lamps.
Z
223
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Menus and submenus
224
On-board computer and displays
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 224
Version: 3.0.3.5
you switch off the engine, the following
remain lit:
Rthe parking lamps
Rthe license plate lamp
Rthe tail lamps
Rthe fog lamps33
Rthe low-beam headlamps34
Rthe side marker lamps
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Lighting submenu.
X Press the & button to select Headlamp
Delayed Shut-off.
X
Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Headlamp Delayed
Shut-off function.
X Before switching off the engine, turn the
light switch to position Ã.
The exterior lighting delayed shut-off is
activated.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
To deactivate the delayed shut-off
temporarily:
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock and back to position 0.
The delayed shut-off is deactivated.
The delayed shut-off is reactivated the next
time you start the engine.
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off
When you activate the Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off function and remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock, the interior
lighting remains on for 10 seconds.
33 Only
34 Only
for vehicles with front fog lamps.
for vehicles without front fog lamps.
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Lighting submenu.
X Press the & button to select Interior
Lighting Delayed Shut-off.
X Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Interior Lighting
Delayed Shut-off function.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
locking feature
When you activate the Automatic Door
Locking function, your vehicle will be
centrally locked above a speed of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
i Further information on the automatic
locking feature (Y page 79).
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press & to select Automatic Door
Locking.
X Press W or X to switch Automatic
Door Locking on or off.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
If the radar sensor system is switched off,
Blind Spot Assist (Y page 200) is deactivated.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 225
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
i USA only: This device has been approved
by the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”.
The radar sensor is intended for use in an
automotive radar system only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the device will void
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
X Press the & button to select Radar
Sensor (See Operator's Manual).
X Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Radar Sensor (See
Operator's Manual).
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature
You can use the Easy-entry Function to
activate or deactivate the easy-entry/exit
feature (Y page 107).
G Warning
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement do one of
the following:
RMove
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
one of the memory position buttons.
RPress memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver's door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
RPress
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Comfort submenu.
X Press & to select the Easy-entry
Function function.
X Press the W or X to activate or
deactivate the Easy-entry Function
function.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
Further information on belt adjustment
(Y page 56).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Comfort submenu.
X Press the & button to select Belt
Adjustment.
Z
225
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Menus and submenus
226
On-board computer and displays
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 226
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate Belt Adjustment.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Switching the fold in mirrors when
locking function on/off
When you activate the Fold In Mirrors
When Locking function, the exterior mirrors
are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When
you switch on the ignition, the exterior
mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
on the door (Y page 108), they will not fold
out automatically. The exterior mirrors can
then only be folded out using the button on
the door.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings menu.
X Press & to call up the selection of
submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the
Comfort submenu.
X Press & to select Fold In Mirrors
When Locking.
X Press W or X to activate/deactivate
the Fold In Mirrors When Locking
function.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Additional functions menu
Switching the distance warning
function on/off
This function is only available with
DISTRONIC.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Additional functions menu.
X Press the & or * button to select the
Distance Warning function.
X
Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Distance Warning
system.
When the distance warning function
(Y page 69) is activated, the Ä symbol
is shown in the lower multifunction display.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
Further information about Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 200).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Additional functions menu.
X Press the & or * button to select the
Blind Spot Assist function.
X Press W or X to switch the Blind
Spot Assist function on or off.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
Setting DSR
The DSR Speed function allows you to set the
threshold speed (vehicle speed for driving
downhill) of the DSR (Y page 203) to a value
between 3 mph (Canada: 4 km/h) and
10 mph (Canada: 18 km/h). The adjustment
is carried out in increments of 1 mph (Canada:
2 km/h).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Additional functions menu.
X Press the & or * button to select the
DSR Speed function.
X Press the W or X button to set the
desired threshold speed.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 227
Version: 3.0.3.5
Menus and submenus
Trip computer menu
Trip computer "From start" or "From
reset"
The values in the From Start submenu refer
to the start of your journey, while those in the
From Reset submenu refer to the last time
you reset this submenu.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the trip computer menu.
X Press & or * to select From Start
or From Reset.
Trip computer "After start" (example)
: Distance
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
The From Start trip computer is reset
automatically when
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than 4 hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is
automatically reset if the trip exceeds
9999 hours or 99,999 miles.
You can select Km or Miles as the unit of
measurement for distance (Y page 221).
Resetting values
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the trip computer menu.
X Press & or * to select the function
that you wish to reset.
X Press and hold the . reset button on the
instrument cluster until the values have
reverted to "0".
Calling up the range
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the trip computer menu.
X Press & or * to select Range:.
The multifunction display shows the
estimated range of the vehicle, based on
the current driving style and the fuel level.
If there is only a small amount of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank, a vehicle
refueling C appears instead of the
range.
Displaying the current fuel
consumption
X
Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the trip computer menu.
X Press & or * to select
Consumption.
The current fuel consumption is displayed.
Telephone menu
Introduction
You can establish a Bluetooth® wireless
connection to COMAND APS (see the
separate operating instructions).
Z
227
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Menus and submenus
228
On-board computer and displays
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 228
Version: 3.0.3.5
G Warning
A driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the handsfree device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
X
Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND
APS (see the separate operating
instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
RReady or the name of the network provider:
the mobile phone has found a network and
is ready to receive.
RNo Service: No network is available.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the
Telephone menu, a display message appears
in the multifunction display, for example:
X
Press 6 on the steering wheel to accept
an incoming call.
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
still accept a call.
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
still accept a call.
Dialing a number from the phone book
You can enter new telephone numbers into
the phone book via the mobile phone (see the
separate operating instructions). If your
mobile phone is operational, you can select
and dial a number from the phone book at any
time.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone menu.
X Press the & or * button to select the
desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
& or * button for longer than one
second.
X Press 6 to start dialing.
or
X If you do not want to make a call, press the
~ button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Telephone menu.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X Press the & or * button to select the
desired name or number.
X Press 6 to start dialing.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 229
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Hiding display messages
G Warning
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and,
where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
X Press the V, U, & or * button on the steering wheel to select another display.
or
X Press reset button . on the instrument cluster (Y page 28).
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red.
You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows
these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Message memory menu
The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages
in the message memory menu.
The message memory menu is only shown if any display messages have been stored.
X Press the V or U button repeatedly, until either the original menu or the message
memory menu is shown.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 messages.
X Using & or * scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some highpriority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Z
229
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
230
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 230
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages
ESP
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) and therefore also PRESAFE® are temporarily unavailable. The self-diagnosis function
might not be complete, for example. BAS (Brake Assist System)
has also been deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
X Carefully drive a short distance making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h)
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® and therefore also BAS and PRE-SAFE® are not available due
to undervoltage.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the display message is shown during the journey and the ä
warning lamp is flashing, then 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
is deactivated. The brakes on the drive wheels could otherwise
overheat.
X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disappears
and the ä warning lamp goes out.
4ETS is activated again.
ESP
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G Risk of accident
ESP® and therefore also Brake Assist and PRE-SAFE® are not
available due to a malfunction. The d warning lamp also lights
up in the instrument cluster.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 231
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G
USA only: one or more main functions in the mbrace system are
malfunctioning.
Canada only: one or more main functions in the Tele Aid system
are malfunctioning.
X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Canada only: have the Tele Aid system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tele Aid
Inoperative
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
+
Restraint Sys.
Malfunction
Service Required
G Risk of injury
Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G Risk of injury
The restraint systems are malfunctioning.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G Warning
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Z
231
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 232
Version: 3.0.3.5
232
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger
Airbag Enabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey,
although:
Rthere is a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
system's weight threshold is on the front-passenger seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect the additional weight of objects on the
seat or forces acting on the seat.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat.
X If necessary, secure the child in a child restraint system on a
suitable rear seat.
X Make sure that no forces are acting on the seat, such as:
Rtrapped books, bags, etc. lying on, behind or beside the seat
Rhead restraints pressing against the headliner
The system may otherwise detect these forces and interpret the
seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied and has no objects placed
on it, close the front-passenger door, and switch on the ignition.
Observe the 42 indicator lamps (Y page 42) and the
multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 42 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit.
When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has disabled
the front-passenger air bag.
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the
multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds
until the necessary system checks have been completed and to
make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the 42 indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 233
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G Warning
If the 42 indicator lamp remains off even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Z
233
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 234
Version: 3.0.3.5
234
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled
See Operator's
Manual
The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey even
though an adult or a person larger than a certain size is occupying
the front-passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the
seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Set the seat higher (Y page 96).
X Make sure that no objects are exerting force on the seat, e.g.
books, bags, etc. lying under, behind or beside the seat. These
forces may otherwise cause the system to detect too low a
weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as less than it
actually is.
X Make sure that the seat is unoccupied and has no objects placed
on it, close the front-passenger door, and switch on the ignition.
Observe the 42(Y page 42) indicator lamps and the
multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 42 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit.
When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has disabled
the front-passenger air bag.
Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled
See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag
Disabled See Operator's Manual cannot appear in the
multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds
until the necessary system checks have been completed and to
make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
multifunction display.
If these conditions are met, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the 42 indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the
occupant.
If the conditions are not met, the system is not operating correctly.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G Warning
If the 42 indicator lamp remains lit with an adult occupant on the front-passenger
seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the frontpassenger seat until the system has been repaired.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 235
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Brakes
Display messages
ABS
ABS, ESP
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are temporarily
unavailable. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete,
for example.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Carefully drive a short distance making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h)
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
Drive on carefully.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are not available due to
undervoltage. BAS has also been deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
ABS
ABS, ESP
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are not available due to
a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z
235
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
236
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
$
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 236
Version: 3.0.3.5
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
(Canada only)
EBV, ABS, ESP
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution), ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) and therefore also
PRE-SAFE® are not available due to a malfunction. BAS (Brake
Assist) is also deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
#
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
(USA only)
J
Brake Wear
$
(USA only)
!
You are driving with the parking brake engaged. A warning tone
also sounds.
X Release the parking brake.
(Canada only)
Release Parking
Brake
$
(USA only)
J
(Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
G Warning
G Risk of accident
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In
addition, the red warning lamp $(USA only) or J (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 237
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The left or right-hand cornering light is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Cornering Lamp Left
(Y page 120).
or
or
Cornering Lamp
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Right
b
b
Low Beam Left
or
Low Beam Right
b
Trailer Tail Lamp
Left
or
Trailer Tail Lamp
Right
b
Trailer Turn
Signal Left
or
Trailer Turn
Signal Right
b
Trailer Brake Lamp
b
Turn Signal Rear
Left
or
Turn Signal Rear
Right
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand trailer tail light is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The trailer brake lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
237
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 238
Version: 3.0.3.5
238
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Turn Signal Front
Left
or
Turn Signal Front
Right
b
Turn Signal Left
Mirror
or
Turn Signal Right
Mirror
b
3rd Brake Lamp
b
Brake Lamp Left
or
Brake Lamp Right
b
Tail Lamp Left
or
Tail Lamp Right
b
High Beam Left
or
High Beam Right
The turn signal in the left-hand and/or right-hand exterior mirror
is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand brake lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand high beam is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 239
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
License Plate Lamp
Left
or
License Plate Lamp
Right
The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is faulty.
The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is faulty.
Front Foglamp Left
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
or
(Y page 120).
Front Foglamp Right
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
b
Foglamp Rear Left
or
Foglamp Rear Right
b
Parking Lamp Front
Left
or
Parking Lamp Front
Right
b
Reverse Lamp Left
or
Reverse Lamp Right
b
Marker Lamp Front
Left
or
Marker Lamp Front
Right
The left-hand or right-hand rear fog lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The front left or front right standing lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The left or right-hand backup lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The front left or right side marker lamp is faulty.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
239
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 240
Version: 3.0.3.5
240
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
The left or right-hand daytime running light is defective.
X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
(Y page 120).
or
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Daytime Running
Light Left
or
Daytime Running
Light Right
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b
AUTO Light
Inoperative
The active light function is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The light sensor is faulty. The low-beam headlamps are switched
on.
X USA only: switch off daytime driving lights in the on-board
computer (Y page 222).
X
X
b
Switch Off Lights
Switch the lights on and off using the light switch.
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
X Turn the light switch to $ or c.
or
X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press the light switch in to
the stop.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
The coolant level is too low.
X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 297).
X If coolant needs adding more often than usual, have the engine
coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Top Up Coolant See
Operator's Manual
G Warning
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! The coolant level is too low. Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the cooling
system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 241
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the coolant level is
too low must not be ignored.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The coolant is too hot.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g.
by snow, slush or ice.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Coolant Stop car,
switch engine off
The poly-V-belt may have torn.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G Warning
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 ‡(120 †) do not continue driving. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Z
241
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 242
Version: 3.0.3.5
242
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The engine fan is faulty.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next
qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving.
#
The battery is not being charged.
Possible causes are:
Ra
faulty alternator
torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
Ra
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Battery/
Alternator Stop
Vehicle
4
Check engine oil
level at next
refueling
The battery is faulty.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The oil level is too low.
X Check the oil level (Y page 295).
X If necessary, add the engine oil (Y page 296).
X Have the engine checked for leaks if engine oil has to be added
more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop
or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! The oil level is too low. Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. There is a risk of
engine damage.
The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the oil level is too
low must not be ignored.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 243
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
C
There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.
The fuel tank must be filled up to at least the reserve fuel level;
otherwise, engine running may be impaired.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Reserve Fuel
8
Gas Cap Open
8
Ultra Low-sulfur
Diesel Fuel Only
¸
Replace air filter
·
Clean Fuel Filter
Ø
Check Additive See
Operator's Manual
Ø
Remaining Starts:
20
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
cap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the
reserve range.
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is contaminated
and must be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The
water must be drained off.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The AdBlue® tank is empty.
X
Have the AdBlue® tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop (Y page 163).
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The AdBlue® level has fallen to a minimum.
X
Have the AdBlue® tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop (Y page 163).
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
243
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
244
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 244
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
°
You cannot change the vehicle level, because:
Level Selection
Not Permitted
°
Compressor Cooling
Down
°
Malfunction
°
Rising
Max.12 MPH
°
Max.12 MPH
Æ
Being lowered
Max.12 MPH
Ryou
are exceeding the permissible speed for the selected
vehicle level.
Ryou are towing a trailer.
Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack.
X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again
(Y page 194).
X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 209).
You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first
needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.
X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level.
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display message
disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected
level.
Level control is faulty.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display
message informs you of the maximum speed permissible for offroad level 3.
X Do not drive faster than 12 mph(20 km/h).
You are driving in off-road level 3. The display message informs
you of the maximum speed permissible for off-road level 3.
X Do not drive faster than 12 mph(20 km/h).
The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road level
2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed
permissible for off-road level 3.
X Do not driver faster than 12 mph(20 km/h) until off-road level
2 is reached.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 245
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Æ
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
Reduce speed to
under 12 MPH
You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road
level.
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering
movements.
X Take account of the altered handling characteristics.
X Do not driver faster than 12 mph(20 km/h).
8
The differential locks are faulty.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Locking System
Inoperative
Service Required
8
Diff. Lock System
Overheated - Wait
briefly
8
Stop vehicle,
engage parking
brake
Å
Service Required
If parked engage
pk. brake
Å
Max. Speed 25 MPH
Å
Max. Speed 40 MPH
The differential locks are too hot and have been disengaged.
X Drive on carefully.
X Allow the differential locks to cool down.
The differential locks reengage as soon as they have cooled
down.
A gearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the
neutral position. There is no connection between the engine and
the drive wheels.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake. Do not continue driving under any
circumstances.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
The LOW RANGE system is malfunctioning.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X Engage the parking brake to park.
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
X Drive slower.
The gearshift process is carried out.
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.
X Drive slower.
The gearshift process is carried out.
Z
245
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 246
Version: 3.0.3.5
246
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Å
You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic
transmission is not in position N.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Shift briefly into
N
Å
Shifting Process
Canceled
Reactivate
Ã
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
The gearshift process has been canceled.
X Repeat the gearshift process.
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if:
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display message
disappears when:
Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.
Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating
temperature range.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X
X
Clean the sensors (Y page 303).
Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 247
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Cruise Control
--- mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
You wanted to save a speed of less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
save the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 179).
DISTRONIC
--- MPH
An activation condition for DISTRONIC is not fulfilled.
X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
save the speed.
X
Check activation conditions for DISTRONIC (Y page 181).
DISTRONIC
Override
DISTRONIC is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC
Inoperative
DISTRONIC is faulty or the display has failed.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
DISTRONIC is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if:
Rthe
DISTRONIC cover in the radiator grill is dirty.
function is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe radar sensor system has not detected any vehicles or
stationary objects, e.g. traffic signs, for a long time.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
DISTRONIC becomes available again and the display message
disappears when:
Rits
Rthe
dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.
system detects that the sensors are fully available again.
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Clean the DISTRONIC cover in the radiator grill (Y page 303).
X Restart the engine.
Rthe
G Warning
DISTRONIC cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off DISTRONIC or do not turn
it on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The distance
control may be impaired even before the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The DISTRONIC
Z
247
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
248
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 248
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual message will be displayed in the
multifunction display and DISTRONIC will be turned off.
Tires
G Warning
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Display messages
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 350).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 339).
Check tires,
then restart Run
Flat Indicator
A display message for the tire pressure loss warning system was
shown.
X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 339).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for a few
minutes
The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.
X Drive on.
The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
have been driving for a few minutes.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 249
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
The TPMS is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The TPMS is activated automatically after driving for a few
minutes.
Check
Tire(s)
Caution:
Tire Defect
G Risk of accident
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 341).
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 350).
G Risk of accident
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 350).
Tire pressure(s)
Please Correct
The tire pressure is insufficient in at least one of the tires or the
tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
correct the tire pressure (Y page 341).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 343).
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Wheel Sensor
Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
multifunction display.
X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Z
249
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 250
Version: 3.0.3.5
250
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Currently
Unavailable
Due to a source of radio interference no signals can be received
from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The TPMS restarts automatically as soon as the problem has
been solved.
h
Tire Pressure
Caution: Tire
Defect
h
G Risk of accident
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 350).
G Risk of accident
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 350).
X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure
(Y page 341).
h
The tire pressure is insufficient in at least one of the tires or the
tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
correct the tire pressure (Y page 341).
Please correct the
tire pressures
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to P or N
to start engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
X
Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Depress brake
to shift out of P
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X Depress the brake pedal.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 251
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
Door Open
Vehicle Not In Park or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Engage the parking brake.
Drive to workshop
without shifting
gears
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
Only shift to P
when vehicle is at
a standstill
E
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
The vehicle is moving.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Shift the transmission to position P.
G Risk of accident
The hood or the tailgate is open.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Close the hood or tailgate.
You have attempted to lock the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO while
the tailgate or door is open.
X Close all doors and/or the tailgate.
;
D
Power Steering
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
At least one door is open.
X Close all doors.
G Risk of accident
The power steering assistance is faulty. You will need to use more
force to steer.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Z
251
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 252
Version: 3.0.3.5
252
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider transmitter/receiver
range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
~
The Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and
COMAND is not activated.
Bluetooth Ready
X
If desired, activate the Bluetooth® connection between the
mobile phone and COMAND (see the separate operating
instructions).
The washer fluid level has dropped to approximately ⅓ of the total
reservoir capacity.
Top Up Washer Fluid X
Add washer fluid (Y page 297).
¥
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Please replace key
+
Remove key
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X Remove the SmartKey.
Don't Forget Your
Key
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and
is only a reminder.
You are opening the driver's door with the engine switched off.
The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock.
X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
+
You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
X Use the correct key.
+
Key Does Not
Belong To Vehicle
+
Change Key
Batteries
The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 75).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 253
Version: 3.0.3.5
Display messages
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running
because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock if
necessary.
+
Key Not Detected
(white display
message)
The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
functions in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X
Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO
functions in the vehicle.
X Operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition lock if necessary.
+
Key Detected In
Vehicle
+
Pull starting
button out then
insert key
The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
desired position.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z
253
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
254
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 254
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Brakes
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only)
X Release the parking brake.
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
$ (USA only)
G Risk of accident
J (Canada only)
There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
The red brake system
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
warning lamp comes on
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
while the engine is
under any circumstances.
running. A warning tone
X Engage the parking brake.
also sounds.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.
G Warning
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking
the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 255
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Seat belts
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
7
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
to fasten their seat belts.
After starting the
engine, the red seat
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
belt warning lamp lights
up for 6 seconds.
7
G Risk of injury
After starting the
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
The warning tone ceases.
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to 6 seconds.
7
G Risk of injury
The red seat belt
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts, X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
The warning lamp goes out.
as soon as the driver's
or the front-passenger
G Risk of injury
door is closed.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
7
The red seat belt
warning lamp flashes
and an intermittent
audible warning
sounds.
G Risk of injury
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In
addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have
briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are
driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
Z
255
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
256
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 256
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
lamp is lit while the
Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),
engine is running.
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) and PRE-SAFE® are also
deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
!
G Risk of accident
The yellow ABS warning The on-board voltage is too low. ABS has been deactivated due to
lamp is lit while the
undervoltage.
engine is running.
Therefore, ESP®, BAS and PRE-SAFE® are also deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
ABS will be available again as soon as the vehicle's on-board
electrical system voltage increases.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X
Have the battery and alternator checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
!
Self diagnosis is not yet complete.
The yellow ABS warning X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering
lamp is lit while the
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
engine is running.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 257
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
!d
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
d
G Risk of accident
EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, hill start assist and
ESP® trailer stabilization are also not available due to a
malfunction.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far down as necessary
when pulling away.
X Release the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 66).
d
At least one wheel is spinning and ETS (Electronic Traction
System) is deactivated to prevent the brakes on the drive wheels
from overheating.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
ESP®
The yellow
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion.
ETS switches back on again as soon as the brakes have cooled
down.
The display message disappears and the d warning lamp goes
out.
Z
257
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 258
Version: 3.0.3.5
258
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Problem
d
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP®
ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will not
warning lamp is lit while stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
the engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 66).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
X
d
Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP®
ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilize
warning lamp is lit while the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
the engine is running.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
+
The red SRS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
G Warning
G Risk of injury
The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The air bags or
Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not be triggered at
all.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 259
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! (USA only)
There may be a malfunction, for example:
; (Canada only)
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
The yellow engine
diagnostics warning
Rin the exhaust system
lamp lights up while the R
in the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines)
engine is running.
The emission limit values may have been exceeded and the engine
may be breaking in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
i In some states, you are required to visit a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as the yellow engine diagnostics warning
lamp lights up due to the relevant applicable legislation. If
necessary, check whether this is the case in the state you are
in.
! (USA only)
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
; (Canada only)
X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
The yellow engine
X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
diagnostics warning
lamp lights up while the
cap.
engine is running.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run
completely dry and the engine will not start. There is air in the fuel
system (Y page 162).
The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.
warning lamp lights up The fuel tank must be filled at least to the reserve fuel level to
while the engine is
prevent impairment to the running of the engine.
running.
X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Z
259
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
On-board computer and displays
260
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 260
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Driving systems
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
G Risk of accident
The red DTR distance
A warning is issued if:
warning lamp lights up
Ryou are approaching a vehicle in front at too great a speed
while the vehicle is in
motion. A warning tone RDISTRONIC has detected a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel
also sounds.
X Be prepared to brake immediately.
X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
Tires
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
G Risk of accident
USA only:
The TPMS has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the
The yellow combination tires.
low tire pressure
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
telltale/TPMS
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
malfunction telltale for
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
the TPMS is on.
display.
X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure
(Y page 341).
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 350).
h
The TPMS is faulty.
USA only:
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
The yellow combination
low tire pressure
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
telltale/TPMS
malfunction telltale for
the TPMS flashes for 60
seconds and then
remains illuminated.
G Warning
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked every other week when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire inflation pressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 261
Version: 3.0.3.5
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure warning lamp when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure warning lamp.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure warning lamp. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is lit, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction warning lamp after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Z
261
On-board computer and displays
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
262
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 262
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 263
Version: 3.0.3.5
263
Vehicle equipment ............................
Loading guidelines ............................
Stowage compartments ...................
Stowage areas ..................................
Features .............................................
264
264
264
266
277
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
264
Stowage compartments
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 264
Version: 3.0.3.5
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Loading guidelines
G Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
cargo higher than the seat backrests.
The cargo compartment is the preferred place
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo
net when transporting cargo.
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, the vehicle tool
kit, spare tire, any installed accessories,
vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo.
The load limit and the gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) of your vehicle must never be
exceeded. The load limit and the GVWR are
stated on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 344).
Additionally, the cargo must be distributed so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the maximum gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axles. The data
on GVWR and GAWR is stated on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side (Y page 344).
Further information can be found in the
"Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 344).
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the cargo
compartment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
Ralways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
RHook in the cargo net when loading.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie down. Pad sharp edges
for protection.
Stowage compartments
Important safety notes
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 265
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage compartments
If so equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo. The cargo net cannot
secure hard or heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle
Ran
maneuvers
accident
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
1 glove box unlocked
2 glove box locked
Stowage compartments in the center
console
i Depending on the vehicle equipment,
there is an AUX-IN connection or a Media
Interface installed in the glove box. Media
Interface is a universal interface for mobile
audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or USB
devices; see separate COMAND APS
operating instructions.
X
X
To open: briefly press marking ;.
To close: push stowage compartment :
in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
Stowage compartment under the
armrest
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
i The Roadside Assistance
º(Y page 285) and MB info call
E(Y page 286) buttons are located in
the stowage compartment under the
armrest.
The glove box can only be locked and
unlocked using the mechanical key.
Z
265
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 266
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
266
Stowage areas
Loading, stowing and features
Parcel nets
G Warning!
X
To open: pull handle : and fold the
armrest upwards.
Vehicles with Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Do not place objects with a combined weight
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net
on the back of the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant weight
category.
G Warning
Coin holder = is located in front of stowage
compartment ;.
Stowage compartments in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear
center console
Parcel nets are intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger
footwell and on the back of the driver's and
the front-passenger seats.
Enlarging the luggage compartment
Important safety notes
G Warning!
X
To open: press lightly on the top of the
stowage compartment.
The stowage compartment moves out
automatically.
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 267
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
G Warning!
X
Move the head restraints to the lowest
position (Y page 98).
X Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;.
X Fold seat cushion ; upwards.
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
! Release and fold the seat cushion
upwards before folding the rear bench seat
forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be
damaged.
When the backrest is folded forwards, the
front seats cannot be moved to their
rearmost position. Otherwise, the front
seats and the rear bench seat could be
damaged.
The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the
2nd row of seats can be folded forwards
separately to increase the cargo
compartment capacity. On vehicles with a 3rd
row of seats, you must fold down the 3rd row
of seats beforehand (Y page 100) to obtain
maximum cargo compartment enlargement.
X
Pull release catch = in the direction of the
arrow.
The backrest is released.
! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take
care when folding it down. Make sure that
the head restraints are pushed all the way
in so that the backrests and seat cushions
are not damaged.
X
Fold the backrest forwards until it engages
in the cargo compartment position.
X
Guide seat belts ; under respective
clips :.
Folding the rear bench seat forward
i If the driver's or front-passenger seat is
set for a larger person, it may not be
possible to fold the rear bench seat
forwards. In this case, move the front seats
as far forward as possible.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
267
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Stowage areas
268
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 268
Version: 3.0.3.5
Folding the rear bench seat back
Footwell of the 2nd row of seats
X
There is one cargo tie-down ring : in the
footwell behind the driver’s seat and one in
the footwell behind the front-passenger seat.
Pull release catch = upwards.
X Fold backrest ; backwards until it
engages, making sure not to trap the seat
belts while doing so.
X Fold seat cushion : backwards and push
until you hear it engage.
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if
necessary (Y page 98).
Cargo compartment
Securing cargos
Lashing eyelets
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
Rsecure
the load using the cargo tie down
rings.
not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
Rdo not route tie downs across sharp edges
or corners.
Rpad sharp edges for protection.
Rdo
There are four cargo tie down rings : in the
cargo compartment.
Mounting hooks
Only use the mounting hooks to secure items
of luggage up to maximum of 9 lbs (4 kg) in
weight.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 269
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
Removing/installing the luggage
compartment cover
Luggage compartment cover
Important safety notes
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that
you do not stack the load in the cargo
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the cargo compartment
cover.
The cargo compartment cover can be
attached behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats.
Extending/retracting the luggage
compartment cover
X
To remove: make sure that cargo
compartment cover ; is rolled up.
X Press button :.
X Move cargo compartment cover ; to the
left.
X Remove cargo compartment cover ;.
X
X
To extend: pull the cargo compartment
cover back by grab handle : and clip it
into retainers ; on the left and right.
X
To retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from retainers ; on the left and right
and guide it forwards by grab handle :
until it is fully retracted.
To install: if installed, remove the
protective caps from the side panels in the
3rd row of seats if you wish to install cargo
compartment cover ; behind the 2nd row
of seats.
Protective cap in the right-hand side panel of the
3rd row of seats
X
Push in the top of the protective cap as
indicated by the arrow.
The protective cap folds out at the bottom.
X Remove the lower cover from the side trim.
i Stow the protective caps in a safe place.
X
With the handle of the cargo compartment
pointing to the rear and button : facing
upwards, insert cargo compartment
Z
Loading, stowing and features
There are two securing hooks : on each side
of the cargo compartment.
269
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Loading, stowing and features
270
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 270
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
cover ; into the recess of the side trim on
the left-hand side.
X Guide cargo compartment cover ; in front
of the recess on the right.
X Press button : and insert the right-hand
side section into the recess of the side trim.
Cargo net
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged
at top and bottom position and the tightening
belts are securely fastened.
Never use a damaged cargo net.
Always use cargo net when transporting
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from
smaller objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or
sudden maneuver.
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
When the vehicle is loaded with objects that
extend beyond the seat backrests, using a
cargo net is particularly important. For
reasons of safety, a cargo net should always
be used when transporting cargo.
RThe
brackets behind B-pillar : are
required for the cargo compartment
enlargement (Y page 266).
The corresponding cargo tie down rings to
tighten the net are located in the footwell
of the rear bench seat (Y page 268).
RThe brackets behind C-pillar ; are
required for the cargo compartment behind
the 2nd row of seats.
The corresponding cargo tie down rings for
tensioning the net are in the cargo
compartment or on the backrests of the
folded-down 3rd row of seats
(Y page 268).
X Undo the two Velcro fasteners of the
safety-net stowage.
X Unroll and unfold the cargo net.
The upper and lower guide rods must
engage audibly.
Attaching the cargo net
Preparing the cargo net
The cargo net can be used in two different
positions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar).
Cargo net attached behind the C-pillar
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 271
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
Insert guide rod ; into retainer : in the
direction of the arrow.
X Slide guide rod ; forwards into
retainer : in the direction of the arrow.
Tightening the cargo net
Detaching and storing the cargo net
X
Detach guide rod ; from bracket :
(Y page 270).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
guide rods.
X Fold the cargo net and roll it up.
X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo
net holder.
EASY-PACK load-securing kit
Components and stowage
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
X
Insert belt hook : into cargo tie-down
ring ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Pull tensioning strap = by the loose end in
the direction of the arrow until the cargo
net is tight.
X After driving a short distance, check the
tension of the cargo net and retighten it if
necessary.
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you
to use your cargo compartment for a variety
of purposes. You can keep the EASY-PACK
load-securing kit in the bag supplied and store
it together with the telescopic rod under the
trunk floor.
Releasing the cargo net
: Loading rails
Inserting the mounting elements into
the loading rail
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
X
Pull belt adjuster : upwards in the
direction of the arrow to reduce the tension
on the tensioning strap.
X Unhook belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
ring =.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
X
271
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Stowage areas
272
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 272
Version: 3.0.3.5
You can slide mounting element ; in loading
rail : to various detents and secure it. These
detents are marked and positioned at 5-cm
intervals along loading rail :.
You can turn mounting element ; of loading
rail : to four positions:
& To lock the mounting element
= To release the cargo tie-down ring, the
inertia reel or the telescopic rod
; To remove the mounting element
B To push the mounting element to the
next detent
X
Turn mounting element ; to ;.
X Insert mounting element ; into loading
rail :.
X Turn mounting element ; to & until
you feel it clearly engage in loading rail :.
Inserting the lashing eyelets into the
mounting
G Warning!
Distribute the load on the cargo tie down rings
evenly. Please observe the loading guidelines.
X
Turn mounting element ; in the loading
rail to =.
X Insert cargo tie-down ring : into mounting
element ;.
X Turn mounting element ; to & until
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
Belt retractor
The inertia reel can be used to secure light
loads against the side wall of the cargo
compartment to prevent them from moving
around.
X Insert two mounting elements ; into a
loading rail.
X Turn mounting elements ; in the loading
rail to =.
X Insert inertia reel = into mounting
elements ;.
X Turn mounting element ; to & until
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
X Press unlocking button : on inertia reel
= and pull the cargo net out in the
direction of the arrow.
X Place the load between the securing net
and the cargo compartment side wall.
X Using one hand, press locking button : of
inertia reel =.
X With your other hand, slowly extend the net
around the load until it is secure.
Telescopic rod
The telescopic rod can be used to secure the
load against the rear seats to prevent it from
moving around.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 273
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
Position the cargo on the roof rack in such
a way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that when the roof carrier is
installed you can:
Rraise
Ropen
the tilt/sliding sunroof fully
the tailgate fully
Fastening the roof carrier
X
Insert one mounting element ; into each
loading rail.
X Turn mounting elements ; in the loading
rail to =.
X Insert telescopic rod : into mounting
elements ;.
X Turn mounting element ; to & until
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Only use carriers when the crossbars have
been completely mounted. The left and right
roof rails are only stabilized by means of the
crossbars mounted.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached carrier or its load could become
detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
198 lb (90 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof is
loaded, the handling characteristics are
different from those when operating the
vehicle without the roof loaded.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
X
X
Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :.
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Crossbar
The maximum roof load that can be utilized in
conjunction with accessories is reduced by
the dead weight of the crossbars (13.7 lbs/
6.2 kg).
! Note that installing the crossbar
increases the vehicle height by 50 mm
compared to the height stated in the
"Technical data" section.
The keys and an Allen key are stored with the
vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment
under the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 310).
i Spare parts are available as MercedesBenz accessories. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
273
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
274
Stowage areas
Installing the crossbars
G Warning!
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 274
Version: 3.0.3.5
Please follow these installation instructions
carefully. Caution should be exercised to
avoid damage to the vehicle while installing
the crossbars. Also, be careful not to injure
yourself or others while installing and
adjusting the crossbars or loading items on
them.
Each individual step of the installation
instructions, the warning notices, the general
safety precautions and the instructions for
use must be followed exactly. If the crossbars
are not mounted correctly, they and the
objects attached to them could come loose
from your vehicle and cause an accident,
thereby injuring you and other persons and/
or causing damage to property, including
damage to your vehicle.
G Warning!
Every time the crossbars are mounted, before
you set off on a journey and periodically
during longer journeys, check all the screws
on the crossbars to make sure that they are
secure, and tighten them if necessary. Repeat
these checks at regular intervals as roadsurface conditions dictate, and at least after
every 1500 miles (2500 km) of continuous
use.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to them
could come loose from the vehicle causing an
accident, thereby injuring you and other
persons and/or causing damage to property,
including damage to your vehicle.
Do not use lubricant on the screws of the
crossbars. The screws could work loose and
the crossbars could become detached from
your vehicle, together with the objects
attached to them causing an accident,
thereby injuring you and other persons and/
or causing damage to property, including
damage to your vehicle.
G Warning!
Only install the crossbars at the exact
locations designated on the roof rails. The
designated locations for the front crossbars
are between the markings engraved on the
inside of the roof rails. The designated
locations for the rear crossbars are between
the gaps on the roof rails.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to them
could come loose from the vehicle causing an
accident, thereby injuring you and other
persons and/or causing damage to property,
including damage to your vehicle.
G Warning!
A roof load creates a greater surface area
exposed to the wind and causes the vehicle
to have a higher center of gravity, thereby
changing the vehicle’s driving characteristics.
Accordingly, the additional weight on the roof
of the vehicle can have a detrimental effect
on braking, cornering and acceleration.
Never exceed the maximum permissible roof
load or the maximum permissible vehicle
weight, even when accessories for the
crossbars (e.g. ski racks, bicycle racks, etc.)
are being used. Overloading the vehicle could
result in an accident. When calculating the
weight placed on the roof please make sure
to add the weight of the crossbars, accessory
racks and the load carried together.
Always adapt your driving style to the road,
traffic and weather conditions, and drive with
added caution when the roof is loaded.
Always drive with extreme care when the
carrier is loaded. Take into consideration that
when the carrier is loaded, the handling
characteristics are different from those when
operating the vehicle without a carrier loaded.
G Warning!
Do not use accessories which have not been
approved by Mercedes-Benz for use in
conjunction with these crossbars. If nonapproved accessories are used, these
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 275
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
accessories and/or the objects attached to
them could come loose from the vehicle,
thereby injuring you and other persons and/
or causing damage to property, including
damage to your vehicle.
! Have a second person assist you when
installing the crossbars. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
! Objects that are attached to crossbar
system accessories must not limit or
obstruct the movement of the sliding
sunroof. Otherwise, the tilt/sliding sunroof
could be damaged when it is raised.
B Front crossbar
C Rear crossbar
D Recesses
E Markings
F Roof rails
X
Position front crossbar B between marks
E on roof rails F.
i There are marks E on the inner edge of
the roof rail that are identified by white
lines.
: Key
; Protective cap
= FRONT (or REAR) sticker
? Bolt for the clamping claw
A Clamping claw
The front and rear crossbars differ in length.
For this reason, pay attention to FRONT or
REAR sticker = on the crossbars.
? Bolt for the clamping claw
X
A Clamping claw
Unlock protective cap ; using key :.
X Remove protective cap ;.
Sticker = for identifying the installation
location FRONT or REAR becomes visible.
X Turn bolt ? counter-clockwise using the
Allen key until clamping claw A is wide
open.
F Roof rails
X
Ensure that clamping claw A sits flush
against the inner edge of roof rail F.
If necessary, adjust the span width of the
crossbar (Y page 276).
X Slightly tighten up bolts ? on both sides
in a clockwise direction.
X Position rear crossbar C on roof rails F
so that the clamping claws engage in
recesses D in the roof rails.
Z
275
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 276
Version: 3.0.3.5
Stowage areas
276
Loading, stowing and features
X
Ensure that clamping claw A sits flush
against the inner edge of roof rail F.
If necessary, adjust the span width of the
crossbar (Y page 276).
X Slightly tighten up bolts ? on both sides
in a clockwise direction.
X Tighten up bolts ? on the front and rear
crossbars. Observe the tightening torque of
4 lb/ft (6 Nm) .
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
mounting the crossbars. The screws could
come loose if they are not tightened to a
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
X
X
Attach and lock protective caps ;.
Stow the key and Allen key in the stowage
compartment under the cargo
compartment floor again (Y page 274).
Setting the span width of the crossbars
G Warning!
Only install the crossbars at the exact
locations designated on the roof rails. The
designated locations for the front crossbars
are between the markings engraved on the
inside of the roof rails. The designated
locations for the rear crossbars are between
the gaps on the roof rails.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to them
could come loose from the vehicle causing an
accident, thereby injuring you and other
persons and/or causing damage to property,
including damage to your vehicle.
The span width of the crossbars for your
vehicle is set at the factory. The span widths
only fit in the intended positions on the
vehicle.
Only install the crossbars at the marked
positions and observe stickers = FRONT and
REAR.
? Bolt for the clamping claw
A Clamping claw
G Bolts for adjusting the span width (2 per
side)
H Cover strip
X
Pull cover strip H out of the groove until
bolts G on both ends of the crossbar are
visible.
X Turn bolts G on both sides approximately
two turns counterclockwise.
X Align the crossbars on the marked
positions on the roof rails.
X Ensure that clamping claws A sit flush
with the roof rails on both sides. If
necessary, pull out or slide into clamping
claws A.
X Tighten bolts G. Observe the tightening
torque of 4 lb/ft (6 Nm) .
The width of the clamping claw is not set
correctly.
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
mounting the crossbars. The screws could
come loose if they are not tightened to a
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
X
Press cover strip H piece by piece into the
groove of the crossbar.
X Install the crossbars as described
(Y page 274).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 277
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
X
Cut off cover strip H at the marked
position.
X Press cover strip H into the groove of the
crossbar, piece by piece.
i Cover strips are available as MercedesBenz accessories. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Features
: Key
; Protective cap
= Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
? Bolt for the clamping claw
A Clamping claw
X
Unlock protective cap ; using key :.
Remove protective cap ;.
X Turn the bolts of clamping claws A
counterclockwise until the crossbars can
be removed from the roof rails.
X
Shortening the cover strip
The cover strips reduce the wind noise
caused by the crossbars. If additional roof
accessories are installed it may be necessary
to shorten the cover strips.
Cup holder
Points to observe before use
G Warning
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
H Cover strip
Cup holder in the center console
X
In the upper center console, there is a cup
holder and a removable support with a card
holder
Pull cover strip H out of the groove.
Install the roof accessory on the crossbars.
X Place cover strip H flush with the roof
accessory and mark the end of the crossbar
on the cover strip.
X
Z
Loading, stowing and features
Removing the crossbars
277
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 278
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
278
Loading, stowing and features
You can remove the cup holder to clean it.
Clean the cup holder with clear, lukewarm
water only.
Sun visors
X
To remove: hold cup holder : by
support ; and pull out in the direction of
the arrow.
X To install: place the cup holder into the
guides and insert.
G Warning
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Reflected glare can endanger you and others.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the
armrests when they are folded out as you
could damage them.
: Mirror light
; Bracket
= Vanity mirror
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
A Mirror cover
X
Fold down the armrest.
Cup holder in the third row of seats
The cup holders are located in the side trim
on the left and right-hand sides.
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 279
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
X
To close: pull out the roller sunblind using
handle = and attach arm ; to
bracket :.
The roller sunblind engages.
X To open: press release knob ? to release
the roller sunblind from bracket :.
X Retract the roller sunblind by hand.
Ashtray
X
Fold down sun visor :.
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
X Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: slide sun
visor : horizontally as desired.
X Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: fold
down additional sun visor ; to the
windshield.
Ashtray in the cockpit
i There is a stowage space under the
ashtray.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
the stowage space could be damaged.
Rear panorama roof roller sunblind
The rear panorama roof roller sunblind
protects the vehicle occupants in the third
row of seats from direct sunlight.
You can open/close the roller sunblind by
hand.
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
could damage the roller sunblind.
X
To open: briefly press marking =.
Ashtray : opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert ; up and
out.
X To refit the insert: press insert ; into the
holder until it engages.
Ashtray in the rear compartment
! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and
before you fold the rear seats forward. You
can otherwise damage the ashtray.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
Glare from the side
279
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Features
280
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 280
Version: 3.0.3.5
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
G Warning
X
To open: briefly press marking =.
Ashtray ; opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert : up and
out.
X To re-insert the insert: replace insert :
from above.
X Press insert : into the holder until it
engages.
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
! The 12 V socket in the cigarette lighter
can be used for accessories (up to a
maximum of 180 W) as long as they have
the standard socket type for cigarette
lighters. Note that the socket in the
cigarette lighter can be damaged when
connecting accessories, for example by
frequent insertion and removal or by
sockets that do not fit correctly. A damaged
socket can cause the cigarette lighter to
stop working.
Cigarette lighter
G Warning
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Rbe
Center console, front
X
Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Press marking =.
Ashtray : opens.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 281
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
281
12 V sockets
Points to observe before use
make sure that you do not exceed the
maximum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise,
you will overload the fuses.
The socket can be used for accessories with
a maximum power consumption of 180 W,
e.g. lamps or chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the socket for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X
Press marking =.
Stowage compartment : opens.
X Remove cover from socket ;.
i On vehicles with the smoker's package,
you must remove the cigarette lighter in
order to use the socket (Y page 280).
Socket in the front-passenger footwell
Socket in the rear compartment
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the cockpit
! If accessories are connected, make sure
that a maximum current draw of 15 A is not
exceeded. Otherwise, you will overload the
fuse.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the cargo compartment
The socket is located in the cargo
compartment on the left-hand side trim.
! The socket is not suitable for operating
the electric air pump.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle,
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 282
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
282
Loading, stowing and features
G Warning!
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
i You can also use the socket when the
ignition is switched off. An emergency cutout ensures that the on-board voltage does
not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is
too low, the power to the sockets is
automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
115 V socket
G Warning!
The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage.
Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with
the same caution and prudence that you
exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket
cover in the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
G Warning!
A device that you connect must have a
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug
a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use
a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket.
This could cause serious personal injury to
you and/or others.
The 115 V AC power socket : provides an
alternating voltage of 115 V, so that small
electronic devices can be connected. These
devices, such as games consoles, chargers
and laptops, should not consume more than
a maximum of 150 W altogether.
Requirements for operation of these devices:
R12
V power sockets in the footwell of the
second row of seats and in the stowage
compartment must be functioning
correctly (Y page 281).
Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged
into the 115 V power socket :.
Rthe on-board voltage is within a permissible
voltage range.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 W.
X Open flap =.
X Insert the plug of the electrical device into
the 115 V power socket :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; does not light up, please
read the chapter on malfunctions.
X To turn off: disconnect the plug from the
115 V power socket :.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 283
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
Possible causes of malfunction:
Rthe
on-board voltage of the vehicle is not
within the permissible voltage range.
Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter is
momentarily too high.
Rsome small electronic devices have a
constant nominal power of less than
150 W, but a very high inrush current.
These devices will not work. If you connect
such a device, the 115 V power socket :
will not supply it with power.
If indicator lamp ; still does not light up,
consult a specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
mbrace35
Important safety notes
! A license agreement must exist in order
to activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use, and press the E MB info call button
to register. If you cannot carry out any of
the steps mentioned, the system may not
be activated.
If you have any questions concerning
activation, please contact one of the
following service hotlines:
RUSA:
Response Center under
866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service under
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will
be sent to you by post. You can use this
password to log in to the mbrace section
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com36.
The mbrace system is available if:
Rit
has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires an available cellular
phone network, a valid SIM card and a
service subscription to a surveillance
service provider.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe corresponding cellular phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
customer center.
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if there is sufficient
GPS reception and the vehicle position can
be forwarded to the customer center.
The mbrace system
The mbrace system provides three different
services:
Rautomatic
and manual emergency call
Assistance call
RMB info call
To control the volume during an mbrace call,
proceed as follows:
RRoadside
X
Press the W or X button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume controller of COMAND.
You can find information and a description of
all available features under "Owners Online"
at http://www.mbusa.com37
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
35 The
system is called TELEAID in Canada.
only.
37 USA only.
36 USA
Z
Loading, stowing and features
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
X Close flap =.
283
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
284
Features
G Warning
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if any or all of the following
conditions occur:
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 284
Version: 3.0.3.5
RThe
indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button º does not come on during the
system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in Information button
E does not come on during the system
self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
Roadside Assistance button º, or
Information button E remains
illuminated constantly in red after the
system self-test.
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
multifunction display after the system selftest.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
case of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
RUSA:
Response Center under the number
866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service under
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
! A license agreement must exist in order
to activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use, and press the E MB info call button
to register. If you cannot carry out any of
the steps mentioned, the system may not
be activated.
If you have any questions concerning
activation, please contact one of the
following service hotlines:
RUSA:
Response Center under
866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service under
1-888-923-8367
An emergency call is dialed automatically if
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered.
i An automatically dialed mbrace
emergency call cannot be canceled.
An emergency call can also be dialed
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction display.
COMAND is muted.
Once a connection has been established, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency
is compiled, for example:
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle (as
determined by the GPS system)
Rvehicle model
Rvehicle color
Rvehicle identification number
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
be established automatically soon after the
emergency call has been initiated. If the
vehicle occupants are able to respond, the
Response Center will attempt to obtain more
detailed information on the emergency.
i If no vehicle occupant answers, an
ambulance is immediately sent to the
vehicle.
G Warning
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 285
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
Roadside Assistance call button
X
Open the stowage compartment under the
armrest (Y page 265).
X
Press and hold Roadside Assistance
button : for more than two seconds.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance Representative is initiated. The
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display and COMAND is
muted.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call
manually: press cover : briefly to open.
X Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is ended.
X Wait for the voice connection with the
Response Center.
X After the emergency call is ended, close
cover :.
G Warning
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the
vehicle and move to a safe location. The
Response Center will automatically contact
local emergency officials with the vehicle's
approximate location if they receive an
automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice
contact with the vehicle occupants.
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Response
Center, for example:
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle
identification number
Rvehicle model
Rvehicle color
Rvehicle
i The COMAND display shows that an
mbrace call is active. You can switch to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND during the call. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Representative and the vehicle occupants.
X Describe the type of assistance needed.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
established, then the mbrace system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
relevant cellular phone network is not
available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
285
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Features
286
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 286
Version: 3.0.3.5
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Representative either sends a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or organizes for
your vehicle to be transported to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may
be charged for services such as repair work
and/or towing. Further details are available
in your mbrace manual.
X
i If the indicator lamp in MB info call
If a connection can be established, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a mobile phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Response
Center, for example:
button : flashes continuously and it was
not possible to establish a voice
connection to the Response Center, then
the mbrace system has failed to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the
corresponding cellular phone network is
not available). The Call Failed message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on COMAND.
i Sign and Drive services38: you are not
charged for services such as jump-starting,
providing a few gallons of fuel for a fuel tank
that has been run dry or changing a flat tire
with the vehicle's own spare tire.
MB Info call button
X
The stowage compartment under the
armrest (Y page 265).
Press and hold MB info call button : for
more than two seconds.
A call to the Response Center is initiated.
MB info call button indicator lamp :
flashes while the connection is being
established. The Connecting Call
message appears in the multifunction
display and COMAND is muted.
Rcurrent
location of the vehicle
identification number
Rvehicle model
Rvehicle color
Rvehicle
i The COMAND display shows that an
mbrace call is active. You can switch to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND during the call. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the vehicle occupants is
established. You can obtain information on
how to operate your vehicle's systems, on the
location of the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center, and on further products and
services offered by Mercedes-Benz USA.
Further details on the mbrace system can be
found under http://www.mbusa.com39.
Log in under "Owners Online".
i If the indicator lamp in MB info call
button : flashes continuously and no
voice connection to the Response Center
has been established, then the mbrace
system has failed to initiate an MB info call
(e.g. the corresponding mobile phone
network is not available). The Call
38 USA
39 USA
only.
only.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 287
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
X
Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the entered address.
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
X
or
X
Press the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on COMAND.
Call priority
An emergency call can still be initiated even
if a service call is currently active, e.g. a
Roadside Assistance call or an MB info call.
In this case, an emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
call can only be terminated by the Response
Center. All other calls can be ended by
pressing the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel or the
corresponding button for ending a telephone
call on COMAND.
i When an mbrace call has been initiated,
COMAND is muted. The mobile phone is no
longer connected to COMAND. If you must
use your mobile phone, we recommend
that you do this only when the vehicle is
stationary and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
i Information on the components and
operating principles of COMAND can be
found in the separate COMAND operating
instructions.
Destination Download gives you access to a
database with over 10 million points of
interest (POIs) which can be downloaded onto
the navigation system of your vehicle. If you
know the destination, you can download the
address or obtain the location of points of
interest (POIs) or important destinations in
the surrounding area.
Select Yes using the = button or
select ; on COMAND.
X Press the 9 button on COMAND to
confirm.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
i If you select No, the address can be stored
in the address book.
i The Destination Download function is
available if the corresponding cellular
phone network is available and data
transfer is possible.
Search & Send
"Search & Send" is a destination entry
service. You can find further information on
"Search & Send" in the separate COMAND
operating instructions.
Vehicle remote opening
If you have unintentionally locked your
vehicle (e.g. the SmartKey is inside the
vehicle) and a replacement key is not
available:
X Contact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Response Center under the
number 866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service under
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
X Return to your vehicle at the time arranged
with the Response Center.
X Pull the tailgate handle for at least 20
seconds until the indicator lamp in the SOS
button (Y page 284) flashes.
The Connecting Call message appears in
the multifunction display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can also be opened
via the Internet in the "Owners Online"
Z
287
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Features
288
section using your ID number and
password40.
i Vehicle remote unlocking is only possible
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 288
Version: 3.0.3.5
if the corresponding cellular phone
network is accessible.
The SOS button flashes and the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display to confirm that the
command for vehicle remote unlocking has
been received.
If you pull the tailgate handle for more than
20 seconds before receiving authorization
for remote unlocking from the Response
Center, you must wait 15 minutes before
you can pull on the handle of the tailgate
again.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Contact the police.
The police will issue an incident report. This
report has a number.
X This number will be forwarded to the
Response Center together with your PIN.
The Response Center will then attempt to
covertly contact the mbrace system. The
Response Center contacts you and the
local law enforcement authority if the
vehicle is located. However, only the law
enforcement authority is informed of the
location of the vehicle.
i If the anti-theft alarm system remains
activated for longer than thirty seconds,
mbrace is automatically connected to the
Customer Assistance Center.
Garage door opener
Important safety notes
Up to three different door and gate systems
can be operated using the remote control
integrated in the overhead control panel.
40 USA
only.
i Certain garage door openers are not
compatible with the integrated remote
control. If you experience difficulties with
the programming of the integrated remote
control, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center or call the following telephone
assistance service:
RUSA:
Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service
on1-800-387-0100
G Warning
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When
programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming the
integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
and possible death. All exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
i USA only:
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 289
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. The device must not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must withstand any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Unauthorized modification of this device
could void the device's operating permit.
i Canada only:
This device complies with the RSS-210
requirements of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. The device must not cause harmful
interference.
2. The device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized modification of this device
could void the user's authority to legally
operate the device.
Programming the remote control
Programming
G Warning!
Only press the transmitter button on the
integrated remote control if there are no
persons or objects present within the sweep
of the garage door. People could otherwise be
injured by the movement of the door.
Remote control in the rear-view mirror
Garage door remote control A is not part of
the garage door opener.
i To achieve the best result, insert new
batteries in garage door remote control
A of your garage door drive before
programming.
X
Erase the memory of the integrated remote
control (Y page 291) before programming
it for the first time.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press and hold one of transmitter
buttons ; to ? on the integrated remote
control.
After a short time, indicator lamp : will
start flashing. It flashes about once per
second.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time that the transmitter button is
programmed. If this transmitter button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only start flashing at a rate of
once per second after 20 seconds have
elapsed.
X
Keep the transmitter button depressed.
Point transmitter button B of garage door
remote control A towards the transmitter
buttons on the rear-view mirror from a
distance of 2 to 12 inches (5 to 20 cm).
i The distance between garage door
remote control A and the integrated
garage door opener depends on the system
of the garage door drive. You might require
X
Z
289
Loading, stowing and features
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Features
290
several attempts. You should test every
position for at least 20 seconds before
trying another position.
X
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 290
Version: 3.0.3.5
Keep transmitter button B on garage door
remote control A pressed until indicator
lamp : starts to flash rapidly.
The programming has been successful if
indicator lamp : flashes rapidly.
X Release transmitter buttons ;, = or ?
on the integrated remote control or
transmitter button on the garage door
remote control B.
If indicator lamp : goes out after
approximately 20 seconds and has not
flashed rapidly:
X
Release transmitter buttons ;, = or ?
on the integrated remote control or
transmitter button on the garage door
remote control B.
X Repeat the procedure for the other
transmitter buttons. When doing so, vary
the distance between the garage door's
remote control and the transmitter buttons
in the rear-view mirror.
i If the garage door system works with a
rolling code, you must synchronize the
remote control integrated into the rearview mirror with the garage door system
receiver after programming.
You will find further information in the
garage door opening system's operating
instructions, e.g. the sections on
"Synchronizing the transmitter" or
"Registering a new transmitter". You can
also call the hotline mentioned above.
Notes on programming the remote
control
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission. This may
not be long enough for the integrated signal
transmitter to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or have difficulties
programming the garage door opener
(regardless of where you live) when using the
programming steps (see above), proceed as
follows:
X Press transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
hold it down during the following steps until
the setup has been completed
successfully.
X At the same time, press transmitter button
B of the garage door remote control for
two seconds, then release it for two
seconds, then press it again for two
seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on transmitter
button B of the garage door remote
control until the frequency signal has been
learned.
X If the setup procedure is successful,
indicator lamp : flashes once slowly and
goes out after a few seconds.
X Continue with the other programming
steps (see above).
Problems when programming
If you have problems when programming the
integrated remote control, please note the
following:
Rcheck
the transmitter frequency of garage
door remote control A (which can usually
be found on the rear of the remote control).
The integrated remote control is
compatible with equipment that operates
in the frequency range 280 to 390 MHz.
Rreplace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood of
garage door remote control A sending a
strong and precise signal to the integrated
remote control on the rear-view mirror.
RWhen aiming the garage door remote
control at the transmitter buttons on the
rear-view mirror, hold garage door remote
control A at differing distances and angles
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 291
Version: 3.0.3.5
Features
Opening or closing the garage door
Once programmed, the integrated remote
control will assume the function of the garage
door system's remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? in the
overhead control panel that you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with fixed code:
indicator lamp : lights up continuously.
Garage door system with rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes briefly and then
lights up for approximately two seconds.
This is repeated for up to 20 seconds.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
as long as the transmitter button is being
pressed. The transmission will be halted
after a maximum of 20 seconds and
indicator lamp : will flash. Press the
transmitter button again, if necessary.
Clearing the remote control memory
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press and hold transmitter buttons ;
and ? for approximately 20 seconds until
indicator lamp : flashes rapidly.
The memory is cleared.
i You should clear the remote control
memory before selling the vehicle.
Compass
X
To call up the compass: press the V
or U button on the multifunction
steering wheel repeatedly until the off-road
menu appears in the multifunction display.
The compass indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is currently driving: N, NE,
E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
i If your vehicle is not equipped with the
AIRMATIC package, the multifunction
display only shows the compass.
Floormat on the driver's side
G Warning!
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A
loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
functioning of the pedals.
Z
Loading, stowing and features
from the transmitter button that you are
programming. Try different angles from a
distance of 2 to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or
the same angle from differing distances.
RIf there is another garage door remote
control for the same device, perform the
programming steps again using the remote
control. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in the garage door remote control.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal
reception/transmission.
291
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Features
292
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
Loading, stowing and features
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 292
Version: 3.0.3.5
X
Slide seat backwards.
To install: place the floormat in position.
X Press floormat eyelets : onto retainer
pins ;.
X
X
To remove: pull the floormats off
retainers ;.
X Remove the floormat.
Infrared-reflecting windshield
The infrared reflecting glass prevents the
vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also
blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz
range.
In order to operate radio-controlled
equipment, e.g. toll systems, there are
areas : on the windshield that are
permeable to radio waves. In these areas, you
can install radio-controlled systems. These
areas can best be seen from outside the
vehicle by observing the light reflected off the
windshield.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 293
Version: 3.0.3.5
293
Vehicle equipment ............................
Engine compartment ........................
Service ...............................................
Care ....................................................
294
294
298
299
Maintenance and care
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
294
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Maintenance and care
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 294
Version: 3.0.3.5
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening the hood
G Warning
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose and
injure you and/or others.
G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature display to
determine whether the engine may be
overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
department.
G Warning!
There is a risk of injury if the hood is open,
even if the engine is not running.
Some engine components can become very
hot.
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Operator's
Manual and observe the relevant safety notes.
G Warning
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
G Warning!
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
Rwith
the engine running
starting the engine
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
Rwhile
G Warning!
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
Rwith
the engine running
starting the engine
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rwhile
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off.
G Warning!
The windshield wipers and wiper linkage
could be set in motion.
When the hood is open, you or others could
be injured by the wiper linkage.
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make
sure that no ignition position has been
selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator
lamps must be off in the instrument panel.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 295
Version: 3.0.3.5
Engine compartment
295
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 inches (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force.
Radiator
i Vehicles with a diesel engine: do not
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
cover the radiator, for example with a
winter front or bug cover. Otherwise, the
readings of the on-board-diagnostic
system may be inaccurate. Some of these
readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
Notes on the oil level
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch
handle ; up and lift the hood.
Closing the hood
G Warning
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others.
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil over a
distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil
consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark
the vehicle on a level surface.
engine should be switched off for at
least five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature.
Rthe engine should be switched off for at
least 30 minutes if it is not at normal
operating temperature (i.e. if you only start
the engine briefly).
Rthe
Z
Maintenance and care
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 296
Version: 3.0.3.5
Engine compartment
296
Maintenance and care
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick
oil filters that have been tested and
approved according to the Mercedes-Benz
specifications for service products can be
found on the Internet at http://
www.mbusa.com (USA only). Further
information on tested and approved engine
oils and oil filters can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following causes engine failure or
damage to the exhaust system:
Rusing
engine oils and oil filters that are
not specifically approved for the service
system
Rreplacing the engine oil and oil filter later
than the specified replacement interval
required by the service system
Rusing engine oil additives
Example: vehicles with a gasoline engine
Example: vehicles with a diesel engine
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : into the
dipstick guide tube to the stop, and take it
out again.
The oil level is correct if the level is between
MIN mark = and MAX mark ;.
X Add oil if necessary.
Adding engine oil
H Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters which
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. A list of the engine oils and
Example: engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X Add the amount of oil required.
Fill carefully to the maximum mark on the oil
dipstick.
i The difference in quantity between the
MIN mark and the MAX mark on the
dipstick is (depending on the engine)
approximately 1.6 to 2.1 US qt. (1.5 to 2 l).
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is
above the MAX mark on the dipstick, too
much oil has been added. This can lead to
damage to the engine or the catalytic
converter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 297
Version: 3.0.3.5
Engine compartment
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 368).
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and
tighten clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
297
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts.
Checking the coolant level
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X Turn the SmartKey to position
2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 147).
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in
the multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡ (70 †).
G Warning
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
Ruse
extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the
coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature
is above 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is
under pressure.
Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure.
Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
X
Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise and allow excess pressure to
escape.
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
If the coolant is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher when warm, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
X If necessary, add coolant which has been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 369).
Windshield washer system/headlamp
cleaning system
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windshield washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
G Warning
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Z
Maintenance and care
Checking and adding other service
products
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Service
298
! At temperatures below freezing, always
fill the washer fluid container with a mix of
windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze additive. There is otherwise a
risk of damaging the windshield washer
system/headlamp cleaning system.
! Only use washer fluid concentrate which
is suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
washer fluid concentrate could damage the
plastic lenses of the headlamps.
Maintenance and care
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 298
Version: 3.0.3.5
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
fluid level measuring gauge could be
damaged.
i Add windshield washer concentrate, e.g.
MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year
round.
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
Brake fluid level
! If you discover that the brake fluid level in
the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
MIN mark or below, check the brake
system for leaks immediately. Also check
the brake lining thickness. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not
rectify the malfunction.
Only check the brake fluid level when the
vehicle is stationary and on a level surface.
Example: washer fluid reservoir
X
Mix the windshield washer fluid in a
container beforehand.
X At temperatures above freezing: fill the
washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
and windshield washer concentrate (e.g.
MB SummerFit).
X At temperatures below freezing: fill the
washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
and MB SummerFit windshield washer
concentrate. For information on the mixing
ratio, see (Y page 370) or use the premixed
windshield washer solution with antifreeze
available in specialist stores.
The brake fluid level is correct if it is between
MIN marking ; and MAX marking : on the
brake fluid reservoir.
Service
Service interval display
Service messages
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
You can obtain more information at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 299
Version: 3.0.3.5
Care
The service interval display informs you of the
next service due date.
If a service due date has been exceeded, you
also hear an acoustic signal.
The multifunction display shows a service
message for a few seconds, e.g.
Service A In .. Miles
Service A due now
Service A Exceeded By .. Miles
The letter indicates how much time the
workshop will require to carry out the service
work. The letters displayed range from A for
a short service duration to H for a long service
duration.
The service interval display does not take into
account any periods of time during which the
battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery.
or
X
Subtract the battery disconnection periods
from the service date shown on the display
after reconnecting the battery.
Hiding the service message
X
Press the . reset button on the
instrument cluster (Y page 28).
Displaying the service message
X
Switch on the ignition.
Press V or U to select the standard
display menu on the steering wheel
(Y page 218).
X Select & or * to select the service
interval display.
The service due date appears in the
multifunction display.
X
299
Points to remember
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the service interval display after the
necessary service work has been carried out.
You can obtain more information, e.g. on
maintenance work, at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly at
Mercedes-Benz.
! If the service interval indicator has been
inadvertently reset, this setting can be
corrected at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Have the service work carried out as
described in the Service Booklet. There
may otherwise be increased wear, resulting
in damage to the vehicle or to the major
assemblies.
Care
Notes on care
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.
G Warning
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the
particular container. Always open your
vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the
inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Rdry,
rough or hard cloths
cleaning agents
Rabrasive
Z
Maintenance and care
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
300
Care
Rsolvents
Rcleaning
agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
H Environmental note
Maintenance and care
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 300
Version: 3.0.3.5
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period right after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. Generally, park the
vehicle at operating temperature after
cleaning.
Exterior care
Automatic car wash
G Warning!
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For
this reason, you must drive particularly
carefully after washing the vehicle until the
brakes have dried.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
! In car washes with a towing mechanism,
make sure that the automatic transmission
is in transmission position N, otherwise the
vehicle could be damaged.
RVehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock. Do not open the driver's
door or front-passenger door when the
engine is switched off. Otherwise, the
automatic transmission selects park
position P automatically and locks the
wheels. You can prevent this by shifting
the automatic transmission to N
beforehand.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or frontpassenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P
automatically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N:
X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
X Turn the SmartKey to position
2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/
Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
! Make sure that the side windows are
completely closed, that the ventilation/
heating is switched off and that the
windshield wiper switch is set to 0.
Otherwise, the rain/light sensor could be
activated, triggering unintended wiper
movements. This can cause damage to the
vehicle.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the
windshield.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 301
Version: 3.0.3.5
Care
Washing by hand
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Also, clean the insides of the wheels when
washing the underbody of the vehicle.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft car sponge for cleaning.
X Use a gentle cleaning agent, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz approved car shampoo.
X Wash down the vehicle with a gentle water
jet.
X Do not point the water jet directly at the air
inlets.
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
frequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
it thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not allow the cleaning agent to dry on
the paintwork.
Power washers
G Warning!
Do not use power washers with circular-jet
nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in
particular the tires. You could otherwise
damage the tires and cause an accident.
! Keep the distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer at
11.8 in (30 cm). Information about the
correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor
joint
Relectrical
components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
301
Rtrim
elements
slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
Rventilation
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period right after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
brake pads, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked up.
Cleaning the paintwork
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by
inadequate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified
specialist workshop immediately, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Remove impurities immediately, where
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic
plates or similar items
Z
Maintenance and care
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 302
Version: 3.0.3.5
Care
302
may prevent water from draining away,
leading to corrosion damage.
Maintenance and care
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the
painted surface, paint care products should
be used that have been approved and
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five
months, depending on climatic conditions
and the care product used.
If dirt has entered the paint surface or the
paintwork has become dull, a paint cleaner
should be used that has been approved and
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Never use such care products in direct
sunlight or on a hot hood.
X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch Up stick, for quick, temporary repair
of damaged paintwork.
Cleaning the wiper blades
G Warning!
Switch off the windshield wipers and remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock before
cleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have
gone out. The windshield wipers could
otherwise move and injure you.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
Cleaning the windows
G Warning!
Switch off the windshield wipers and remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock before
cleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have
gone out. The windshield wipers could
otherwise move and injure you.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
agent that is recommended and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not use hard objects to clean the insides
of the windows, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Under certain circumstances,
deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen
X
Fold the wiper arms away from the
windshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the windshield wipers back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the headlamps
X
Clean the plastic lamp lenses on the
headlamps using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic
headlamp lenses. Unsuitable cleaning
agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or
damage the plastic headlamp lenses.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 303
Version: 3.0.3.5
Care
Cleaning the sensors
303
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as
wheel cleaner.
X
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
! When cleaning the sensors with a power
washer, maintain a distance between the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm). Information
about the correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.
Cleaning the rear view camera
Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
X
Before cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a
commercially-available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based
thinner or gasoline
cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to
irreparable damage to the display.
Rabrasive
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Z
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Care
304
Cleaning the plastic trim
G Warning!
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning
agents containing solvents cause the surface
to become porous, and as a result, plastic
parts may break away and be thrown around
the interior when an air bag is deployed, which
may result in severe injuries.
Maintenance and care
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 304
Version: 3.0.3.5
! Do not affix the following to plastic
surfaces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented
oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Wash thoroughly with a damp cloth or use
a leather care agent that has been
recommended and approved by MercedesBenz.
Cleaning real wood and trim strips
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish for trim strips.
The trim strips have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim strips.
Chrome polish can be used to remove very
heavy soiling from trim strips which you are
sure are made of chrome. If you are unsure
as to whether a trim strip is chrome-plated
or not, consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Cleaning the seat covers
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
! Observe the following when cleaning:
Rclean
genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure
that the leather does not become
soaked. It may otherwise become rough
and cracked. Only use leather care
agents that have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can
obtain these from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 305
Version: 3.0.3.5
Care
305
Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
Rclean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
i Note that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
X
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the seat belts
Use clean, luke-warm water and soap
solution.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) or
placing them in direct sunlight.
G Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Roof lining: use soft brushes or dry
shampoo if it is particularly dirty.
X
Carpets: use carpet and textile cleaners
that have been approved and
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
306
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 306
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 307
Version: 3.0.3.5
307
Vehicle equipment ............................
After an accident ..............................
Where will I find...? ...........................
Flat tire ..............................................
Battery ...............................................
Jump-starting ....................................
Towing and tow-starting ..................
Fuses ..................................................
308
309
309
311
322
325
327
329
Roadside assistance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
308
Vehicle equipment
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
Roadside assistance
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 308
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 309
Version: 3.0.3.5
Where will I find...?
309
After an accident
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G Risk of explosion or fire
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
X Immediately turn the key to position 0(Y page 147)in the ignition
lock and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You are unable to
determine the extent of
the damage.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You cannot detect any
damage.
X
Start the engine as normal.
The NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints
on the driver's and
front-passenger seat
have been triggered.
Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision.
X Reset the triggered NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints (Y page 52).
Roadside assistance
Problem
Where will I find...?
First-aid kit
X
Open the tailgate.
X
To remove the first-aid kit: remove firstaid kit :.
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid
X
To open the side trim panel: turn rotary
knob : 90° in the direction of the arrow
and open side trim panel ;.
kit at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace missing
contents.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 310
Version: 3.0.3.5
Where will I find...?
310
Vehicle tool kit
Notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the
stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor.
Roadside assistance
i Vehicles without a spare wheel are not
equipped at the factory with the tools
needed to change a wheel, e.g. a jack or lug
wrench. Some tools for changing a wheel
are specific to the vehicle. To obtain tools
approved for your vehicle, visit a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Folding the cargo compartment floor up
X
X
Press release handle ; in the direction of
the arrow.
X Lift cargo compartment floor : up by
release handle ;.
Attach hook = to upper seal ? in the
cargo compartment.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 310).
: Jack
; Towing eye
= Ratchet ring spanner
? Alignment bolt
A Fuse allocation chart
B Folding wheel chock
C Lug wrench
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
X
X
Fold out hook = on the underside of the
cargo compartment floor.
Lift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 310).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 311
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
311
X
Turn emergency spare wheel retainer :
counter-clockwise and remove it.
X Remove insert =.
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel ;.
For further information on changing a wheel
and mounting the spare wheel, see
(Y page 316).
; Towing eye
= Lug wrench
? Ratchet ring spanner
A Velcro fastener
B Jack
C Wheel bolts
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle could be equipped with a
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel or the
MOExtended run-flat system(Y page 321).
i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with the MOExtended run-flat
system.
D Folding wheel chock
E Fuse allocation chart
F Stowage well
i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended runflat system are not equipped with the
TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore
recommended that you additionally equip
your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. You can obtain
a TIREFIT kit from an authorized MercedesBenz Center, for example.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can
be found in the stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor.
X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 310).
X Take out the jack.
41 Vehicles
X
Make sure that highway level is
selected41(Y page 189).
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position.
X
Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to P.
X
Switch off the engine.
with air suspension.
Z
Roadside assistance
: Alignment bolt
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
Flat tire
312
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the key from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the key having been
removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 147).
X
Roadside assistance
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 312
Version: 3.0.3.5
All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
they get out of the vehicle.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
area whilst a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
damage caused by driving with extremely low
tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a
damaged wheel.
Do not drive the vehicle under such
circumstances.
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center for assistance or call roadside
assistance.
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X Remove the TIREFIT kit, the accompanying
"max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air
pump from the stowage well underneath
the trunk floor (Y page 310).
i Only operate the electric air pump using
the socket in the footwell of the 2nd row of
seats (Y page 281), even if the ignition is
turned off.
An emergency cut-off ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, power to the
sockets is automatically cut-off. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
TIREFIT kit
Using the TIREFIT kit
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
punctures, particularly those in the tire tread.
You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures
down to -4 ‡ (-20 †).
G Warning
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
X
Affix part : of the sticker within the
driver's field of vision.
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
on the wheel with the defective tire.
G Warning!
Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your
eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly
with clean water.
RChange out of clothing which has come into
contact with TIREFIT immediately.
RIn case of allergic reaction or rash, consult
a physician immediately.
Keep TIREFIT away from children.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 313
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
313
RIf
TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse
your mouth out thoroughly with water and
drink plenty of water.
RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
immediately.
RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
then be removed like a layer of film.
If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with
perchloroethylene.
X
Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty
tire.
X
Make sure pressure release screw F on
pressure gauge G is fully closed.
X
Screw filler hose D onto valve E.
X
Insert connector A into the socket in the
footwell of the 2nd row of seats
(Y page 281).
G Warning!
Comply with the manufacturer's safety
instructions on the sticker on the electric air
pump.
Your vehicle is provided with one of two
different electric air pumps:
RVersion 1: the hose with the pressure
gauge and the cable are behind a flap.
RVersion 2: the pressure gauge is in the
electric air pump.
TIREFIT kit version 1
! None of the other sockets or cigarette
lighters are designed for operating the
electric air pump.
X
X
Open flap ;.
Pull connector A with the cable and hose
B out of the housing.
X Screw hose B onto flange C of TIREFIT
sealant filler bottle :.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head
downwards into recess = of the electric
air pump.
X
Turn the key to position 1(Y page 147) in
the ignition lock.
X
Press on/off switch ? on the electric air
pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The
tire is inflated.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the electric pump
during this phase.
Z
Roadside assistance
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 314
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
314
X
Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
The tire should then have attained a
pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G Warning
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
Roadside assistance
longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The air pump can be operated again once
it has cooled down.
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved, see
(Y page 315).
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved, see
(Y page 315).
TIREFIT kit version 2
X
Pull connector ? with the cable and hose
A out of the housing.
X Screw hose A onto flange B of TIREFIT
sealant filler bottle :.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head
downwards into recess ; of the electric
air pump.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert connector ? into the socket in the
footwell of the 2nd row of seats
(Y page 281).
! None of the other sockets or cigarette
lighters are designed for operating the
electric air pump.
X
Turn the key to position 1(Y page 147) in
the ignition lock.
X Press on/off switch = on the electric air
pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The
tire is inflated.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the electric pump
during this phase.
G Warning
The air hose can become hot during inflation.
Please exercise appropriate caution.
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The air pump can be operated again once
it has cooled down.
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has been achieved, see
(Y page 315).
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 315
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
Tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi) is not achieved
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:
X Press the on/off switch on the electric air
pump to 0.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve.
X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X Pump up the tire again.
X
Stow the TIREFIT kit and the electric air
pump.
X Pull away immediately.
G Warning
Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
operate at higher speeds.
The sticker must be attached on the
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
by the driver.
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
X
G Warning
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) cannot be achieved, the tire
is too badly damaged to be repaired reliably
using TIREFIT.
In this case TIREFIT cannot seal the tire
properly.
Do not drive any further.
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center for assistance or call roadside
assistance.
Tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi) is achieved
G Warning
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below
130 kPa (1.3 bar/26 psi) do not continue to
drive the vehicle.
Park your vehicle safely away from the
roadway and contact the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or roadside
assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced.
X
Correct the tire inflation pressure if it is at
least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/26 psi) (for values
see Tire and Load Information placard on
the driver's side B-pillar or tire inflation
pressure table inside the fuel filler flap).
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on
the electric air pump.
X
Press the on/off switch on the electric air
pump to 0.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X Remove the TIREFIT kit from the wheel.
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the electric air pump.
G Warning
The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
caution to avoid burning yourself when
detaching the electric air pump.
! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of
the filler hose. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag which contained the TIREFIT kit.
Z
Roadside assistance
If after five minutes a pressure of 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved, see
(Y page 315).
315
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 316
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
316
X
Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
years at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Changing a wheel and mounting the
spare wheel
Preparing the vehicle
G Warning!
TIREFIT kit version 1
Roadside assistance
X
To reduce the tire pressure (version 1):
open pressure release screw F on
pressure gauge G.
TIREFIT kit version 2
E Pressure release button
F Pressure gauge
X
To reduce the tire pressure (version 2):
press pressure release button E on the
filler hose.
X
Stow the TIREFIT kit and the electric air
pump.
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
tire changed there.
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as
possible at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
H Environmental note
Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The wheel and tire size of the emergency
spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of
the damaged wheel. When using an
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the
handling characteristics of the vehicle may
change.
Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that
differs in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel of a differing size briefly and do not
switch off ESP®.
When using an emergency spare wheel, you
must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
G Warning!
Have the emergency spare wheel/spare
wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as
possible at a qualified specialist workshop
which has the necessary specialist knowledge
and tools to carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Vehicles without an emergency spare
wheel/spare wheel are not equipped with
wheel-changing tools at the factory. For
more information on which tools are
required to perform a wheel change on your
vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, alignment bolt or
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 317
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
317
lug wrench, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
X
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
Fold out lower plate ;.
X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
openings in base plate =.
X
Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
G Warning
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
slight inclines/declines. The vehicle could
otherwise fall off the jack and injure you or
others.
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 310).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
X
On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
42 Vehicles
with an emergency spare wheel.
Z
Roadside assistance
Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 311).
X If a trailer is coupled to the vehicle,
uncouple it.
X Remove the following items from the
stowage well under the trunk floor:
Rthe emergency spare wheel42
Rthe lug wrench
Rthe folding wheel chock
Rthe jack
Rthe ratchet ring spanner
Rthe alignment bolt
Rthe wheel bolts for the emergency spare
wheel
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 318
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
318
X
On downhill gradients: place chocks or
other suitable items in front of the wheels
of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
Roadside assistance
G Warning
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
which has been specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jacking points built into both
sides of the vehicle. The jack saddle must be
placed centrally under the jacking point. The
jack must always be vertical when in use,
especially on inclines or declines.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
Always firmly engage the parking brake and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizable objects before raising the vehicle with
the jack. Do not disengage the parking brake
while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X
Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
The jacking points for the jack are located
behind the wheel housings of the front wheels
and in front of the wheel housings of the rear
wheels (arrows).
G Warning
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jacking points. The jack
saddle must be placed centrally under the
jacking point.
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
jacking point, the vehicle can fall off the jack
and seriously or fatally injure you or others.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
X
Take ratchet ring spanner out of the vehicle
tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of
the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 319
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
319
Removing a wheel
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt
completely.
X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
X
X
Make sure that the base of the jack is
positioned directly under the jacking point.
Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until jack =
sits completely on jacking point ; and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X Turn ratchet ring spanner ? until the tire
is raised a maximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm)
off the ground.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Z
Roadside assistance
X
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 320
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
320
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight.
Lowering the vehicle
Roadside assistance
X
1 Wheel bolts for 19", 20" and 21" wheels
2 Wheel bolts for the "Minispare"
Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the
hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
AB are visible.
X Turn the ratchet ring spanner until the
vehicle is once again standing firmly on the
ground.
X Place the jack to one side.
emergency spare wheel
! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using
other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare"
emergency spare wheel could damage the
brake system.
G Warning
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
X
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked
immediately after a wheel is changed. The
wheels could come loose if they are not
tightened to a torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position and
store it together with the rest of the vehicle
tool kit in the cargo compartment.
Vehicles with an emergency spare wheel:
X
X
Slide the emergency spare wheel onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
Wrap the faulty wheel in the protective film
included with the emergency spare wheel
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 321
Version: 3.0.3.5
Flat tire
and transport the wheel in the cargo
compartment.
or
X
Depending on the size of the wheel, you
may also be able to secure the faulty wheel
in the emergency spare wheel well. In this
case, you must remove the stowage tray
from the emergency spare wheel well and
store it securely in the cargo compartment.
i When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system or the tire pressure
monitor cannot function reliably. Only
restart the tire pressure loss warning
system/tire pressure monitor when the
defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all
mounted wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors and the defective
wheel should no longer be in the vehicle.
G Warning!
The handling characteristics of your vehicle
deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
Rwhen
cornering
braking
Rwhen accelerating rapidly
Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid
sudden changes in direction and sudden
acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles
(i.e. curbs, potholes), and driving off-road.
This is particularly the case when the vehicle
is heavily laden.
The maximum permissible distance that can
be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large
extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It
can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy
cargo, sudden changes in direction, the road
surface condition, outside temperature, etc.,
or further if you drive carefully and
conservatively.
Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if:
Rwhen
Ryou
MOExtended run-flat system
The MOExtended run-flat system allows you
to drive on even if there is a complete loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
The MOExtended run-flat system may only be
used in conjunction with the activated tire
pressure loss warning system or with the
activated tire pressure monitor.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the
cargo in the vehicle. You can drive 50 miles
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially laden and
18 miles (30 km) if it is fully laden.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph(80 km/h).
321
hear banging noises.
vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
Rthe
RESP®
is intervening constantly.
are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in run-flat mode, you must have
the wheel(s) checked for damage at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. The faulty tire
must be replaced in every case.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthere
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you only use tires marked
MOExtended and of the specified size for
the vehicle.
i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended runflat system are not equipped with TIREFIT
Z
Roadside assistance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
322
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 322
Version: 3.0.3.5
Battery
kit at the factory. It is therefore
recommended that you additionally equip
your vehicle with the TIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat
properties, e.g. winter tires. You can obtain
a TIREFIT kit from an authorized MercedesBenz Center, for example.
Battery acid is caustic.
Avoid contact with the skin,
eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face
mask.
Immediately rinse acid
splashes off with clean
water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Battery
Roadside assistance
Important safety notes
In order for the battery to achieve the
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged.
Keep children away.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Observe the service intervals in the Service
Booklet or for further information consult a
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have the battery charge checked more
frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for
a lengthy period.
To prevent damage from corrosion, only
replace the battery with one that has a central
ventilation cover.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a
long period of time.
G Warning!
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion
Fire, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Observe this Operator's
Manual.
H Environmental note
Do not dispose of batteries in the household
rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner. Take
them to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or to a special collection point for old
batteries.
G Warning
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 323
Version: 3.0.3.5
Battery
G Warning
Do not place any metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Take care that you do not become statically
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials.
Never touch the battery first. First, touch the
outside body of the vehicle in order to release
any possible electrostatic charges.
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark
formation.
! Switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey before disconnecting the
terminal clamps from the battery. On
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure that
the ignition is switched off. Check that all
the indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster are off. You may otherwise destroy
electronic components, such as the
alternator.
! Like other batteries, the vehicle battery
may discharge over time if you do not use
the vehicle. In this case, have the battery
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center. You can also charge the
battery with a charger recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information.
The battery, breather hose and cover of the
positive terminal clamp must be installed
securely during operation.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
323
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not
carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g.
removing, charging or replacing. Always have
this work performed at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,
e.g. if the battery has been reconnected,
you must carry out the following tasks:
the clock (Y page 222)
On vehicles with COMAND and a
navigation system, the clock is set
automatically.
Rreset the sliding sunroof (Y page 90)
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 108)
Rreset the side windows (Y page 87)
Rset
Charging the battery
G Warning
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during
charging and cause explosions that may
result in paint damage, corrosion or personal
injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
information and availability.
Charge the battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
G Warning!
There is a risk of acid burns during the
charging process due to the gases which
escape from the battery. Do not lean over the
battery during the charging process.
Z
Roadside assistance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
324
Battery
G Warning!
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.
! Only charge the installed battery with a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
chargers allow the battery to be charged
while still installed.
! Only use battery chargers with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
Roadside assistance
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 325).
X Open the hood (Y page 294).
X Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and earth point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in
the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 325).
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 324
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 325
Version: 3.0.3.5
Jump-starting
325
Jump-starting
G Warning
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may
damage the catalytic converter43 and create a risk of fire.
Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.
Make sure the jumper cables are not damaged.
Make sure the jumper cables are not touching any other metal objects when they are
connected to the battery.
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle
or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has
cooled down44 .
X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
If you jump-start using a battery with higher voltage, it may damage the electrical systems
of the vehicle.
X Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
X Make sure that the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley
or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery a little.
i Jumper cables and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
X
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
43 Only
44 Only
vehicles with a gasoline engine.
vehicles with a gasoline engine.
Z
Roadside assistance
Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 326
Version: 3.0.3.5
Jump-starting
326
X
Roadside assistance
Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower etc.).
X Open the hood (Y page 294).
Position number C identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device.
! Never swap the terminal connections.
X
X
Lift up cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery C
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Remove cover A from earth point B.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery C to earth point B of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery C first.
X Start the engine.
X First remove the jumper cable from earth point B and negative terminal ?, then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the battery on
your own vehicle first.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 327
Version: 3.0.3.5
Towing and tow-starting
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G Warning
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid
towing bar if:
Rthe engine will not run.
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system.
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. You will then need considerably
more force to steer and to brake and the
brake pedal travel will be longer. If necessary,
depress the brake pedal with maximum force.
Before towing away, make sure that the
steering can be moved and is not locked.
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight of your
vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
! You may only tow the vehicle a maximum
distance of 30 miles (50 km). A towing
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be
exceeded.
For towing distances over 30 miles
(50 km), the vehicle must loaded onto a
transporter.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing.
Excessive tractive power could otherwise
damage the vehicles.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
327
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
use the key instead of the Start/Stop
button. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission may shift to position P when
the driver's or front-passenger door are
opened, which could lead to damage to the
transmission.
! Vehicles with differential locks: make
sure that the differential locks are in
automatic mode. When towing, the
differential locks must not be switched on
by hand. This could otherwise damage the
transmission.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with the front or rear axle raised. This could
otherwise damage the transmission.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it carried away on a transporter
or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged. You will otherwise not be able to:
the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Rshift the automatic transmission to
position N.
Rturn
i Switch off the automatic locking feature
before the vehicle is towed (Y page 79).
Otherwise, you could lock yourself out of
the vehicle when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible
secure the towing device on the trailer tow
hitch (Y page 209).
Z
Roadside assistance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 328
Version: 3.0.3.5
Towing and tow-starting
328
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 310).
G Warning
The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
particularly careful when removing the rear
cover.
Roadside assistance
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
are located in the bumpers. They are at the
front and at the rear, under the covers.
G Warning
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing, do the
following:
X
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards, in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Take cover : off the opening.
Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the
stop and tighten it.
X
Removing the towing eye
X
Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on
the ground
When having your vehicle towed, observe the
important safety notes (Y page 327).
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 0 in the
ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 147).
X Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Release the parking brake.
X Switch on the hazard warning flashers
(Y page 117).
X Leave the SmartKey inserted in the ignition
lock in position 2.
i When towing with the hazard warning
flashers switched on, use the combination
switch as usual to signal in which direction
you are changing. In this case, only the
indicator lamps for the direction of travel
flash. When you reset the combination
switch, the hazard warning flashers start
flashing again.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 329
Version: 3.0.3.5
Fuses
Transporting the vehicle
The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be
used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or
transporter if you wish to transport it.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position N.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey.
X Secure the vehicle.
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
such as axle or steering components.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised,
as doing so will damage the transmission.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear
axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported
on a truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical
system
If the battery is defective, the automatic
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when
jump-starting (Y page 325).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
or trailer.
329
Recovering a vehicle that has become
stuck
! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in a
straight line when pulling out a vehicle that
has become stuck. Excessive tractive
power could damage the vehicles.
If the drive wheels have become stuck in
loose or muddy ground, pull the vehicle out
with extreme caution, particularly if it is
laden.
Never attempt to recover a stuck vehicle with
a trailer attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible
using the tracks it made when it became
stuck.
Fuses
Important safety notes
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their functions
will fail.
G Warning
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in
question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
determined and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart. An authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to
advise you.
i If a fuse has blown, visit a breakdown
service or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
Roadside assistance
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 330
Version: 3.0.3.5
Fuses
330
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Otherwise, components or
systems could be damaged.
Before changing a fuse
Roadside assistance
X
Park the vehicle and apply the parking
brake.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
X
To open: pull cover : outwards in the
direction of the arrow and remove it.
X
To close: clip in cover : on the front of
the dashboard.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
Rfuse box on the front-passenger side of the
dashboard
Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
Rfuse box in the cargo compartment on the
right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
The fuse allocation chart is located in the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 310) in the stowage
compartment under the trunk floor.
Fuse box in the cockpit
! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
dashboard. You could damage the
dashboard or the cover.
Fuse box in the engine compartment
X
Open the hood (Y page 294).
Example shows GL 450 (GL 350 BlueTEC, GL 550
is similar)
X
Remove any existing moisture from the
fuse box using a dry cloth.
X To open: open clamps ;.
X Fold up cover : and remove it towards the
front of the vehicle.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
lying correctly in cover :.
X Insert cover : at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 331
Version: 3.0.3.5
Fuses
331
! The cover must be seated properly,
otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the
function of the fuses.
X
Close the hood (Y page 295).
Fuse box in the cargo compartment
Open the tailgate.
Roadside assistance
X
X
To open: insert a suitable object, e.g. a
coin, into the slot of release button : on
the cover.
X Turn release button : 90° in the direction
of the arrow.
X Open cover ; downwards.
Engine emergency off
If the engine cannot be switched off as
described, observe the following procedure:
X
Take the fuse allocation chart out of the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 310).
X Open the fuse box in the engine
compartment (Y page 330).
X Remove fuse 120. The installation location
of the fuse is described in the fuse
allocation chart.
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
332
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 332
Version: 3.0.3.5
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 333
Version: 3.0.3.5
333
Vehicle equipment ............................
Important safety notes ....................
Directives to be observed ................
Maintenance and care of wheels
and tires .............................................
Tire pressures ...................................
Maximum tire pressures ..................
Loading the vehicle ..........................
Maximum tire load ............................
Direction of rotation .........................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ..........................................
Interchanging the wheels ................
Tire labeling .......................................
Definitions for tires and loading ......
Wheel/tire combinations .................
334
334
335
335
336
344
344
348
348
348
350
350
354
357
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
334
Important safety notes
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Important safety notes
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 334
Version: 3.0.3.5
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you require information on tested and
recommended tires and wheels for summer
and winter driving. Advice on purchasing and
caring for tires is also available there.
G Warning
Replace rims or tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the
tires may no longer be correct.
G Warning
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
G Warning
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle appears
unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
G Warning
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires,
wheels and accessories which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically
for your vehicle. These tires have been
specially adapted for use with the control
systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are
marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (AMG)
Only use Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
tires on wheels that have been specifically
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you use other tires, wheels and
accessories, Mercedes-Benz cannot
accept any responsibility for damage that
may result from this. Further information
about tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Further information about tires and
wheels can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 335
Version: 3.0.3.5
Maintenance and care of wheels and tires
Directives to be observed
ROnly
mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at
moderate speeds for the first 60 miles
(100 km) as they only reach their full
performance after this distance.
RDo not use tires until they are excessively
worn as the tire traction on wet road
surfaces decreases significantly when the
tread depth is less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
RIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
pressure and adjust it if necessary.
parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over curbs, speed humps or similar
elevations, try to do so slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,
particularly the sidewalls, can get
damaged.
RWhen
Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire
pressure.
RRegularly check the tire tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the whole
width of the tire (Y page 335). If necessary,
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to
inspect the inner side of the tire surface.
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
install anything on the valve (such as tire
pressure monitoring systems) other than
the standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle.
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires
including the emergency spare wheel or the
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,
and correct the pressure as necessary
(Y page 336).
Service life of tires
The service life of tires depends on the
following factors amongst other things:
Rdriving
Maintenance and care of wheels and
tires
Checking wheels and tires
G Warning
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
the tires have sustained damage, replace
them.
RRegularly
check the wheels and tires of
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,
punctures, tears, bulges on tires and
deformation or severe corrosion on
wheels), at least once a month, as well as
after driving off-road or on rough roads.
style
pressure
Rmileage
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel.
Rtire
Tire tread
G Warning
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
the tread wear indicators (TWI) become
visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
recommend that you do not allow your tires
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Z
335
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
336
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 336
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Do not use tires until they are excessively
worn as the tire traction on wet road surfaces
decreases significantly when the tread depth
is less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
Tires and wheels
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned over the tire
tread. They are visible as soon as a tread
depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm) is
reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn
that it must be replaced.
The recommended tread depth for summer
tires is at least 1/8 in (3 mm). The
recommended tread depth for winter tires is
at least 1/6 in (4 mm).
Bar marking : for tread wear is integrated
into the tire tread.
Storing tires
Store tires that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
Cleaning tires
! Do not use a high pressure jet with
circular jet nozzles (concentrated-power
jets) to clean the tires. The high pressure
of the water jet could damage the tires.
Always replace damaged tires.
Tire pressures
Tire pressure information
G Warning
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
You will find a table of recommended tire
pressures on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar on the
driver's side (Y page 344). You will find a
table of tire pressures for various operating
conditions on the inside of your vehicle's fuel
filler flap.
To test tire pressure, use a suitable pressure
gauge. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
tire pressure. On vehicles installed with the
electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
G Warning!
Should the tire pressure drop repeatedly:
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 337
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
Rcheck
337
the tire for foreign bodies.
Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
sure that only a valve cap approved
by Mercedes-Benz is installed on the tire
valve.
tire pressure that is too low have a negative
effect on vehicle safety, which could lead you
to cause an accident.
Rmake
i The specifications given on the following
Tire and Loading Information placard are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the
data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
of your vehicle.
You will find recommended tire pressure
specifications : for tires in a cold state and
for a fully loaded vehicle on the Tire and
Loading Information placard. The tire
pressure specifications apply to tires which
are installed at the factory.
Important notes on tire pressures
G Warning
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, check
the tires for punctures from foreign objects
and/or whether air is leaking from the valves
or from around the rim.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is
dependent on the driving speed and the load.
If you wish to drive at high speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher when this is allowed,
use the tire pressure table on the inside of the
fuel filler flap to set the correct tire pressures
when the wheels are cold. If the tire pressure
is not set correctly, this can lead to an
excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss
of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Ride comfort may be affected if the tire
pressure is adjusted to the recommended
value for speeds of over 100 mph
(160 km/h).
Make sure that the tire pressure for normal
speeds is adopted again.
Z
Tires and wheels
Only correct tire pressures when the tires are
cold. The tires are cold when the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours or driven
for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The tire
temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and
the tire load. If the tire temperature changes
by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure
of warm tires and only correct the tire
pressure if it is too low for the current
operating conditions. If you check the tire
pressure when the tires are warm, the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
specifications for cold tires on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
338
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 338
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
Additional specifications of tire pressure
values for loads can also be found on the tire
pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
The tire pressure for emergency spare wheels
can be found:
Ron
the yellow sticker on the wheel rim of
the emergency spare wheel
Rin the "Tires" section (Y page 357) in this
Operator's Manual
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar
Tires and wheels
i The specifications shown in the examples
in the tire pressure tables are only
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the
data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
can be found on your vehicle's tire pressure
table.
Tire pressure table with tire sizes (example)
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim
diameter instead of the complete tire size,
e.g. R18. The rim diameter is a component of
the tire size and can be read from the tire
sidewall (Y page 351).
The tire pressures in the tire pressure table
on the inside of the fuel filler flap are valid for
all approved tires installed at the factory,
unless stated otherwise.
i For vehicles towing a trailer, the fully
laden value on the tire inflation pressure
label located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap is valid for the rear axle.
Tire pressure too low or too high
The tire pressure table is valid for all approved tires
installed at the factory (example)
If the tire pressure precedes a tire size, the
tire pressure specification is only valid for this
tire size. The vehicle loading conditions
"partially laden" or "fully laden" are specified
using a differing number of persons and
luggage in the table. The actual number of
seats may differ from this.
Underinflated tires
G Warning
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 339
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
Rwear
excessively and/or unevenly
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rfail from being overheated
Radversely affect handling
Overinflated tires can:
G Warning
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can:
Radversely
affect handling
excessively and/or unevenly
Rbe more likely to become damaged
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Rwear
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
G Warning
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Check the tire pressure at least once a month.
Only check and correct tire pressures when
the tires are cold (Y page 336).
Checking the tire pressure manually
In order to determine and adjust the tire
pressures, proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish
to check.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.
X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value (Y page 336).
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X Repeat the steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
Important safety notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
Z
Tires and wheels
Underinflated tires can:
339
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
340
Tire pressures
message will appear in the multifunction
display.
G Warning!
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 340
Version: 3.0.3.5
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one
or more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard or on the tire inflation
pressure label.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked at least once a month when cold.
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
inflation pressure as specified on
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver’s door B-pillar
or
Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
the inside of the fuel filler flap
G Warning!
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire
inflation pressure according to the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
more than one tire cannot be detected by the
tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure loss warning system is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
steering maneuvers.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad
conditions are wintry.
are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
high rates of acceleration).
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load or a load
on the roof.
Ryou
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
X Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions,
using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap.
X Observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 336).
G Warning!
The tire pressure loss warning system can
only give reliable warnings if you have set the
correct tire pressure.
If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these
incorrect values will be monitored.
A tire with insufficient pressure results in
vehicle instability when driving, thus
increasing the risk of an accident.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 341
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
X
Make sure that the key is in position 2
(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
X Press and hold the V or U button on
the multifunction steering wheel until the
standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 218).
X Press the * or & button until the
Run Flat Indicator Active Menu: RButton message appears in the
multifunction display.
X Press the reset button (Y page 28) on the
instrument cluster.
The Restart Run Flat Indicator?
Yes Cancel message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the W button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the X button.
or
X
Wait until the Restart Run Flat
Indicator? Yes Cancel message
disappears.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitoring system
(USA only)
Important safety information
The tire pressure monitoring system consists
of sensors installed in the vehicle wheels that
monitor the air pressure in all four tires. The
tire pressure monitoring system warns you
when the pressure in one or more tires
decreases. It only works when the
341
corresponding sensors are installed on all the
wheels.
The tire pressure monitor informs you via a
yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster
about pressure loss or if the system is
malfunctioning. Whether the warning lamp
flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire
pressure is too low or the tire pressure
monitor is malfunctioning:
RIf the warning lamp is lit up constantly, one
or more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
RIf the warning lamp flashes for 60 seconds
and is then lit constantly, the tire pressure
monitor is malfunctioning.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the tire and loading
information table on the driver's door B-pillar
or the tire inflation pressure table on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the tire and loading information table or
the tire inflation pressure table, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor
(TPMS). An indicator lamp lights up if one or
more of your tires are significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure indicator lamp lights up, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance and it is the driver's
Z
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
342
Tire pressures
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level at which the low tire
pressure indicator lamp of the TPMS lights up.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When the
system detects a malfunction, the indicator
lamp will flash for approximately 1 minute and
then remain illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is lit, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction indicator after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
i If the tire pressure monitoring system
malfunctions, it may take up to 10 minutes
before the malfunction is displayed to you
by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing
for 60 seconds and then remaining lit.
When the error has been rectified, the tire
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few
minutes of driving.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After a few minutes
of driving, the current tire pressure of each
tire is shown in the multifunction display.
i The tire pressure values in the on-board
computer may deviate from the inflation
pressure as measured using a tire pressure
checker at the filling station. The tire
pressures shown in the on-board computer
refer to pressures at sea level. At high
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 342
Version: 3.0.3.5
altitudes, a tire pressure checker will
display a higher tire pressure than the onboard computer. In this case do not reduce
the tire pressure.
i If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
headphones, a two-way radio) is operated
in or near the vehicle, this can lead to the
function of the tire pressure monitor being
impaired.
i This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must withstand any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Checking the tire pressure
electronically
X
Make sure that the key is in position
2(Y page 147) in the ignition lock.
X Press and hold the V or U button on
the multifunction steering wheel until the
standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 218).
X Press and hold the & or * button
until the current tire pressure of each tire
is shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
20 minutes and subsequently you have not
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h), the
Tire pressure displayed after
driving for a few minutes message is
shown.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as it is not possible to
allocate tire pressure values to individual
wheel positions, the Tire Pressure
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 343
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire pressures
Monitor Active message appears instead
of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures
are already being monitored.
i If a spare wheel is installed, the system
may continue to show the tire pressure of
the wheel that has been removed for a few
minutes. If this occurs, note that the value
displayed for the position where the
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel is
installed is not the same as the current tire
pressure for the spare wheel.
TPMS warning messages
If the TPMS detects a significant pressure
loss on one or more tires, a warning message
is shown in the multifunction display. In
addition, a warning tone sounds and the tire
pressure warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
Each tire in which a significant pressure loss
has been detected is highlighted with a red
triangle.
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring
system
G Warning
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
inflation pressure to the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You might lose control over the vehicle.
When you restart the TPMS, all existing
warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The currently set tire
pressures are adopted as the specified values
for monitoring.
The TPMS must be restarted when you set the
tire pressure to a new value (as a result of
changed handling or load characteristics, for
example). The TPMS then monitors the new
tire pressure values.
Restart the TPMS after the tire pressure has
been set, as desired, according to the
recommended values for the driving
conditions (Y page 336). Only correct tire
pressures on cold tires. Comply with the tire
pressures recommended on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side. Additional tire pressure
values for driving at high speeds or with heavy
loads can be found in the tire pressure table
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
X Make sure that the tire pressure is set
properly in all four tires.
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press and hold the V or U button on
the multifunction steering wheel until the
standard display appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 218).
X Press and hold the & or * button
until the tire pressure of all tires or the
Tire pressure displayed after
driving for a few minutes. message
is shown.
X Press the reset button on the instrument
cluster (Y page 28).
The Restart tire pressure monitor?
Yes Cancel message appears in the
multifunction display.
X To confirm selection: press the W
button.
The Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted message appears in the
multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
confirms that the current tire pressure
values are within the specified range. The
new tire pressure values are then accepted
as reference values and monitored.
X To cancel restart: press the X button.
i If the positions of the wheels on the
vehicle have been changed, the tire
pressure may be shown in the wrong
position briefly. This will be corrected after
driving for a few minutes and the tire
pressure will be displayed in the correct
position.
Z
343
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
344
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 344
Version: 3.0.3.5
Loading the vehicle
Maximum tire pressures
G Warning
Tires and wheels
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
: Maximum permitted tire pressure
(example)
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the
values in the illustration.
When adjusting the tire pressures always
observe the recommended tire pressure for
your vehicle (Y page 336).
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G Warning
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. the
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum possible number of
occupants and the maximum possible
vehicle load. It also contains details of the
tire sizes and corresponding pressures
for tires installed at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 345
Version: 3.0.3.5
Loading the vehicle
345
weight of occupants and luggage must
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the specified
value.
Number of seats
i Details that are shown as examples on
Tire and Loading Information placard are
only examples. The number of seats is
vehicle-specific and can differ from the
details shown. The number of seats in your
vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Tires and wheels
: B-pillar, driver's side
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
i Details that are shown as examples on the
Tire and Loading Information placard are
only examples. The maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating is vehiclespecific and may differ from that which is
illustrated. You can find the valid maximum
permissible gross vehicle weight rating for
your vehicle on the Tire and Loading
Information placard.
X
Maximum number of seats : determines the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on Tire and Loading Information
placard.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
gives you details on maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating :: "The gross
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
346
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 346
Version: 3.0.3.5
Loading the vehicle
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining the maximum cargo
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code
of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be traveling
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
For reasons of safety, that weight must not exceed the available cargo and luggage cargo
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow a trailer behind your vehicle, the load on the
trailer is transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (Y page 348).
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a cargo limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
always use the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 345).
Step 1
Step 2
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
5
3
1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 347
Version: 3.0.3.5
Loading the vehicle
Step 3
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
Weight of the
occupants
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1:
200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2:
190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Permissible cargo
and trailer load/
noseweight
(maximum gross
vehicle weight rating
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
1500 lbs
(680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg)
= 750 lbs
(340 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg)
= 960 lbs
(435 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs
(612 kg)
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 348).
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 344).
Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of
the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer
load/noseweight (if applicable) must not
exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible load that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Z
347
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
348
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually
approximately 8 % - 15 % of the gross weight
of the trailer and its cargo.
Maximum tire load
G Warning
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 348
Version: 3.0.3.5
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the
values in the illustration.
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permitted weight for which the tire is
approved.
Further information on tire loads
(Y page 350).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
observed.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
You may mount an emergency spare wheel/
spare wheel against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Overview of tire quality standards
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
are U.S. government specifications. Their
purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
reliable information on tire performance data.
Tire manufacturers grade tires using three
performance factors: tread wear :, tire
traction ; and heat resistance =. All tires
sold in North America are provided with the
corresponding quality class mark on the
sidewall of the tire, even though these
regulations do not apply to Canada.
i The actual values for tires are specific to
each vehicle and may deviate from the
values in the illustration.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 349
Version: 3.0.3.5
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between the
tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
For example:
Tread wear Traction
Temperature
200
A
AA
All passenger car tires must conform to U.S.
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government test track. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government test track as
a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
G Warning
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
be substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
extreme caution.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tire
tread depth of 1/6 in (4 mm) for all four winter
tires (Y page 171) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow covered
surfaces in comparison to summer tires. The
braking distance is still much further than on
surfaces that are not icy or covered with
snow. Take appropriate care when driving.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz warranty conditions.
Temperature
G Warning
Traction
G Warning
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
349
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
Z
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
350
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 350
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire labeling
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
The following markings are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation)
and the manufacturer's name:
Interchanging the wheels
G Warning
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
tire rotation is not possible.
Tires and wheels
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle’s rims.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or earlier if tire wear
requires. Do not change the direction of
wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is rotated. Check the tire pressures.
Information on changing a wheel and
mounting the spare wheel (Y page 316).
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 354)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 353)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 348)
? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 344)
A Manufacturer
B Tire material (Y page 354)
C Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed index (Y page 351)
D Load index (Y page 353)
E Tire name
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 351
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire labeling
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed index
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in percent
= Tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load bearing index
B Speed index
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size
description (as shown above): passenger
vehicle tires according to European
manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description:
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: light
truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency spare wheels at high tire
pressure, only for temporary use in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is relationship
between tire height and tire width and is
specified in percent. The aspect ratio is
351
calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires. "D" represents
diagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
specified in inches (in).
Load bearing index: load bearing index A
is a numerical code that specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
G Warning
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
sudden tire failure may be the result which
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with rims and
tires having the same specifications
(designation, manufacturer and type) as
shown on the original part.
G Warning
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Example:
The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to a
maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that the
tire can carry. For further information on the
maximum tire load in kilograms and pounds,
see (Y page 348).
Z
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
352
Tire labeling
For further information on the load bearing
index, see load index (Y page 353).
Speed index: speed index B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
G Warning
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
Regardless of the speed index always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 352
Version: 3.0.3.5
Summer tires
The service specifications consists of load
bearing index A and speed index B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service
specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
order to find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed index in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this
example, "97Y" is the service specification.
The letter "Y" represents the speed index
and the maximum speed of the tire is
limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).
REvery tire that has a maximum speed above
186 mph (300 km/h) must have "ZR" in the
size description and the service
specification must be given in brackets.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed
index "(Y)" shows that the maximum speed
of the tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h).
Ask the tire manufacturer to find out the
maximum speed.
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
All-weather tires and winter tires
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Index
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Q M+S45 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
T M+S45
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
H M+S45 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
V M+S45
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally,
tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
in the size description depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
45 or
M+Si for winter tires.
Speed rating
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires that have the M+S
identification offer the driving
characteristics of winter tires. Winter tires
have, in addition to the M+S identification,
the i snow flake symbol on the tire
sidewall. Tires with this identification fulfill
the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
regarding the tire traction on snow and
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 353
Version: 3.0.3.5
Tire labeling
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
The speed index of tires installed at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed index as specified in the "Tires" section
(Y page 357) for your vehicle, e.g. when
buying new tires.
More information on reading the tire data can
be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. at an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
RLight
load: represents a light load tire
D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
RC,
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every new
tire manufacturer or retreader has to imprint
a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
produced.
Load index
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers to inform
purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and date of manufacture A.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed index B (Y page 351) on
the sidewall of the tire.
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code:
manufacturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
Further information about retreaded tires
(Y page 334).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Z
Tires and wheels
have been especially developed for driving
on snow.
353
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
354
Definitions for tires and loading
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
Characteristics of the tire
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 354
Version: 3.0.3.5
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the United States Department of
Transportation.
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants
The number of occupants for which the
vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. The quality
grading assessment is made by the
manufacturer following specifications from
the U.S. government. The quality grade of a
tire is imprinted on the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
This information describes the tire cord and
the number of layers in sidewall : and under
tire tread ;.
Definitions for tires and loading
Structure and condition of the tire
Describes the number of layers or the number
of rubber-coated belts in the tire tread and
the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
The recommended tire pressure for your
vehicle under normal driving conditions. You
will find the recommendation on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of your vehicle. The
recommended tire pressure provides the best
balance between handling characteristics,
ride comfort and wear. Additional information
on particular driving conditions is located on
the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed
on the vehicle or not.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 355
Version: 3.0.3.5
Definitions for tires and loading
Wheel rim
The part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.
355
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Maximum weight of the laden vehicle
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Speed index
The speed index is part of the tire
identification. Specifies the speed range for
which the tire is approved.
The maximum weight is the sum of the
unladen weight of the vehicle, the weight of
the accessories, the maximum load and the
weight of the optional equipment installed at
the factory.
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is the
equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire
pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the
equivalent of 1 bar.
Load index
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The GTW is the weight of a trailer including
the weight of the load, luggage, accessories
etc. on the trailer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight if
applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
as specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories,
occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle
In addition to the load bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
of the tire. This specifies the load bearing
capacity more precisely.
Unladen weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the airconditioning system and optional equipment
if these are installed on the vehicle, but does
not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum tire load
The maximum tire load in kilograms or
pounds is the maximum weight for which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Z
Tires and wheels
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
356
Definitions for tires and loading
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
Standard unit of measurement for tire
pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
Tires and wheels
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 356
Version: 3.0.3.5
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
force to every square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold. For this,
the vehicle must have been stationary for at
least three hours or not have traveled more
than 1.6 km (1 mile) in this time.
Tire tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Tire bead
The tire bead contains steel wire which is
bound by steel cords that hold the tire on the
wheel rim.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
part and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
These optional extras, such as highperformance brakes, level control, a roof rack
or a high-performance battery, are not
included in the unladen weight and the weight
of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
A unique identification number which can be
used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires,
for example for a product recall, and thus
identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up
of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size,
tire type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
noseweight)
The TWR is the maximum permissible weight
that the ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch
can support.
Wear indicator
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
tire bead.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 357
Version: 3.0.3.5
Wheel/tire combinations
Distribution of the vehicle occupants
Distribution of vehicle occupants over
designated seat positions in a vehicle.
Maximum permissible payload
weight
Nominal load and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the
number of seats in the vehicle.
Wheel/tire combinations
Points to remember
G Warning
Observe the "Important safety information"
(Y page 334).
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires,
wheels and accessories which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically
for your vehicle. These tires have been
specially adapted for use with the control
systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are
marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (AMG)
Only use Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
tires on wheels that have been specifically
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you use other tires, wheels and
accessories, Mercedes-Benz cannot
accept any responsibility for damage that
may result from this. Further information
about tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! If you mount tires other than those tested
and recommended by Mercedes-Benz,
characteristics such as handling, noise
levels and fuel consumption, etc. may be
357
adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimensional
variations could cause the tires to come
into contact with the bodywork and axle
components. This could result in damage
to the tires or the vehicle.
i Further information about tires and
wheels can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The Tire and Load Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures is
attached to the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Further information about driving at high
speeds or driving with vehicle loads that are
lighter than the maximum vehicle load can
be found in the tire pressure table on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. Check tire
pressures regularly, and only when the tires
are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer
in the vehicle document wallet.
Further information on the recommended tire
inflation pressure and on tire pressures for
specific driving conditions, see (Y page 336).
i Notes on the vehicle equipment:
Ralways mount tires of the same size on a
given axle (left/right).
mount the same type of tires on
your vehicle at a given time (summer
tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires).
Ralways
i Vehicles featuring the MOExtended runflat system are not equipped with a TIREFIT
kit.
It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with the
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit is available from any qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The following pages contain information
on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
Winter tires are not available at the factory
Z
Tires and wheels
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
358
Wheel/tire combinations
Tires and wheels
as standard equipment or as an optional
extra.
If you want to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, it may be necessary
to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
size, as the size of the approved winter tires
may differ from the standard tires. This is
dependent on the model and the
equipment installed at the factory.
Tires, wheel rims and further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 358
Version: 3.0.3.5
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 359
Version: 3.0.3.5
Wheel/tire combinations
359
Tires of the same dimensions
R19 BA
R20 BA
R21 BA
GL 350 BlueTEC
GL 450
GL 550
Alloy wheels
Offset
8.5 J x 19 H2
2.20 in (56 mm)
8.5 J x 19 H2
2.20 in (56 mm)
All-weather
tires46, 47
275/55 R19 111 H M+S
275/55 R19 111 H M+S
Winter tires
265/55 R19 109 H
M+Si48
265/55 R19 109 H
M+Si
All-terrain tires46
275/55 R19 111 H M+S48 275/55 R19 111 H M+S
GL 350 BlueTEC49
GL 450
GL 550
Alloy wheels
Offset
8.5 J x 20 H2
2.20 in (56 mm)
8.5 J x 20 H2
2.20 in (56 mm)
All-weather
tires46, 50
275/50 R20 109 H M+S
MOExtended
275/50 R20 109 H M+S
MOExtended
GL 350 BlueTEC
GL 450
GL 550
—
10 J x 21 H2
1.46 in (37 mm)
AMG alloy wheels
Offset
All-weather tires46 —
295/40 R21 111 V XL
M+S
Spare wheel
i Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) are not equipped with
TIREFIT at the factory.
i The GL 350 BlueTEC is not equipped with an emergency spare wheel.
46 Use
of snow chains not permitted.
350 BlueTEC: Canada only.
48 GL 350 BlueTEC (USA only): standard tires without run-flat characteristics. Retrofitting a TIREFIT kit is
recommended.
49 USA only.
50 Tires with run-flat characteristics must only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system or TPMS.
47 GL
Z
Tires and wheels
i BA: Both axles
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
360
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 360
Version: 3.0.3.5
Wheel/tire combinations
i The prescribed tire pressure is also given on a yellow label on the emergency spare wheel.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel51
GL 450
GL 550
R19 Wheels
Offset
Tires
T 165/90 D19 119 M
or
T 165/90 R19 119 M
Tire pressure
420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Tires and wheels
51 Use
4.5 B x 19 H2
1.58 in (40 mm)
of snow chains not permitted.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 361
Version: 3.0.3.5
361
Vehicle equipment ............................
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts .........
Warranty ............................................
Vehicle identification plates ............
Service products and capacities .....
Vehicle data ......................................
362
362
362
363
364
370
Technical data
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
362
Warranty
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of
purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related
systems and functions.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Technical data
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 362
Version: 3.0.3.5
All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply
of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts delivery
centers provide for quick and reliable parts
service.
More than 300,000 different parts are
available for Mercedes-Benz models.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected
to stringent quality inspections. Every part
has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should
therefore be used.
! The use of non-approved parts could
impair the vehicle's safety. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts and approved
conversion parts and accessories for your
vehicle model.
H Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
Always specify the vehicle identification
number and engine number when ordering
52 Only
vehicles with a gasoline engine.
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. You will find
these numbers on your vehicle's
identification plates, for example
(Y page 363).
Warranty
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew
Vehicle Limited Warranty
System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty52
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws ("Lemon
Laws")
Replacement parts and accessories are
subject to the Mercedes-Benz Replacement
Part and Accessory Warranties. You can
obtain these at any Mercedes-Benz Center.
REmission
i Should you lose your Service and
Warranty Information booklet, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 363
Version: 3.0.3.5
Vehicle identification plates
Vehicle identification plates
363
i The data on the type plate is only an
example. This data is vehicle-specific and
can differ from the data given here. The
data that applies to your vehicle can be
found on your vehicle's type plate.
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
and paint code number
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
X
Open the driver's door.
You see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
; Paint code number
= VIN
the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 363)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 364)
In addition to being stamped on the vehicle
identification plate, the vehicle identification
number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle
body. It is located under the right-hand seat
in the second row of seats.
Technical data
Ron
X
Fold carpet : under the right-hand seat
forwards.
You will see the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
; Paint code number
= VIN
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
364
Service products and capacities
Engine number
: Emissions control information label,
including the certification of both federal
and Californian emissions reference
values
; Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and capacities
Technical data
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 364
Version: 3.0.3.5
Important safety notes
Service products include the following:
Rfuels
(e.g. gasoline, diesel)
for exhaust gas aftertreatment
(AdBlue®)
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid
Rwindshield washer fluid
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. You should therefore
only use products that have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Radditives
G Warning
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing and disposing of service
fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger
persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct contact
with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 365
Version: 3.0.3.5
Service products and capacities
365
Capacities
Vehicle model
Capacity
Fuel, coolant,
lubricants etc.
Engine oil and
filter
GL 350 BlueTEC
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
GL 450
GL 550
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
Approved engine
oils
Power steering
All models
Approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
Cooling system
GL 350 BlueTEC
Approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/
Approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) Antifreeze
Tank capacity
All models
Reserve
All models
AdBlue® tank
GL 350 BlueTEC
8.3 US gal (31.7 l)
AdBlue® as per
ISO 22241
Airconditioning
system
All models
—
Refrigerant R134a
and special PAG
lubricant (never
R 12)
Windshield/
headlamp
cleaning
system
All models
7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
MB washer fluid
concentrate53
(Y page 370)
Mixing ratio for
screen wash
(Y page 370)
53 Mixed
26.4 US gal (100.0 l)
Gasoline engines:
premium-grade
Approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l) unleaded gasoline
(at least 91 octane,
average value
between 96 RON/
86 MON)
Diesel engines:
ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR DIESEL
FUEL (ULSD,
maximum sulfur
content 15 ppm)
with water or premixed washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Z
Technical data
GL 450
GL 550
MB Power Steering
Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
366
Service products and capacities
Fuel
Important safety notes
G Warning!
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
and poisonous. They burn violently and can
cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline
! To ensure the longevity and full
Technical data
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 366
Version: 3.0.3.5
performance of the engine, only premiumgrade unleaded gasoline must be used.
If premium-grade unleaded gasoline is
unavailable and regular gasoline is used,
observe the following precautions:
Ronly
fill the fuel tank to half full with
regular unleaded gasoline and add the
rest as soon as possible with premiumgrade unleaded gasoline.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration.
Rwhen the vehicle is carrying a light cargo,
e.g. two passengers without luggage, do
not allow the engine to rev above
3000 rpm.
Rwhen the vehicle is fully loaded or being
operated in mountainous terrain, do not
depress the accelerator pedal further
than 2/3 of the pedal travel.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline engines
Use only premium-grade unleaded gasoline.
The octane number should be at least 91.
Details can be found on the gas pump. The
octane number is the average value of the
Research Octane Number (RON) and Motor
Octane Number (MON): (RON + MON) / 2,
also known as knock resistance.
Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or
unleaded gasoline with additives can be used
if the concentration of the additives in the fuel
does not exceed 10%, e.g.:
REthanol
RTAME
RETBE
RIPA
RTBA
For MTBE, the concentration should not
exceed 15%.
The concentration of methanol in gasoline
including other additives must not exceed 3%.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol
and 90% unleaded petrol can be used.
All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel
requirements, e.g.:
Rknock
resistance
point
Rvapor pressure
Rboiling
Diesel engines – important safety
information
! Only use commercially available ULTRALOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm
MAXIMUM SULFUR) that meets the
ASTM D975 standard. Failure to use
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD)
can severely damage the vehicle's exhaust
gas aftertreatment system.
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene.
Otherwise, the fuel system and the engine
will be damaged. Damage resulting from
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 367
Version: 3.0.3.5
Service products and capacities
the use of gasoline or kerosene is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved flow characteristics is available in
the winter months. Check with your fuel
retailer.
Information on the fuel grade can usually be
found on the gas pump. If the information
cannot be found on the gas pump, ask service
station personnel. For further information,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
Diesel engines – Fuels containing biodiesel (FAME [fatty acid methyl ester])
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of B5
(ULSD with a maximum of up to five percent
by volume biodiesel) for all diesel engines
with common rail direct injection (CDI) and
BlueTEC.
Pure biodiesel and diesel fuels that contain a
higher percentage of biodiesel, e.g. B20, may
cause damage to the fuel system/engine and
are, therefore, not approved.
For further information, please ask the
service station personnel. The label on the
gas pump must indicate clearly that the B5
biodiesel blend meets the ULSD standard. If
the label is not clear, do not refuel the vehicle.
The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
not cover damages caused by the use of fuels
not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel
standards.
367
of carbon deposits, especially on the inlet
valves and in the combustion chamber.
This could lead to engine running problems,
e.g.:
Rwarm-up
hesitation
idle
Rknocking/pinging
Rmisfire
Rpower loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasoline which contains these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved for use in Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
to view a list of approved products. Observe
the instructions for use on the product label.
Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This
causes unnecessary costs and could damage
the engine.
Runstable
! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do
not use fuel additives that are not tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Damage or malfunctions can result that are
not covered:
Rby
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty
an existing Limited Warranty
Rby an extended Limited Warranty
Rby
AdBlue®
Additives in gasoline
Important safety guidelines
One of the major problems in engine design
is the creation of carbon deposits during the
process of burning fuel. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use fuel brands that
have the additives which prevent the build up
of carbon deposits.
If you use fuels without these additives for a
longer period of time, there may be a build up
i For BlueTEC vehicles only.
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic,
colorless, odorless and water-soluble fluid.
! Only use AdBlue® that complies with
ISO 22241. Do not add any special
additives to AdBlue® and do not thin
AdBlue® with water. This could destroy the
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Z
Technical data
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
368
Service products and capacities
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
contact with AdBlue® immediately with
water or remove AdBlue® using a damp
cloth and cold water. If the AdBlue® has
already crystallized, use a sponge and cold
water to clean it. AdBlue® residues
crystallize after time and contaminate the
affected surfaces.
High outside temperatures
If AdBlue® is heated to above 122 ‡ (50 †)
for an extended period of time, e.g. due to
direct sunlight on the AdBlue® tank,
AdBlue® may start to decompose. Ammonia
vapors develop as a result.
G Warning!
Technical data
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 368
Version: 3.0.3.5
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes.
Low outside temperatures
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of
approximately 12 ‡(11 †). The vehicle is
equipped with an AdBlue® preheating system
at the factory. Winter operation can thus be
guaranteed even at temperatures below
12 ‡(–11 †).
Additives
! Use only AdBlue® complying with ISO
22241. Do not use any additives with
AdBlue® and do not thin AdBlue® with
water. This may destroy the BlueTEC
exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Damage resulting from the use of additives
or water is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
Purity
Assuring the purity of AdBlue® is particularly
important with respect to avoiding
malfunctions in the exhaust gas
aftertreatment system.
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank,
e.g. during repair work, it must not be
returned to the tank. The purity of the fluid
can no longer be guaranteed.
! Impurities in AdBlue®, e.g. due to other
service products, cleaning agents or dust,
lead to increased emission values, system
malfunctions, catalytic converter damage
or damage to the BlueTEC system.
Engine oil
Points to remember
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. For this reason, only use
engine oils and oil filters that are approved for
vehicles with a service system.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
for a list of approved engine oils and oil filters.
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. Otherwise,
you may cause damage to the engine or
exhaust gas aftertreatment; this is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
The table shows which engines oil have been
approved for your vehicle.
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 369
Version: 3.0.3.5
Service products and capacities
Refrigerant of the air-conditioning
system
Model
Engine
model
MB
Approval
GL 350 BlueTEC
642
229.51
GL 450
273
229.5
The air-conditioning system is filled with
R134a refrigerant and a special PAG
lubricant.
GL 550
273
229.5
! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) or
i MB Approval is stated on the containers.
Lubricant additives
! Do not mix any lubricant additives with
the engine oil. This could damage the
engine. Damage resulting from the use of
such lubricant additives in the engine oil is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Using the table below, make sure that the SAE
classification (viscosity) is sufficient for the
temperatures at which the vehicle is
operated. The low temperature
characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate
significantly, e.g by aging, soot and fuel
deposits. It is therefore recommended that
you carry out oil changes regularly using an
approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE
classification.
369
mineral lubricants. Otherwise, you could
damage the air-conditioning system.
Brake fluid
G Warning!
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air; this lowers its boiling point.
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
vapor pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
driving downhill). This would impair braking
efficiency.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
regular intervals. The brake fluid change
intervals can be found in the Service Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz. Information about approved brake
fluids can be obtained from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Coolant
Important safety notes
The coolant is a mixture of water and
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Ranti-corrosion
protection
protection
Rraising the boiling point
The cooling system is filled with coolant at the
factory which contains antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor that ensures protection down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rantifreeze
Z
Technical data
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
370
Vehicle data
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants and on
filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz
Specifications for Service Products, MB
Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You
can also consult an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be
sufficiently protected from corrosion, and
the boiling point will be too low.
Technical data
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 370
Version: 3.0.3.5
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
coolant in the pressurized system is
approximately 266 ‡ (130 †).
Your vehicle has a range of aluminum
components. Use of aluminum components
in the engine make it necessary to specifically
match the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor in
these systems in order to protect the
aluminum parts. Using other antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitors without these
characteristics affects the service life.
The coolant must be used throughout the year
in order to maintain the necessary corrosion
protection and provide protection from
overheating. In the Service Booklet, you can
find information on the intervals for renewal.
The renewal interval is determined by the
coolant type and the cooling system design.
The renewal interval in the Service Booklet is
only valid if the coolant is added or renewed
with Mercedes-Benz approved products.
Therefore, only use MB 326.0 antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor or another Mercedes-Benz
approved product of the same specification.
Information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of the same specification
can be obtained at any authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The coolant is checked at every service date
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the cooling system should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling
system against freezing down to around
-35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ (-45 †); otherwise, heat will
not be dissipated as effectively.
If the coolant level is too low, MB 326.0
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor should be
added. Have the cooling system checked for
leaks.
Windshield and headlamp cleaning
system
G Warning
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
MB SummerFit.
X At temperatures above freezing: add 1
part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water, e.g.
1.34 fl oz (40 ml) MB SummerFit to 1 gal
(4.0 l) of water.
X At temperatures below freezing: add 1
part MB SummerFit to 100 parts washer
fluid, e.g. 1.34 fl oz (40 ml) MB SummerFit
to 1 gal (4.0 l) of water.
Vehicle data
Vehicle data, GL 350 BlueTEC
(164.825)
The data quoted here refers specifically to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 371
Version: 3.0.3.5
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions, GL 350 BlueTEC
Vehicle dimensions, GL 450
Vehicle length
201.1 in (5108 mm)
Vehicle length
201.1 in (5108 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
85.5 in (2170 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
85.5 in (2170 mm)
Vehicle height
72.4 - 75.6 in (1840 1920 mm)54
Vehicle height
72.4 - 75.6 in (1840 1920 mm)56
72.4 - 76.8 in (1840 1950 mm)55
72.4 - 76.8 in (1840 1950 mm)57
Wheelbase
121.1 in (3075 mm)
Wheelbase
121.1 in (3075 mm)
Front track
64.8 in (1645 mm)
Front track
64.8 in (1645 mm)
Rear track
64.9 in (1648 mm)
Rear track
64.9 in (1648 mm)
Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in (202 277 mm)54
Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in (202 277 mm)56
8.0 - 12.1 in (202 307 mm)55
8.0 - 12.1 in (202 307 mm)57
39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Vehicle weight, GL 350 BlueTEC
Maximum roof
load
Maximum 198 lb
(90 kg)
Vehicle data, GL 450 (164.871)
The data quoted here refers specifically to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Turning circle
39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Technical data
Turning circle
371
Vehicle weight, GL 450
Maximum roof
load
Maximum 198 lb
(90 kg)
Vehicle data, GL 550 (164.886)
The data quoted here refers specifically to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
54 Vehicles without Off-road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level set for the vehicle
suspension.
with Off-road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level set for the vehicle
suspension.
56 Vehicles without Off-road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level set for the vehicle
suspension.
57 Vehicles with Off-road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level set for the vehicle
suspension.
55 Vehicles
Z
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
372
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 372
Version: 3.0.3.5
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions, GL 550
Vehicle length
201.1 in (5108 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
85.5 in (2170 mm)
Vehicle height
72.4 - 75.6 in (1840 1920 mm)58
72.4 - 76.8 in (1840 1950 mm)59
Wheel base
121.1 in (3075 mm)
Front track
64.8 in (1645 mm)
Rear track
64.9 in (1648 mm)
Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in (202 277 mm)58
Technical data
8.0 - 12.1 in (202 307 mm)59
Turning circle
39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Vehicle weight, GL 550
Maximum roof
load
58 Vehicles
59 Vehicles
Maximum 198 lb
(90 kg)
without Off-Road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level of the vehicle.
with Off-Road Pro engineering package: the values vary depending on the level of the vehicle.
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 373
Version: 3.0.3.5
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise
reproduced, in whole or in part, without the
written permission of Daimler AG.
As at 15.02.2010
BA 164.8 USA, CA Edition B 2011; 1; 2, en-US
d2sboike
2010-04-21T15:08:44+02:00 - Seite 374
Version: 3.0.3.5
É1645843883LËÍ
1645843883
Order no. 6515 4339 13 Part no. 164 584 38 83 Edition B 2011
Download PDF

advertising